2014 2015 ACADEMIC CATALOG

2014 2015 ACADEMIC CATALOG

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Table Of Contents See aiprograms.info for program duration, tuition, fees, and other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info. Mission, Vision and Values Statements 3 Introduction 4 General Education 6 Program Offerings 8 Advertising 10 (Bachelor of Science) Audio Production 12 (Bachelor of Science) The Art of Cooking 14 (Diploma) Baking & Pastry 16 (Diploma) Baking & Pastry 18 (Associate of Applied Science) Culinary Arts 20 (Associate of Applied Science) Culinary Management 22 (Bachelor of Science) Design Management 24 (Bachelor of Science) Digital Filmmaking & Video Production 26 (Bachelor of Science) Digital Image Management 30 (Diploma) Digital Photography 32 (Bachelor of Fine Arts) Fashion Design 34 (Bachelor of Fine Arts) Fashion Retailing 36 (Diploma) Page Hospitality Management 44 (Bachelor of Science) Interior Design 46 (Associate of Applied Science) Interior Design 50 (Bachelor of Science) Interior Planning with AutoCAD 54 (Associate of Applied Science) Media Arts & Animation 56 (Bachelor of Science) Photography 58 (Bachelor of Fine Arts) Visual Effects & Motion Graphics 60 (Bachelor of Science) Web Design & Development 62 (Diploma) Web Design & Interactive Communications 64 (Diploma) Web Design & Interactive Media 66 (Associate of Applied Science) Web Design & Interactive Media 68 (Bachelor of Science) Course Descriptions 70 Page General Information and Policies 105 Academic Affairs 121 Student Affairs 145 Tuition and Fees 168 Administration Board of Trustees 170 Map 171 Fashion & Retail Management 38 (Bachelor of Science) Graphic Design 40 (Associate of Applied Science) Graphic Design 42 (Bachelor of Science) 1

2

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Mission Statement MISSION The Art Institutes International Minnesota prepares individuals to thrive in a diverse and evolving world by integrating liberal studies and relevant, career-focused instruction in the fields of Design, Fashion, Media Arts, and Culinary Arts. VISION The Art Institutes International Minnesota will be the college of choice for students who are interested in pursuing an academic program of study in the applied arts or culinary fields. Our graduates will be the choice of employers who are seeking highly qualified employees. OBJECTIVES Highly-qualified graduates Quality academic and co-curricular programs Innovative, learning-centered instruction Student-focused, career-oriented support Collaborative, inter-connected community Inclusive, inspiring environment VALUES Integrity Academic excellence Creative thinking and innovation Personal and professional development Responsible stewardship of resources 3

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Introduction CATALOG PREPARATION This catalog was prepared by The Art Institutes International Minnesota, 15 South 9th Street, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55402-3137. The information contained herein was published and effective as of October 2014. Curriculum, fees, expenses, and other matters described herein are subject to change without notice at the discretion of The Art Institutes International Minnesota. For more information, write to the above address or phone 612-332-3361 or 1-800-777-3643. REGISTRATION AND ACCREDITATION The Art Institutes International Minnesota is registered as a private institution with the Minnesota Office of Higher Education, pursuant to section 136A.61 to 136A.71. Registration is not an endorsement of the institution. Credits earned at the institution may not transfer to all other institutions. The Art Institutes International Minnesota is accredited by the Accrediting Council for Independent Colleges and Schools to award certificates, associate s degrees, and bachelor s degrees. The Accrediting Council for Independent Colleges and Schools is listed as a nationally recognized accrediting agency by the United States Department of Education and is recognized by the Council for Higher Education Accreditation. ACICS can be contacted at 750 First Street, NE, Suite 980, Washington, DC 20002-4241. Telephone: 202-336-6780. The Associate in Applied Science in Culinary Arts program and the Art of Cooking diploma program are accredited by The Accrediting Commission of the American Culinary Federation Education Foundation. DEPARTMENT OF HOMELAND SECURITY This school is authorized under Federal law to enroll nonimmigrant alien students. OWNERSHIP The Art Institutes International Minnesota is owned by The Art Institutes International Minnesota, Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of The Art Institutes International LLC, one of the nation s leaders in post-secondary career-oriented education for the creative arts. Based at 210 Sixth Avenue, 33rd floor, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222, The Art Institutes International LLC, through two intermediary limited liability companies, is a subsidiary of Education Management Corporation also located at the same address. ABOUT THE TWIN CITIES The Twin Cities is an exciting place to experience and create the arts. Four major art museums, two orchestras, and regional theater offer plenty of creative inspiration. Stroll through the Sculpture Garden at the Walker Art Center. Marvel at the Aquatennial and the Winter Carnival. Wonder at The Minneapolis Institute of Arts. The Hennepin Avenue Theatre District is the hot spot in town for Broadway productions. You ll also find pop, jazz, and a rock scene that s earned the Twin Cities the nickname of The Land of 10,000 Bands. In nearby Bloomington is the Mall of America, the country s largest shopping complex with more than 400 specialty shops and 40 restaurants. The mall s centerpiece, Nickelodeon Universe, is a $70 million indoor family theme park that covers seven lush acres. For fun, Minneapolis is an aquarian s paradise, with rivers and nearly 20 lakes. More than 150 city parks are accessible for hiking, biking, and skating. In warmer months, spend a sunny afternoon on the 4

THE ART INSTITUTE OF colorado beaches of Lake Calhoun. In winter, enjoy ice-skating, ice fishing, snowmobiling, and skiing. If you re into spectator sports, cheer on the Twins at Target Field, or watch the Vikings, the Wild, the Timberwolves and the Lynx devour the competition. Getting around is easy, too, with a network of mass transit routes, shuttles, and a skyway that connects more than 50 city blocks. THE ART INSTITUTES INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Conveniently located in downtown Minneapolis, The Art Institutes International Minnesota prepares students to seek entry-level opportunities in the visual and practical arts. The Art Institutes International Minnesota was founded in 1964 by Petrena Lowthian establishing what was to become Lowthian College. In 1981, Lowthian College was authorized to award the Associate in Applied Science degree. The Art Institutes International Minnesota acquired the College in early 1997. In 2000, The Art Institutes International Minnesota was granted approval to award the Bachelor of Science degree and in 2004, was granted approval to award the Bachelor of Fine Arts degree. Our students are creative, competitive, and open to new ideas. They place great value on an education that prepares them to seek a challenging entry-level career and a lifetime of personal and professional opportunity. Relating to students at a personal level is emphasized. Our qualified staff of financial planners and employment assistance advisors is committed to providing students with individualized services. Academic advisors and directors help students devise career strategies and choose courses consistent with their educational goals. Our faculty consists of working professionals who strive to strengthen students skills and cultivate their talents. Aspiring creative professionals have the opportunity to learn fundamental business concepts and gain the applied arts knowledge necessary for that important first job in the field. The Art Institutes International Minnesota offers a Skills Enhancement opportunity designed to help students prepare for success in college-level programs. Confidential counseling is available when academic or personal problems create roadblocks to success. Students also are encouraged to join school organizations and participate as volunteers for community service projects supported by The Art Institutes International Minnesota. Whether in the student lounges, the gallery, or the classrooms, the daily gathering of students, faculty, and staff makes it easy to feel the energy, caring, and commitment that underlie education at The Art Institutes International Minnesota. STUDENT BODY Students come to The Art Institutes International Minnesota from all over the United States and abroad. The student body is made up of men and women who have either enrolled directly after completing high school, transferred from colleges and universities, or have left employment situations to prepare for a new career. The Art Institutes International Minnesota s environment offers students the opportunity to earn their degrees alongside students of other creative disciplines that drive the visual and practical arts industries worldwide. 5

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA GENERAL EDUCATION ABOUT GENERAL EDUCATION The General Education Department is the heart of a well-rounded education that puts students program studies in context and gives them the resources and key skills they need to better understand the world around them. General Education courses foster the values of curiosity, ethical thought and actions, critical and creative thought and expression, and reflection on themselves and others within social and historical contexts. General Education engages students to provide a path of life-long learning through the disciplines of Communication, Humanities, Mathematics and Natural Sciences, and Social Sciences. Our goal is to shape a student s creative and theoretical perspectives that forward inter- disciplinary thinking necessary for success. GENERAL EDUCATION STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Written Communication: Graduates will demonstrate effective written communication by providing their audience sufficient information on a topic that is organized and that employs the generally accepted conventions of English usage. 2. Oral Communication: Graduates will demonstrate effective oral communication by providing their audience sufficient information on a topic that is organized and that employs the generally accepted conventions of English usage. 3. Arts and Humanities: Graduates will demonstrate the ability to interpret and analyze artistic work, historical events, or philosophical thought and describe the relevance of the work to themselves, society, and cultures. 4. Behavioral/Social Sciences: Graduates will analyze the nature, diversity, and impact of social, political, psychological, and/or economic thought on the individual, institutions, and cultures. 5. Math/Natural Sciences: Graduates will demonstrate critical thinking and problem- solving skills using mathematical and/ or scientific reasoning to solve problems. 6. Information Literacy: Graduates will demonstrate responsible use of information by discerning authority, by evaluating the relevance of information to their purpose, and by appropriately documenting sources. 6

GENERAL EDUCATION REQUIREMENTS FOR AAS DEGREES All Associate in Applied Science candidates must complete 32 quarter-credits in General Education. The following distribution requirements must be satisfied: a) Communication 12 quarter credits (8 in English Composition and 4 in Verbal Communication); b) Mathematics and Natural Sciences - at least 4 quarter credits; c) Social Sciences - at least 4 quarter credits; d) Humanities - at least four-quarter credits. Additional credits (8) must be selected from the remaining general education offerings. Transitional courses are not included in the General Education total credit requirement. General Education transfer credits will be applied, as appropriate, towards the requirements in each of the categories listed above. GENERAL EDUCATION REQUIREMENTS FOR BS OR BFA DEGREES All Bachelor s degree (Bachelor of Science or a Bachelor of Fine Arts) candidates must complete 56 quarter-credits in General Education. The following distribution requirements must be satisfied: a) Communication - 16 quarter-credits (8 in English Composition and 8 in Verbal Communication); b) Mathematics and Natural Science - at least 8 quarter- credits; c) Social Sciences - at least 8 quarter-credits; d) Humanities - at least 8 quarter-credits. Additional general education courses must be selected for a total of 56 credits. Transitional courses are not included in the General Education total credit requirement. General Education transfer credits will be applied, as appropriate, towards the requirements in each of the categories listed above. GENERAL EDUCATION Course Code Course Name Quarter Credits Hours GE1406 Nutrition 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE1456 Music Appreciation 4 GE1466 Principles of Economics 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE2477 Spanish I 4 GE2478 Spanish II 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3432 History and Culture of Cuisine 4 GE3433 Contemporary Art 4 GE3466 World Music Influences 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 GE4461 Physics 4 7

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Program Offerings Total Quarter Credit Hours Diploma The Art of Cooking 56 Baking & Pastry 50 Digital Image Management 48 Fashion Retailing 48 Web Design & Development 48 Web Design & Interactive Communications 48 Associate of Applied Science Baking & Pastry 90 Culinary Arts 90 Graphic Design 92 Interior Design 92 Interior Planning with AutoCAD 96 Web Design & Interactive Media 92 Bachelor of Science Total Quarter Credit Hours Advertising 180 Audio Production 180 Culinary Management 180 Design Management 180 Digital Filmmaking & Video Production* 180 Fashion & Retail Management 180 Graphic Design 180 Hospitality Management 180 Interior Design* 180 Media Arts & Animation 180 Visual Effects & Motion Graphics 180 Web Design & Interactive Media 180 *Program is being released in a new version. Please note enrollment dates shown in the program layout. Bachelor of Fine Arts Digital Photography 180 Fashion Design 180 Photography 180 8

9

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Advertising BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM The Bachelor s Degree Program in Advertising is a twelve quarter program. The program provides students with skills in conceptual thinking, copywriting, design, marketing and public relations, developing advertising campaigns, the business side of advertising, account and strategic planning. The degree also provides a balance in liberal arts courses as well as educates the student in the application of advertising principles to evolving communication channels (interactive media) and the life skills needed to develop and sustain a career in advertising and related fields. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Theory: Graduates will apply industry knowledge and critical thinking skills to analyze, develop, and implement effective advertising solutions that meet professional standards. 2. Design: Graduates will develop concepts as well as analyze and incorporate aesthetics and layout in the design process for advertising campaigns and marketing communications. 3. Technology and Production: Graduates will demonstrate proficiency with the tools and graphic techniques of the profession to plan and implement production of advertising media such as print collateral, audio and video spots, and Web-interactive materials. 4. Critical Thinking: Graduates will articulate the vision behind their creative work and promote their solutions to design and marketing problems consistent with professional standards. 5. Professionalism: Graduates will demonstrate professional presentation skills, articulation of visual problem solving, and mastery of industry standards, business practices and ethics. 10 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/207 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science Degree in Advertising.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN ADVERTISING COURSE LISTING CREDITS AD1400 History of Advertising 4 AD1420 Conceptual Thinking 4 AD2420 Organizational Behavior 4 AD2430 Fundamentals of Marketing and Advertising** 4 AD2440 Media & Advertising Design** 4 AD2460 Branding 4 AD2490 Dynamics of Integrated Marketing** 4 AD3400 Persuasion and the Consumer 4 AD3420 Copywriting** 4 AD3440 Advertising Campaign** 4 AD3450 Art Direction 4 AD4400 Advanced Copywriting 4 AD4410 Public Relations & Promotion 4 AD4420 Sales 4 AD4440 Advanced Advertising Campaign 4 AD4450 Media Planning and Buying 4 AD4460 Global Business Perspectives 4 AD4480 Capstone** 4 CA2430 Introduction to Video 4 DM2470 Principles of Market Research 4 GD1401 Fundamentals of Design 4 GD1402 Drawing & Perspective 4 GD1403 Typography for Digital Media** 4 GD1420 Image Manipulation 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS GD1431 Design Layout 4 GD1473 Digital Color Theory 4 GD2432 Digital Illustration 4 GD2440 Print Production 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE1466 Principles of Economics 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3433 Contemporary Art 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 GE4461 Physics 4 IM1480 Fundamentals of Interactive Design 4 PA4486 Internship 4 PH1402 Principles of Digital Photography 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 11

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Audio Production BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM Students in the Bachelor of Science degree program in Audio Production offered through The Art Institutes International Minnesota receive instruction in audio engineering using industry-relevant technology and equipment in a hands-on environment. The program is designed to prepare students to seek work with in a variety of areas ranging from live sound reinforcement, studio and remote recording, A/V conference support and audio post production for film, television and online content. Our program provides Audio Production instruction through courses that address both foundational and advanced aspects of the industry. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Production: Graduates will conceptualize, plan, execute, and deliver quality multi-track recordings and voiceovers, and post-production projects, integrating knowledge and application of audio theory, critical listening skills, and industry standards, using industry-related tools. 2. Professionalism: Graduates will demonstrate an understanding of job responsibilities and industry expectations through development of a professional business plan and portfolio. 3. Critical Thinking: Graduates will efficiently troubleshoot and solve problems typically encountered by audio professionals. 4. Business: Graduates will evaluate and integrate the business and economic principles and practices of the audio industry, by creating a comprehensive business plan that demonstrates skill in scheduling, budgeting, leadership, production, and project management. 12 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/2768 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science Degree in Audio Production.

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN AUDIO PRODUCTION COURSE LISTING CREDITS AP1400 Survey of the Music Industry 4 AP1410 Audio Technology I ** 4 AP1420 Digital Audio I ** 4 AP1430 Music Theory I 4 AP1440 Audio Technology II ** 4 AP1450 Music Theory II 4 AP1460 Digital Audio II 4 AP2400 Audio Recording I ** 4 AP2410 Listening and Analysis 4 AP2420 Acoustics 4 AP2440 Audio Recording II 4 AP2450 Electronics 4 AP2460 MIDI Systems I ** 4 AP3400 MIDI Systems II 4 AP3410 Advanced Recording Techniques I ** 4 AP3420 Live Sound Reinforcement I 4 AP3430 Live Sound Reinforcement II 4 AP3440 Synthesis & Sound Design I** 4 AP3450 Advanced Recording Techniques II 4 AP3460 Synthesis & Sound Design II 4 AP4400 Senior Project I ** 4 AP4410 Entertainment Marketing & Management 4 AP4420 Senior Project II 4 AP4430 Portfolio Preparation 4 AP4440 Portfolio ** 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS CA2430 Introduction to Video 4 CA2440 Digital Video Editing 4 DF4420 Media Delivery Systems and Distribution 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1456 Music Appreciation 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3466 World Music Influences 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 GE4461 Physics 4 IM1480 Fundamentals of Interactive Design 4 PA4486 Internship 4 VE2481 Interactive Visual Design 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 13

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA The Art of Cooking DIPLOMA (4 quarters, 56 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM Culinary professionals are multi-tasking wizards. They re experts at preparation and presentation, and excel at split second timing. The culinary field is more than just mastering the skills that are integral to the profession. Culinary students have the opportunity to learn the techniques and the artistry that can transform a customer s dining experience into a full scale event, to gain a sense of food and restaurant styles, be taught how to think and act like a culinary professional, and to understand the trends in the world of culinary arts. Our students may become skilled at the fundamentals of cooking, knife skills, sanitation, safety, and food production. They have the opportunity to learn about modern, regional and classical cuisines, and practice whipping up culinary delights in modern kitchens. Upon graduation, students are prepared to seek entrylevel opportunities as prep cook, line cook and first cook. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to establish and maintain safety and sanitation procedures. 2. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to prepare standardized recipes using a variety of cooking techniques which meet industry quality standards. 3. Graduates will prepare a variety of international recipes utilizing the correct techniques, ingredients and equipment which meet industry quality standards. 4. Graduates will define and articulate the core values of the culinary professional. 14 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/3048 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Diploma Degree in The Art of Cooking.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE DIPLOMA IN THE ART OF COOKING COURSE LISTING CREDITS CU1210 Concepts and Theories of Culinary Techniques 2 CU1610 Fundamentals of Classical Techniques 6 CU1620 American Regional Cuisine 6 CU1642 Introduction to Baking and Pastry Techniques 6 CU2240 Asian Cuisine 2 CU2252 Latin Cuisine 2 CU2272 World Cuisine 2 CU2408 Management, Supervision & Career Development 4 CU2410 Sustainable Purchasing & Controlling Costs 4 CU2451 Food and Beverage Operations Management 4 CU2650 Garde Manger 6 CU2861 A La Carte Kitchen 8 GE1406 Nutrition 4 15

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Baking & Pastry DIPLOMA (4 quarters, 50 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM Baking and Pastry Diploma students obtain a foundational knowledge and skills in the fundamental techniques and theories of the baking and pastry arts and in industry practices. Through applied coursework and hands-on experiences students will build the necessary skills and abilities to confidently meet the challenges of the baking, pastry and food service industry. The curriculum is based on classical principles emphasizing modern techniques and trends in both the classroom and the kitchen. Students are prepared to seek entry-level employment in the culinary industry such as entrylevel pastry cooks, entry level bakers, entry prep cooks, and entry level line cooks. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to establish and maintain safety and sanitation procedures. 2. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to prepare standardized recipes using a variety of cooking, baking and pastry techniques as well as appropriate equipment and tools. 3. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to produce various baked goods and a variety of international and classical pastries and desserts using basic as well as advanced techniques, which meet industry quality standards. 4. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to design, produce, assemble and decorate display and wedding cakes using various finishing methods which meet industry quality standards. 16 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/3048 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Diploma Degree in Baking & Pastry.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE DIPLOMA IN BAKING & PASTRY COURSE LISTING CREDITS CU1210 Concepts and Theories of Culinary Techniques 2 CU1443 Artisan Breads and Baking Production 4 CU1444 European Cakes and Tortes 4 CU1445 Chocolate, Confections & Centerpieces 4 CU1446 Advanced Patisserie and Display Cakes 4 CU1610 Fundamentals of Classical Techniques 6 CU1620 American Regional Cuisine 6 CU1642 Introduction to Baking and Pastry Techniques 6 CU2252 Latin Cuisine 2 CU2408 Management, Supervision & Career Development 4 CU2410 Sustainable Purchasing & Controlling Costs 4 GE1406 Nutrition 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 17

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Baking & Pastry ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE (7 quarters, 90 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM Baking skills with a side of culinary arts describes the dish offered in this associate s degree program. From soup to sabayon and marinades to mousses, the exacting creative expression that characterizes the well rounded pastry chef who fits in every part of the demanding culinary profession. The associate s degree program is designed to prepare students to seek entry-level employment in the professional foodservice industry. Students have the opportunity to develop competencies in the art of baking, cake decoration, artisan breads, desserts and plating, with the addition of culinary skills, and business courses. Considerations must also be made in the kitchen to maximize efficiency - when preparing a large quantity of cakes, breads and pastries for a big group, time, as well as taste, is of the essence. The Art Institutes International Minnesota prepares individuals for this technical specialty in its Baking & Pastry associate s degree program PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to establish and maintain safety and sanitation procedures. 2. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to prepare standardized recipes using a variety of cooking, baking and pastry techniques as well as appropriate equipment and tools. 3. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to produce various baked goods and a variety of international and classical pastries and desserts using basic as well as advanced techniques, which meet industry quality standards. 4. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to design, produce, assemble and decorate display and wedding cakes using various finishing methods which meet industry quality standards. 5. Graduates will demonstrate proficiency with common business practices within the foodservice industry including inventory, menu planning, cost control and food purchasing. 18 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/210 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Associate of Applied Science Degree in Baking & Pastry.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN BAKING & PASTRY COURSE LISTING CREDITS CU1210 Concepts and Theories of Culinary Techniques 2 CU1443 Artisan Breads and Baking Production 4 CU1444 European Cakes and Tortes 4 CU1445 Chocolate, Confections and Centerpieces 4 CU1446 Advanced Patisserie and Display Cakes 4 CU1610 Fundamentals of Classical Techniques 6 CU1620 American Regional Cuisine 6 CU1642 Introduction to Baking and Pastry Techniques 6 CU2252 Latin Cuisine 2 CU2408 Management, Supervision & Career Development 4 CU2409 Management by Menu 4 CU2410 Sustainable Purchasing & Controlling Costs 4 CU2650 Garde Manger 6 GE1406 Nutrition 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2477 Spanish I 4 GE2478 Spanish II 4 PA3411 Capstone/Portfolio 2 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 19

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Culinary Arts ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE (7 quarters, 90 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM Today, America s interest in culinary arts is growing and prospering as never before. Few occupations can offer the creativity and excitement found in the culinary arts. The Associate of Applied Science in Culinary Arts degree program consists of courses covering basic skills and techniques, purchasing and cost control, kitchen management, international cuisine, nutrition, dining room procedures, garde manger, baking and pastries, à la carte kitchen, and an internship with a food service operation in the greater metropolitan area. The curriculum for this program is based on the classical principles of Escoffier, emphasizing progressive techniques and trends. The Art Institutes International Minnesota graduates will be prepared to seek entry-level positions in the field of hospitality and culinary arts. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Graduates will establish and maintain safety and sanitation procedures. 2. Graduates will prepare standardized recipes using a variety of cooking techniques which meet industry quality standards. 3. Graduates will prepare a variety of international recipes utilizing the correct techniques, ingredients and equipment which meet industry quality standards. 4. Graduates will describe and perform tasks related to common business practices in the culinary industry, including inventory, menu planning, cost control, and food purchasing. 5. Graduates will describe the principles of food and beverage management. 6. Graduates will define and articulate the core values of the culinary professional. 20 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/211 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Associate of Applied Science Degree in Culinary Arts.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN CULINARY ARTS COURSE LISTING CREDITS CU1210 Concepts and Theories of Culinary Techniques 2 CU1610 Fundamentals of Classical Techniques 6 CU1620 American Regional Cuisine 6 CU1642 Introduction to Baking and Pastry Techniques 6 CU2240 Asian Cuisine 2 CU2252 Latin Cuisine 2 CU2272 World Cuisine 2 CU2408 Management, Supervision & Career Development 4 CU2409 Management by Menu 4 CU2410 Sustainable Purchasing & Controlling Costs 4 CU2451 Food and Beverages Operations Management 4 CU2650 Garde Manger 6 CU2861 A La Carte Kitchen 8 GE1406 Nutrition 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2477 Spanish I 4 GE2478 Spanish II 4 PA3411 Capstone/Portfolio 2 21

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Culinary Management BACHELOR OF Science (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM No matter how good the food is, the service you receive at a restaurant is what affects most people s decision to return. Your meal should arrive in reasonable time, the establishment should be clean, and your host and servers should be courteous. It s the manager who ultimately is responsible for the quality of your dining experience. It s a challenging job but the rewards can be delicious. Managers control everything, from front of the house (the public part of the restaurant) to the back of the house (the kitchen and restaurant administration). Their goal is to bring customers back again and again. A manager s leadership and decisions impact everyone from employees to diners. This bachelor s degree program builds upon fundamental culinary skills to prepare you for management positions in the food service industry. You begin with the basics, from knife skills and kitchen procedures to nutrition, speed and timing, and presentation. From here, you progress to more advanced areas such as baking and pastry, garde manger (cold kitchen), international and American cuisine, à la carte, and dining room operations. You ll also study human resource management, event, beverage and menu management, customer service management, marketing, leadership, and even food service for the retirement community. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Graduates will identify, establish and maintain safety and sanitation procedures which meet industry quality standards. 2. Graduates will demonstrate and articulate an awareness of the cross-cultural, moral, ethical and environmental issues in hospitality organizations and their relationship with all stakeholders. 3. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to analyze the food and beverage cost-control cycle and accounting practices, and implement controls to manage, maintain and ensure profitability. 4. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to prepare standardized recipes using a variety of cooking techniques which meet industry quality standards. 5. Graduates will prepare a variety of international recipes using a variety of cooking techniques which meet industry quality standards. 6. Graduates will apply standard Human Resource principles in regards to recruiting, retaining, and developing staff. 7. Graduates will create a business plan for a food service outlet or hospitality company. 22 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/212 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science Degree in Culinary Management.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE BACHELOR OF Science DEGREE IN CULINARY MANAGEMENT COURSE LISTING CREDITS AD2430 Fundamentals of Marketing and Advertising 4 CU1210 Concepts and Theories of Culinary Techniques 2 CU1610 Fundamentals of Classical Techniques 6 CU1620 American Regional Cuisine 6 CU1642 Introduction to Baking and Pastry Techniques 6 CU2240 Asian Cuisine 2 CU2252 Latin Cuisine 2 CU2272 World Cuisine 2 CU2273 Classical European Cuisine 2 CU2408 Management, Supervision & Career Development 4 CU2409 Management by Menu 4 CU2410 Sustainable Purchasing & Controlling Costs 4 CU2451 Food and Beverages Operations Management 4 CU2650 Garde Manger 6 CU2861 A La Carte Kitchen 8 CU3423 Catering and Event Management 4 CU3444 Art Culinaire 4 CU3455 Human Resources Management 4 CU3480 Quality Service Management and Training 4 CU3481 Foodservice Technology 4 CU3490 Leadership and Organizational Development 4 CU4410 Foodservice Financial Management 4 CU4412 Exploring Wines and the Culinary Arts 4 CU4420 Facilities Management and Design 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS CU4421 Culinary Senior Practicum 4 CU4430 Global Management/Operations 4 CU4492 Innovation and Entrepreneurship 4 GE1406 Nutrition 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE2477 Spanish I 4 GE2478 Spanish II 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3432 History and Culture of Cuisine 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 HM2480 Hospitality Law 4 HM2481 Institutional Operations 4 PA3411 Capstone/Portfolio 2 PA3415 Management Internship 4 23

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Design Management BACHELOR OF Science (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM Design Management is the art of bridging the disciplines of management, design, and production. An essential component to successful business strategies, design management creates the conditions in which successful new ventures may be conceived, designed, produced, and consumed. The Design Management program at The Art Institutes International Minnesota is designed to prepare students to manage creative projects and teams, and utilize the analytical skills necessary to identify opportunities for innovation. Operating on a business level, Design Management serves as a powerful strategic tool to differentiate a company through innovative and creative products, services, and brands. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Graduates will understand, encourage and inspire the creative process from concept to execution. 2. Graduates will identify opportunities and execute innovative solutions to a variety of problems. 3. Graduates will demonstrate proficiency in brand development and related business communication tools. 4. Graduates will manage high-performance teams and business resources. 24 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/215 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science Degree in Design Management.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE BACHELOR OF Science DEGREE IN DESIGN MANAGEMENT COURSE LISTING CREDITS AD2420 Organizational Behavior** 4 AD2430 Fundamentals of Marketing and Advertising** 4 AD2460 Branding 4 AD4420 Sales 4 AD4460 Global Business Perspectives 4 DM1420 Introduction to Design Management 4 DM2400 Technology and Productivity 4 DM2410 Fundamentals of Business 4 DM2430 Principles of Managerial Accounting 4 DM2470 Principles of Market Research 4 DM2480 Business Statistics for Design** 4 DM2490 Project Management** 4 DM3400 Financial Issues in Design** 4 DM3460 Business Communications 4 DM3480 Managing Creativity and Innovation** 4 DM4410 Design Management Seminar 4 DM4450 Business Plan** 4 DM4480 Capstone** 4 GD1401 Fundamentals of Design 4 GD1402 Drawing and Perspective 4 GD1473 Digital Color Theory 4 GD3470 Law & the Commercial Arts 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS GE1433 Art History 4 GE1466 Principles of Economics 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3433 Contemporary Art 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 GE4461 Physics 4 PA4486 Internship 4 SM1401 Studio Major I 4 SM1402 Studio Major II 4 SM2403 Studio Major III 4 SM2404 Studio Major IV 4 SM3405 Studio Major V 4 SM3406 Studio Major VI 4 SM4407 Studio Major VII 4 SM4408 Studio Major VIII 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 25

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Program will start January, 2015. Contact the campus for enrollment information. Please note this program does not prescribe to the standard course numbering rationale. Digital Filmmaking & Video Production BACHELOR OF Science (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM The Bachelor of Science degree program in Digital Filmmaking & Video Production at The Art Institutes International Minnesota is designed to offer a balance in theory, history, and practical training to produce competent and literate graduates who are proficient in the technical, organizational, historical, and creative aspects of visual storytelling. Students will have the opportunity to script and produce screenplays, teleplays, sitcoms, commercials and music videos. In addition, the program is designed to enhance technical competencies, as students will be offered advanced courses in these areas and provided the opportunity to concentrate in their chosen fields. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Communication: Graduates will integrate the elements of storytelling; collaborate with and direct participants in a project; and combine effective written, oral, and visual communication skills to communicate ideas to employers, colleagues, and clients. 4. Production: Graduates will direct and execute successful production plans; identify, anticipate and find solutions to technical, logistical, storytelling, and personnel problems; integrate theory, techniques, and terminology of the field; and apply cinematography, lighting, and audio as components of the storytelling process. 5. Post-Production: Graduates will integrate technical aptitude, aesthetic decision-making, and an awareness of intended audience through technical proficiency in editing, producing and assembling audio and video elements of a film, including motion graphics and compositing. 6. Professionalism: Graduates will present and conduct themselves professionally; demonstrate mastery of knowledge of the film industry and industry expectations; and apply business principles and practices while maintaining legal and ethical standards. 2. Context: Graduates will evaluate aesthetics and a wide range of stories in various genres and film history and develop research skills to support creative vision and outcome. 3. Pre-Production: Graduates will conceptualize and create scripts, story boards, and production development plans. 26 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/2274 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science Degree in Digital Filmmaking & Video Production.

BACHELOR OF Science DEGREE IN DIGITAL FILMMAKING & VIDEO PRODUCTION COURSE LISTING CREDITS AUDB101 Fundamentals of Audio 4 DFVB101 Survey of Digital Filmmaking & Video Production 4 DFVB102 Introduction to Filmmaking Applications & Design 4 DFVB103 Fundamentals of Video Production 4 DFVB105 Conceptual Storytelling 4 DFVB107 Fundamentals of Producing & Directing 4 DFVB111 Principles of Cinematography 4 DFVB113 Fundamentals of Editing 4 DFVB133 Lighting for Digital Film 4 DFVB202 Digital Cinematography 4 DFVB203 Editing 4 DFVB204 Acting & Directing 4 DFVB205 History of Film & Media 4 DFVB212 Broadcast Graphics I 4 DFVB213 Studio Production 4 DFVB214 Scriptwriting 4 DFVB222 Broadcast Graphics II 4 DFVB223 Intermediate Audio 4 DFVB233 Electronic Field Production 4 DFVB307 Media Theory & Criticism 4 DFVB308 Media Delivery Systems & Distribution 4 DFVB309 Portfolio I 4 DFVB313 Sound Design 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS DFVB323 Short Media Production 4 DFVB332 Senior Project Preparation 4 DFVB333 Senior Project Production 4 DFVB353 Compositing for Digital Film 4 DFVB409 Portfolio II 4 FND135 Image Manipulation 4 FND150 Digital Color Theory 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3433 Contemporary Art 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 GE4461 Physics 4 DFVB306 Internship 4 DFVB316 Media Production Workshop 4 27

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA As of January, 2015 this program will no longer enroll new students. Digital Filmmaking & Video Production BACHELOR OF Science (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM The Bachelor of Science degree program in Digital Filmmaking & Video Production at The Art Institutes International Minnesota is designed to offer a balance in theory, history, and practical training to produce competent and literate graduates who are proficient in the technical, organizational, historical, and creative aspects of visual storytelling. Students will have the opportunity to script and produce screenplays, teleplays, sitcoms, commercials and music videos. In addition, the program is designed to enhance technical competencies, as students will be offered advanced courses in these areas and provided the opportunity to concentrate in their chosen fields. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Communication: Graduates will integrate the elements of storytelling; collaborate with and direct participants in a project; and combine effective written, oral, and visual communication skills to communicate ideas to employers, colleagues, and clients. 4. Production: Graduates will direct and execute successful production plans; identify, anticipate and find solutions to technical, logistical, storytelling, and personnel problems; integrate theory, techniques, and terminology of the field; and apply cinematography, lighting, and audio as components of the storytelling process. 5. Post-Production: Graduates will integrate technical aptitude, aesthetic decision-making, and an awareness of intended audience through technical proficiency in editing, producing and assembling audio and video elements of a film, including motion graphics and compositing. 6. Professionalism: Graduates will present and conduct themselves professionally; demonstrate mastery of knowledge of the film industry and industry expectations; and apply business principles and practices while maintaining legal and ethical standards. 2. Context: Graduates will evaluate aesthetics and a wide range of stories in various genres and film history and develop research skills to support creative vision and outcome. 3. Pre-Production: Graduates will conceptualize and create scripts, story boards, and production development plans. 28 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/2274 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science Degree in Digital Filmmaking & Video Production.

BACHELOR OF Science DEGREE IN DIGITAL FILMMAKING & VIDEO PRODUCTION COURSE LISTING CREDITS CA1400 Production Fundamentals 4 CA2430 Introduction to Video** 4 CA2440 Digital Video Editing 4 DF1400 Survey of Digital Filmmaking and Video Production 4 DF1410 Principles of Preproduction 4 DF1440 Lighting 4 DF2400 Fundamentals of Cinematography** 4 DF2410 Fundamentals of Producing & Directing 4 DF2420 Studio Production 4 DF2430 Electronic Field Production** 4 DF2440 History of Motion Media and Mass Communication 4 DF3400 Media Theory and Criticism 4 DF3410 Acting and Directing 4 DF3420 Sound Design 4 DF3430 Short Media Production 4 DF3440 Senior Project Preparation** 4 DF3450 Media Production Workshop 4 DF3460 Audio Post Production 4 DF4400 Senior Project Production 4 DF4410 Multi-Camera Production 4 DF4430 Senior Project Post-Production 4 DF4440 Senior Portfolio and Defense** 4 DF4450 Internship 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS GD1420 Image Manipulation 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3433 Contemporary Art 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 GE4461 Physics 4 IM1480 Fundamentals of Interactive Design 4 PH1402 Principles of Digital Photography 4 VE1438 Computer Graphics 4 VE1457 Conceptual Storytelling 4 VE2453 Introduction to VFX 4 VE2481 Interactive Visual Design 4 VE3490 Advanced Editing Principles 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 29

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Digital Image Management DIPLOMA (4 quarters, 48 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM The Digital Image Management diploma program will prepare students to seek entry-level positions in their chosen field. Students are primarily focused on the creation of digital photography and videos, publishing electronic images for print and the web, and basic business principles. Students will gain knowledge in the key functions of digital photography and video; this involves the basics of how to produce digital photographs and videos that effectively communicate their ideas, the techniques of digital editing, asset management, and publishing and printing of digital files. Students will also be taught business principles including how to keep financial records, market their work, and the basic knowledge of licensing, copyright laws, contracts, and negotiation. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Graduates will demonstrate knowledge and control of the photographic process, including image manipulation, photo retouching, color management, printing, network use and digital asset management. 2. Graduates will demonstrate knowledge of the workings of a large, multi- functional commercial photographic studio, its business and operations, including key concepts of business plans, competitive business strategies, human resources, database management, and financial principles. 3. Graduates will create advanced market research including branding, competitive analysis, and direct marketing. 30 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/3128 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Diploma Degree in Digital Image Management.

DIPLOMA IN DIGITAL IMAGE MANAGEMENT COURSE LISTING CREDITS CA2430 Introduction to Video 4 GD3470 Law & the Commercial Arts 4 PH1402 Principles of Digital Photography 4 PH1413 Fundamentals of Lighting 4 PH1450 Photographic Design 4 PH2413 Advanced Lighting 4 PH2451 Digital Photographic Production 4 PH2460 Digital Darkroom 4 PH2470 Editorial Photography 4 PH2476 Multimedia for Photographers 4 PH3400 The Business of Photography 4 PH3413 Photographic Studio 4 31

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Program will start January, 2015. Contact the campus for enrollment information. Please note this program does not prescribe to the standard course numbering rationale. Digital Photography BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM The Bachelor of Fine Arts Degree program at the Art Institutes International Minnesota will provide students the opportunity to obtain key technical skills with basic classes in photography (both traditional darkroom and digital), design, and layout. As students gain proficiency, they will increase their skill level with coursework in studio and product photography, in-depth topical explorations of subject, and professional level digital photographic printing. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Professional Presentation: Graduates will produce a portfolio of original work for current media and multiple platforms, integrating industry standards, personal interest, and career specialization. 2. Critical Thinking: Graduates will assess the historical and social impact of photography and evaluate how their photographs fit within this context. 3. Visual Communication: Graduates will develop a style and vision conveying a personal point of view using problem solving processes that integrate extraordinary print quality and skillful judgment of a esthetic value. 4. Business: Graduates will conceptualize, plan, and implement marketing strategies to create a successful business model. 5. Lighting: Graduates will exhibit technical excellence in lighting and demonstrate inclusion or exclusion of ambient light sources, placement of main light source, degree of diffusion, control of overall lighting contrast, and separation of subject and background. 6. Post-Production: Graduates will exhibit technical excellence in post-production and demonstrate retouching based on professional parameters, Integrate multiple images together to illustrate a concept, and use selection techniques, alpha channels, layer masks, blending modes, and layer techniques demonstrating a mastery of image manipulation techniques. 7. Workflow: Graduates will exhibit technical excellence in digital asset management and demonstrate how to process and manage images and time-based media, employ tools, menus, and keywords, manage and archive digital image files on external sources. 32 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/4586 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Fine Arts Degree in Digital Photography.

BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS IN DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY COURSE LISTING CREDITS FND110 Observational Drawing 4 FND135 Image Manipulation 4 FND150 Digital Color Theory 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3433 Contemporary Art 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 GE4461 Physics 4 PA4486 Internship 4 PHOB101 Principles of Photography 4 PHOB102 Introduction to Photography Applications 4 PHOB103 Digital Image Management 4 PHOB105 Photojournalism 4 PHOB112 Photographic Design 4 PHOB113 Lighting 4 PHOB115 History of Photography 4 PHOB122 View Camera Theory 4 PHOB123 Color Management & Printing 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS PHOB202 Studio Photography 4 PHOB203 Photographic Post-Production 4 PHOB205 Advertising/Art Direction 4 PHOB208 Business of Photography 4 PHOB209 Portfolio I 4 PHOB213 Time-Based Media I 4 PHOB222 Web Design for Non-Majors 4 PHOB223 Advanced Lighting 4 PHOB232 Portraiture 4 PHOB233 Advanced Photographic Post-Production 4 PHOB242 Editorial Photography 4 PHOB302 Location Photography 4 PHOB303 Time-Based Media II 4 PHOB307 Photographic Essay 4 PHOB317 Photography Criticism 4 PHOB408 Photography Marketing & Portfolio Package 4 PHOB419 Portfolio II 4 Program Elective Choose from AD3440 Advertising Campaign or GD3455 Media Design 4 33

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Fashion Design BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM The Fashion Design program explores industry practices from concept to consumer. Coursework incorporates technical sketching and fashion illustration, flat patternmaking and draping, computer-aided design, garment construction and fit, industry software knowledge, and conceptual and critical thinking. The curriculum offers exposure to global fashion business practices, product development, entrepreneurship and professional presentations. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Design: Graduates integrate the art of fashion design with the knowledge of apparel production processes from concept development through finished product. 2. Production Skills: Graduates integrate advanced skills in construction, textiles, draping, fitting, patternmaking, product and concept development in relation to a production setting. 3. Technology: Graduates use industry software to develop advanced technical sketching and computer design skills and produce specification sheets. 4. Context and Critical Thinking: Graduates evaluate interconnections of historical perspectives, global events, apparel forecasting, design, and color to assess impact on apparel design business trends. 5. Professionalism: Graduates articulate the nature and culture of the fashion industry, present innovative design concepts, and exemplify professional ethics and standards. 34 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/3668 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Fine Arts Degree in Fashion Design.

BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS DEGREE IN FASHION DESIGN COURSE LISTING CREDITS FD1430 Fashion Illustration 4 FD2420 Fundamentals of Construction 4 FD2430 Fundamentals of Patternmaking 4 FD2450 Technical Drawing and Design 4 FD2475 Advanced Construction 4 FD2480 Advanced Patternmaking 4 FD2490 Research and Sourcing Fundamentals 4 FD3420 Draping and Fitting Analysis 4 FD3430 Concept Development 4 FD3440 Computer Patternmaking 4 FD3450 Design Studio Women s Wear 4 FD3460 Computer Production Systems 4 FD3470 Design Studio - Menswear 4 FD3480 Surface Design 4 FD3490 Fashion Career Management 4 FD4410 Senior Collection Concept and Technical 4 FD4430 Digital Textile Design 4 FD4450 Senior Collection Technical and Production 4 FD4470 Capstone 4 FD4490 Internship 4 FRM1400 Fashion History I 4 FRM1401 Fashion History II 4 FRM1410 Fundamentals of Management Technology 4 FRM1433 Textiles and Fabrics 4 FRM2415 Apparel Evaluation and Construction 4 FRM4425 Trends and Concepts in Apparel 4 FRM4461 Product Development 4 GD1401 Fundamentals of Design 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS GD1402 Drawing and Perspective 4 GD1420 Image Manipulation 4 GD1473 Digital Color Theory 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE1466 Principles of Economics 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3433 Contemporary Art 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 35

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Fashion Retailing DIPLOMA (4 quarters, 48 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM The Fashion Retailing Diploma program teaches students how to use their combined creative and business skills to display, market, and sell fashion merchandise. The trained student will be able to effectively understand and meet the customer s needs, and ultimately encourage sales. This is accomplished by having a keen awareness to the changing needs of the consumer, learning how to identify and predict new style trends, and by being able to conceptualize and promote fashion displays and sales campaigns. Individuals in fashion retailing will learn how to evaluate apparel construction, identify appropriate characteristics and uses of different textiles. They will also gain knowledge of consumer behavior, retail operations, visual merchandising, the larger marketplace, and business skills. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to combine creative and business skills to display, market, and sell fashion merchandise. 2. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to understand and meet the customer s needs, and ultimately encourage sales. 3. Graduates will demonstrate an awareness of the changing needs of the consumer, identify and predict new style trends, and use this information to conceptualize and promote fashion displays and sales campaigns. 4. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to evaluate apparel construction and identify appropriate characteristics and uses of different textiles. 5. Graduates will demonstrate knowledge of consumer behavior, retail operations, visual merchandising, the larger marketplace, and business skills. 36 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/3129 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Diploma Degree in Fashion Retailing.

DIPLOMA IN FASHION RETAILING COURSE LISTING CREDITS AD2430 Fundamentals of Marketing and Advertising 4 AD2460 Branding 4 DM2410 Fundamentals of Business 4 FRM1433 Textiles and Fabrics 4 FRM1442 Introduction to Retailing 4 FRM2400 Consumer Behavior 4 FRM2415 Apparel Evaluation and Construction 4 FRM2490 Visual Merchandising 4 FRM3425 Intro to Manufacturing 4 FRM3455 Merchandise Management 4 FRM4420 Retail Operations and Technology 4 FRM4425 Trends and Concepts in Apparel 4 37

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Fashion & Retail Management BACHELOR OF Science (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM The Bachelor s degree in Fashion & Retail Management program is a twelve-quarter program that will offer experience across disciplines in business, fashion, and design, covering both soft and hard lines. This crossfunctional focus will allow students to expand beyond traditional fashion design positions and choose among options in manufacturing, design and retailing. The content of the curriculum includes fashion industry trends and manufacturing, general business, management, operations and compliance, retailing, marketing, advertising, and design. Students will have the opportunity to learn how to effectively bridge the gap between designers and the retail market. They will be required to both identify and anticipate fashion trends, as well as to develop the decision-making skills needed to insure that the preferred consumer goods are in stock at the appropriate time. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Technology: Graduates will utilize advanced business and design software for marketing, management, publications, social media, communication and visual merchandising. 3. Retail Management: Graduates will apply the elements of retail management including event planning, operations, customer service, inventory management, internal controls, and brand representation. 4. Visual Merchandising: Graduates will design and critique visual merchandising as a communication tool to market merchandise to the consumer. 5. Professionalism: Graduates will demonstrate professional presentation skills through integrating and articulating appropriate communication skills, knowledge of fashion marketing and management and industry standards, professional practices, and ethics. 6. Fashion Branding: Graduates will evaluate and assess fashion branding, utilizing product trends, brand identity, and forecasting as related to creating a brand image. 2. Marketing Context: Graduates will analyze consumer behavior utilizing target markets, demographics, psychographics, and cultural, social and individual variables to influence the buyer decision process. 38 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/214 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science Degree in Fashion & Retail Management.

BACHELOR OF Science DEGREE IN FASHION & RETAIL MANAGEMENT COURSE LISTING CREDITS AD2420 Organizational Behavior 4 AD2430 Fundamentals of Marketing and Advertising 4 AD2460 Branding 4 AD4410 Public Relations & Promotion 4 AD4420 Sales 4 AD4460 Global Business Perspectives 4 DM2410 Fundamentals of Business** 4 DM2430 Principles of Managerial Accounting 4 DM2470 Principles of Market Research 4 DM2490 Project Management 4 DM3460 Business Communications 4 DM4450 Business Plan 4 FRM1400 Fashion History I 4 FRM1401 Fashion History II 4 FRM1410 Fundamentals of Management 4 FRM1433 Textiles and Fiber 4 FRM1442 Introduction to Retailing** 4 FRM2400 Consumer Behavior 4 FRM2415 Apparel Evaluation and Construction 4 FRM2475 Retail Mathematics** 4 FRM2490 Visual Merchandising 4 FRM3425 Introduction to Manufacturing 4 FRM3455 Merchandise Management** 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS FRM4410 Web Marketing for Fashion Retail Management 4 FRM4420 Retail Operations and Technology 4 FRM4425 Trends and Concepts in Apparel 4 FRM4461 Product Development 4 FRM4495 Special Topics in Fashion & Retail Management 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE1466 Principles of Economics 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3433 Contemporary Art 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 IM1480 Fundamentals of Interactive Design 4 PA4486 Internship 4 PA4487 Portfolio 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 39

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Graphic Design ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE (7 quarters, 92 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM Glossy magazines, digital media, corporate stationery, television graphics, billboards - all are composed of images, design, and printed words that work together to sell products and services, or to convey messages. This is the fundamental concept of graphic design, and it s the basis of some of today s most dynamic fields - advertising, publishing, television and interactive communications. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Design Theory: Graduates will apply theories and knowledge of design to develop creative solutions to interior design problems. 2. Communication: Graduates will demonstrate effective oral, written and visual communication skills needed for success in the interior design field. The Graphic Design program at The Art Institutes International Minnesota is the first step toward a career in commercial graphics. Initially, students develop an understanding of color and composition, design and typography, and have the opportunity to learn accurate drawing skills. As they progress through the program, students have the opportunity to learn to offer effective solutions. 3. Codes & Standards: Graduates will solve interior design problems in accordance with applicable codes and industry standards. 4. Material Use: Graduates will produce effective designs using appropriate materials and products. 5. Professionalism: Graduates will adhere to ethical and legal standards of the interior design profession as demonstrated in a portfolio of their work. 40 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/216 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Associate of Applied Science Degree in Graphic Design.

ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN GRAPHIC DESIGN COURSE LISTING CREDITS GD1401 Fundamentals of Design 4 GD1402 Drawing and Perspective 4 GD1403 Typography for Digital Media** 4 GD1411 Intermediate Drawing 4 GD1420 Image Manipulation 4 GD1430 Illustration 4 GD1431 Design Layout 4 GD1473 Digital Color Theory 4 GD2432 Digital Illustration 4 GD2440 Print Production** 4 GD3431 Advanced Design** 4 GD3465 Publication Design 4 GD4480 Design Production Team 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 IM1480 Fundamentals of Interactive Design 4 PA4485 Portfolio Preparation** 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 41

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Graphic Design BACHELOR OF Science (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM The Bachelor of Science Program in Graphic Design is a twelve-quarter program. The Graphic Design degree program teaches students to express themselves creatively while visually communicating a message. The Graphic Design degree program emphasizes hands-on learning. Students in the Graphic Design degree program use industry-related technology and software. Course topics in the Graphic Design degree program include typography, illustration, and package design. With a Graphic Design degree, graduates may seek entry-level jobs like graphic designer, computer artist, and production artist. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Design Theory: Graduates will solve complex interior design problems using the design process and their knowledge of principles, theories and applications to analyze the client profile and project program, both individually and collaboratively. 2. Communication: Graduates will provide interior design services using effective oral, written, and visual communication employing a variety of means, methods and technologies, in both 2- and 3-dimensions. The Graphic Design program at The Art Institutes International Minnesota is the first step toward a career in commercial graphics. Initially, students develop an understanding of color and composition, design and typography, and learn accurate drawing skills. As they progress through the program, students are given instruction in creative problem solving and learn to offer solutions that are effective in the business world. Emphasis is placed on concept development and creative problem solving. Skills and techniques of computer graphics and electronic imaging are taught by master professionals. Tools include scanners, digital cameras, and computer-based hardware and software. Advanced instruction includes the execution of assignments encountered by professionals in the field. 3. Building Systems: Graduates will produce interior design solutions that constructively integrate with available building, environmental, and property management systems, as well as prevailing codes and standards of use, maintenance and sustainability. 4. Interior Finish Materials: Graduates will specify and apply to their solutions, finish materials that meet prevailing standards of use, maintenance, sustainability, regulatory compliance, and aesthetics. 5. Professionalism: Graduates will provide professional services based on their body of knowledge with a standard of care that meets both client needs and protects the health, safety, and welfare of the public in an ethical and legal manner. 42 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/215 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science Degree in Graphic Design.

BACHELOR OF Science IN GRAPHIC DESIGN COURSE LISTING CREDITS CA2430 Introduction to Video 4 GD1401 Fundamentals of Design 4 GD1402 Drawing and Perspective 4 GD1403 Typography for Digital Media** 4 GD1411 Intermediate Drawing 4 GD1420 Image Manipulation 4 GD1430 Illustration 4 GD1431 Design Layout 4 GD1473 Digital Color Theory 4 GD2421 Art and Design Concepts 4 GD2425 Advanced Typography 4 GD2432 Digital Illustration 4 GD2433 Electronic Design 4 GD2437 Design History 4 GD2440 Print Production** 4 GD2480 Designing for the Web 4 GD3411 Corporate Identity & Communications 4 GD3431 Advanced Design** 4 GD3435 Media Design 4 GD3445 Marketing Design 4 GD3455 Package Design 4 GD3465 Publication Design 4 GD3470 Law & the Commercial Arts 4 GD4435 Advanced Illustration 4 GD4480 Design Production Team 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3433 Contemporary Art 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 GE4461 Physics 4 IM1480 Fundamentals of Interactive Design 4 IM2440 User Centered Interface Design 4 PA4485 Portfolio Preparation** 4 PA4486 Internship 4 PA4487 Portfolio 4 PH1402 Principles of Digital Photography 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 43

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Hospitality Management BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM The world s most illustrious hotels, restaurants, and resorts build their reputations on being able to meet customer expectations and demands for service, quality, diversity of product, and professional expertise. At The Art Institutes International Minnesota, we understand that successful communication between all the players in the Hospitality Management business in the kitchen and in the front of the house from the front desk to housekeeping, keeps things running smoothly and contributes to the overall success of any hospitality venture. Curriculum for the Bachelor of Science in Hospitality Management degree program begins with an introduction to the variety and scope of positions within the hospitality industry. Students have the opportunity to explore the various dimensions of hospitality, such as the role of culinary education and various entry-level career opportunities, before moving on to both practical and theoretical skills in the business arena. Purchasing, budgeting, planning and cost control knowledge informs students of the market requirements of running a hotel, restaurant or institutional business. Students will also receive instruction in the marketing, financial management, law, facilities management, and travel industry necessary in the operation of a business in the various segments of the multi-faceted hospitality industry. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Graduates will demonstrate and articulate an awareness of the cross-cultural, moral, ethical and environmental issues in hospitality organizations and their relationship with all stakeholders. 2. Graduates will list, explore and critically analyze the principles and practices impacting contemporary issues affecting the global hospitality industry. 3. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to differentiate between the many roles and responsibilities of a manager within a range of hospitality environments. 4. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to implement operational sales and marketing techniques in hospitality organizations. 5. Graduates will prepare, maintain, analyze, and utilize financial documents and data related to hospitality organizations. 6. Graduates will create a business plan for a food service outlet or hospitality company. 44 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/955 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science Degree in Hospitality Management.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN HOSPITALITY MANAGEMENT COURSE LISTING CREDITS AD2430 Fundamentals of Marketing and Advertising 4 CU1210 Concepts and Theories of Culinary Techniques 2 CU1610 Fundamentals of Classical Techniques 6 CU1620 American Regional Cuisine 6 CU2252 Latin Cuisine 2 CU2408 Management, Supervision & Career Development 4 CU2451 Food and Beverage Operations Management 4 CU2861 A La Carte Kitchen 8 CU3423 Catering and Event Management 4 CU3455 Human Resources Management 4 CU3480 Quality Service Management and Training 4 CU4412 Exploring Wines and the Culinary Arts 4 CU4420 Facilities Management and Design 4 CU4430 Global Management and Operations in the Hospitality Industry 4 DM2430 Principles Of Managerial Accounting 4 GE1406 Nutrition 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1466 Principles of Economics 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS GE2477 Spanish I 4 GE2478 Spanish II 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4461 Physics 4 HM1430 Sales and Public Relations 4 HM1440 Lodging Operations 4 HM2450 Front Office Management 4 HM2451 Purchasing/Contract Service 4 HM2480 Hospitality Law 4 HM2481 Institutional Operations 4 HM3412 Travel and Tourism 4 HM3490 Risk Management 4 HM3491 Multi-Unit/Chain/Franchise Operations 4 HM4401 Hospitality Accounting 4 HM4430 Hospitality Capstone ** 4 PA4416 HM Management Internship 16 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 45

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Program will start January, 2015. Contact the campus for enrollment information. Please note this program does not prescribe to the standard course numbering rationale. Interior Design ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE (8 quarters, 92 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM Our associate s level Interior Design degree program is carefully balanced and designed to provide a threedimensional understanding of space, form, and function in residential design. In early courses, students have the opportunity to learn the basics of drawing, drafting, color, and design, and the fundamentals of space planning and perspective. In later quarters, students have the opportunity to receive instruction in working drawings, detailing, life safety codes, and learn about textiles and the history of design. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Design Theory: Graduates will apply theories and knowledge of design to develop creative solutions to interior design problems. 2. Communication: Graduates will demonstrate effective oral, written and visual communication skills needed for success in the interior design field. 3. Codes & Standards: Graduates will solve interior design problems in accordance with applicable codes and industry standards. 4. Material Use: Graduates will produce effective designs using appropriate materials and products. 5. Professionalism: Graduates will adhere to ethical and legal standards of the interior design profession as demonstrated in a portfolio of their work. 46 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/221 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Associate of Applied Science Degree in Interior Design.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN INTERIOR DESIGN COURSE LISTING CREDITS FND105 Design Fundamentals 4 FND110 Observational Drawing 4 FND 120 Perspective Drawing 4 FND150 Digital Color Theory 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 INTB101 Architectural Drafting ** 4 INTB102 Introduction to Interior Design 4 INTB103 Computer Aided Drafting ** 4 INTB105 Sketching & Ideation 4 INTB111 Space Planning 4 INTB112 Design Basics 3D 4 INTB201 Textiles, Materials & Specifications 4 INTB211 Codes & Regulations 4 INTB212 Residential Design 4 INTB232 Lighting Design 4 INTB342 Commercial Design 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 47

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA This program is no longer enrolling new students. Interior Design ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE (8 quarters, 92 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM Our associate s level Interior Design degree program is carefully balanced and designed to provide a threedimensional understanding of space, form, and function in residential design. In early courses, students have the opportunity to learn the basics of drawing, drafting, color, and design, and the fundamentals of space planning and perspective. In later quarters, students have the opportunity to receive instruction in working drawings, detailing, life safety codes, and learn about textiles and the history of design. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Design Theory: Graduates will apply theories and knowledge of design to develop creative solutions to interior design problems. 2. Communication: Graduates will demonstrate effective oral, written and visual communication skills needed for success in the interior design field. 3. Codes & Standards: Graduates will solve interior design problems in accordance with applicable codes and industry standards. 4. Material Use: Graduates will produce effective designs using appropriate materials and products. 5. Professionalism: Graduates will adhere to ethical and legal standards of the interior design profession as demonstrated in a portfolio of their work. 48 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/221 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Associate of Applied Science Degree in Interior Design.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN INTERIOR DESIGN COURSE LISTING CREDITS GD1401 Fundamentals of Design 4 GD1402 Drawing & Perspective 4 GD1473 Digital Color Theory 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 ID1420 Architectural Drafting** 4 ID1421 Perspectives 4 ID1426 Mixed Media 4 ID2420 History of Design to 1830 4 ID2422 Introduction to Space Planning 4 ID2424 Elements of Interior Design 4 ID2430 Computer Aided Drafting** 4 ID2431 Revit 4 ID2440 Design Process 4 ID2441 Design Development: Residential 4 ID2443 Problems in Residential Design 4 ID3420 History of Design from 1830 to Present 4 ID4480 Senior Design Project 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 49

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Program will start January, 2015. Contact the campus for enrollment information. Please note this program does not prescribe to the standard course numbering rationale. Interior Design BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM Interior designers must have a thorough understanding of efficient space planning, human factors, color, pattern, lighting, furniture, and materials. These elements are essential to the creation of residential and commercial spaces. Whether working for architectural or interior design firms, hotel or restaurant chains, department or furniture stores, or independently as consultants or firm owners, accomplished designers are adept at working with clients and understanding their needs. Students begin with a foundation in basic rendering and perspective, have the opportunity to build the aesthetic and technical problem-solving skills and discover the difference between designing for architectural firms, retail stores, hotels and restaurants. Students have the opportunity to learn how to keep accurate records and discover how to buy wholesale, enter a world where color, texture, fabric, and light are instruments that paint an environment, and are introduced to computer-aided drafting (CAD) and sample the real world of interior design in the studio, the showroom, and the business planning office. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Design Theory: Graduates will solve complex interior design problems using the design process and their knowledge of principles, theories and applications to analyze the client profile and project program, both individually and collaboratively. 2. Communication: Graduates will provide interior design services using effective oral, written, and visual communication employing a variety of means, methods and technologies, in both 2- and 3-dimensions. 3. Building Systems: Graduates will produce interior design solutions that constructively integrate with available building, environmental, and property management systems, as well as prevailing codes and standards of use, maintenance and sustainability. 4. Interior Finish Materials: Graduates will specify and apply to their solutions, finish materials that meet prevailing standards of use, maintenance, sustainability, regulatory compliance, and aesthetics. 5. Professionalism: Graduates will provide professional services based on their body of knowledge with a standard of care that meets both client needs and protects the health, safety, and welfare of the public in an ethical and legal manner. 50 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/220 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science Degree in Interior Design.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN INTERIOR DESIGN COURSE LISTING CREDITS FND105 Design Fundamentals 4 FND110 Observational Drawing 4 FND120 Perspective Drawing 4 FND150 Digital Color Theory 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3433 Contemporary Art 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 GE4461 Physics 4 INTB101 Architectural Drafting** 4 INTB102 Introduction to Interior Design 4 INTB103 Computer Aided Drafting I** 4 INTB105 Sketching & Ideation 4 INTB107 History of Architecture, Interiors & Furniture I 4 INTB111 Space Planning 4 INTB112 Design Basics 3D 4 INTB201 Textiles, Materials & Specifications 4 INTB202 Presentation Techniques 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS INTB203 Computer Aided Drafting II** 4 INTB207 History of Architecture, Interiors & Furniture II 4 INTB211 Codes & Regulations 4 INTB212 Residential Design I 4 INTB232 Lighting Design 4 INTB262 Construction Documents 4 INTB302 Residential Design II 4 INTB306 Professional Practice 4 INTB313 Digital Modeling 4 INTB322 Interior Detailing & Building Systems 4 INTB332 Environmental & Sustainable Design 4 INTB342 Commercial Design 4 INTB352 Hospitality Design 4 INTB402 Senior Studio I 4 INTB406 Internship 4 INTB409 Portfolio 4 INTB412 Institutional Design 4 INTB422 Senior Studio II 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 51

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA This program is no longer enrolling new students. Interior Design BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM Interior designers must have a thorough understanding of efficient space planning, human factors, color, pattern, lighting, furniture, and materials. These elements are essential to the creation of residential and commercial spaces. Whether working for architectural or interior design firms, hotel or restaurant chains, department or furniture stores, or independently as consultants or firm owners, accomplished designers are adept at working with clients and understanding their needs. Students begin with a foundation in basic rendering and perspective, have the opportunity to build the aesthetic and technical problem-solving skills and discover the difference between designing for architectural firms, retail stores, hotels and restaurants. Students have the opportunity to learn how to keep accurate records and discover how to buy wholesale, enter a world where color, texture, fabric, and light are instruments that paint an environment, and are introduced to computer-aided drafting (CAD) and sample the real world of interior design in the studio, the showroom, and the business planning office. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Design Theory: Graduates will solve complex interior design problems using the design process and their knowledge of principles, theories and applications to analyze the client profile and project program, both individually and collaboratively. 2. Communication: Graduates will provide interior design services using effective oral, written, and visual communication employing a variety of means, methods and technologies, in both 2- and 3-dimensions. 3. Building Systems: Graduates will produce interior design solutions that constructively integrate with available building, environmental, and property management systems, as well as prevailing codes and standards of use, maintenance and sustainability. 4. Interior Finish Materials: Graduates will specify and apply to their solutions, finish materials that meet prevailing standards of use, maintenance, sustainability, regulatory compliance, and aesthetics. 5. Professionalism: Graduates will provide professional services based on their body of knowledge with a standard of care that meets both client needs and protects the health, safety, and welfare of the public in an ethical and legal manner. 52 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/220 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science Degree in Interior Design.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN INTERIOR DESIGN COURSE LISTING CREDITS GD1401 Fundamentals of Design 4 GD1402 Drawing and Perspective 4 GD1473 Digital Color Theory 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3433 Contemporary Art 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 GE4461 Physics 4 ID1420 Architectural Drafting** 4 ID1421 Perspectives 4 ID1426 Mixed Media 4 ID1433 Textiles and Fabrics 4 ID1440 3D Design 4 ID2420 History of Design to 1830 4 ID2422 Introduction to Space Planning 4 ID2424 Elements of Interior Design 4 ID2425 Building Materials and Mechanical Systems 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS ID2430 Computer Aided Drafting** 4 ID2431 Revit 4 ID2440 Design Process 4 ID2441 Design Development: Residential 4 ID2442 Design Development: Commercial 4 ID2443 Problems in Residential Design 4 ID3420 History of Design from 1830 to Present 4 ID3421 History of 19th and 20th Century Architecture 4 ID3425 Lighting 4 ID3427 Interior Tectonics & Codes** 4 ID3429 Interior Detailing 4 ID3440 Specialty Design 4 ID3441 Advanced Residential Design 4 ID3442 Advanced Corporate Design 4 ID4425 Advanced Detailing** 4 ID4440 Advanced Specialty Design 4 ID4479 Professional Practice 4 ID4480 Senior Design Project 4 PA4486 Internship 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 53

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Interior Planning with AutoCAD ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE (8 quarters, 96 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM Everything that is manufactured, constructed, or remodeled involves charts, plans or drawings. The drafter puts the designs on paper that are essential to managers, financiers, engineers, and manufacturers. The overall program objective is to develop as an entry-level drafter. The program focuses on building construction. In addition to the opportunity to learn the basic skills such as lettering, line work, and drafting principles, the student can learn to use codes specification and reference materials. Instruction is also devoted to learning Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) when the power of the computer and advanced software greatly expands the drafter s productivity. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Design Theory: Graduates will apply theories and knowledge of design to develop creative solutions to interior design problems. 2. Communication: Graduates will demonstrate effective oral, written and visual communication skills needed for success in the interior design field. 3. Codes & Standards: Graduates will solve interior design problems in accordance with applicable codes and industry standards. 4. Technical: Graduates will demonstrate competencies in industry-specific computer software programs within the context of the interior design profession. 5. Codes & Standards: Graduates will solve interior design problems in accordance with applicable codes and industry standards. 54 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/222 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Associate of Applied Science Degree in Interior Planning With AutoCAD.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE ASSOCIATE OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN INTERIOR PLANNING WITH AUTOCAD COURSE LISTING CREDITS GD1401 Fundamentals of Design 4 GD1402 Drawing and Perspective 4 GD1473 Digital Color Theory 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 ID1420 Architectural Drafting** 4 ID1421 Perspectives 4 ID1426 Mixed Media 4 ID1440 3D Design 4 ID2422 Introduction to Space Planning 4 ID2425 Building Materials and Mechanical Systems 4 ID2430 Computer Aided Drafting** 4 ID2431 Revit 4 ID2443 Problems in Residential Design 4 ID3425 Lighting 4 ID3427 Interior Tectonics & Codes** 4 ID3429 Interior Detailing 4 ID4480 Senior Design Project 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 55

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Media Arts & Animation BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM The Media Arts & Animation program is designed to prepare students to seek entry-level opportunities in multimedia design and animation by providing a broad range of design and technology skills to generate visual solutions across media platforms. Through the integration of traditional media and emerging digital technology, new generations of designers have transpired who express their visual creativity through technology. Media Arts & Animation is the art of communicating concise ideas with images across various modes of media. Animation brings concepts to life and imagination into existence, and is used to effectively communicate messages through various forms of media. The multimedia animation artist is a highly skilled and specialized visual communicator. Media Arts & Animation requires a combination of both technical and conceptual skills including: Developing and presenting advanced concept ideas through design and illustration Demonstrating advanced ability in technical skills including drawing, typography, lighting, and modeling Advanced knowledge of industry-related computer applications and channels of media used for animation Employing production elements into the project management process Recognizing and applying various animation processes used in the industry The Media Arts & Animation program is designed to build proficiency in drawing and media-based skills, creativity in concepts and problem solving, awareness of art and design history, and fluency in technological tools and software. In an increasingly global visual marketplace, a degree in Media Arts & Animation is designed to prepare students to position themselves in a communication industry where technical and conceptual knowledge can pave the way to opportunity. Students are introduced to the fundamentals of animation, illustration, and design. Computer applications are used to incorporate creative and technical knowledge as conceptual ideas are brought to life. Students then have the opportunity to learn advanced techniques in animation and focus on conceptual storytelling and messaging. Technical classes in modeling, 2-D/3-D animation and Web design are woven into the curriculum. Students can work on production aspects of animation and media art, and are required to prepare a portfolio from conceptualization to final production. Industry-related business practices are examined and students are encouraged to seek out externship opportunities. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Graduates will demonstrate application of learned concepts from foundation level art courses. These would include: drawing, color, form, design, composition and foundation level digital art skills. 2. Graduates will demonstrate an applied technical knowledge of animation tools and software according to current industry standards. 3. Graduates will demonstrate a practical understanding and application in the principles of animation, acting and movement and cinematic storytelling as it relates to 2D and 3D animation (as applicable). 4. Graduates will demonstrate professionalism, through the creation and presentation of a demo-reel and self-promotion package, according to current industry standards. 5. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to conceptualize, plan, execute, and deliver quality animation projects. 6. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to work on team-based projects. 56 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/223 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science Degree in Media Arts & Animation.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN MEDIA ARTS & ANIMATION COURSE LISTING CREDITS CA1400 Production Fundamentals** 4 CA1405 Advanced Drawing and Animation 4 CA1409 History and Trends in Animation 4 CA1410 Storyboarding and Animatics 4 CA1415 Writing for Animation 4 CA1420 Digital Imaging** 4 CA2412 Advanced Drawing for Animation 4 CA2413 Acting for Animators 4 CA2425 Introduction to 2D Animation** 4 CA2429 Introduction to 3D Modeling** 4 CA2430 Introduction to Video 4 CA2432 Character/Object Design 4 CA2439 Introduction to 3D Animation** 4 CA2440 Digital Video Editing 4 CA3425 Materials and Lighting 4 CA3449 Intermediate 3D Modeling** 4 CA3459 Intermediate 3D Animation** 4 CA3460 Computer Animation Studio 4 CA3469 Advanced 3D Modeling 4 CA3470 Special Topics for Computer Animation 4 CA4461 Traditional Animation Studio 4 CA4480 Team Animation 4 GD1401 Fundamentals of Design 4 GD1402 Drawing and Perspective 4 GD1403 Typography for Digital Media 4 GD1411 Intermediate Drawing 4 GD1473 Digital Color Theory 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3433 Contemporary Art 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 GE4461 Physics 4 IM1480 Fundamentals of Interactive Design 4 PA4483 Digital Portfolio** 4 PA4484 Portfolio Presentation** 4 PA4486 Internship 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 57

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Program will start January, 2015. Contact the campus for enrollment information. Please note this program does not prescribe to the standard course numbering rationale. Photography BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM The Bachelor of Fine Arts Degree program at The Art Institutes International Minnesota will provide students the opportunity to obtain key technical skills with basic classes in photography (both traditional darkroom and digital), design, and layout. As students gain proficiency, they will increase their skill level with coursework in studio and product photography, in-depth topical explorations of subject, and professional level digital photographic printing. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Professional Presentation: Graduates will produce a portfolio of original work for current media and multiple platforms, integrating industry standards, personal interest, and career specialization. 2. Critical Thinking: Graduates will assess the historical and social impact of photography and evaluate how their photographs fit within this context. 3. Visual Communication: Graduates will develop a style and vision conveying a personal point of view using problem solving processes that integrate extraordinary print quality and skillful judgment of aesthetic value. 4. Business: Graduates will conceptualize, plan, and implement marketing strategies to create a successful business model. 5. Lighting: Graduates will exhibit technical excellence in lighting and demonstrate inclusion or exclusion of ambient light sources, placement of main light source, degree of diffusion, control of overall lighting contrast, and separation of subject and background. 6. Post-Production: Graduates will exhibit technical excellence in post-production and demonstrate retouching based on professional parameters, Integrate multiple images together to illustrate a concept, and use selection techniques, alpha channels, layer masks, blending modes, and layer techniques demonstrating a mastery of image manipulation techniques. 7. Workflow: Graduates will exhibit technical excellence in digital asset management and demonstrate how to process and manage images and time-based media, employ tools, menus, and keywords, manage and archive digital image files on external sources. 58 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/224 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Fine Arts Degree in Photography.

ASSOCIATE OF BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS IN PHOTOGRAPHY COURSE LISTING CREDITS AD2400 Computer Illustration** 4 AD3450 Art Direction 4 CA2430 Introduction to Video 4 DM2490 Project Management 4 GD1401 Fundamentals of Design 4 GD1402 Drawing and Perspective 4 GD1403 Typography for Digital Media 4 GD1411 Intermediate Drawing 4 GD1431 Design Layout 4 GD1473 Digital Color Theory 4 GD3470 Law & the Commercial Arts 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3433 Contemporary Art 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 GE4461 Physics 4 IM1480 Fundamentals of Interactive Design 4 PA4485 Portfolio Preparation 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS PA4486 Internship 4 PA4487 Portfolio 4 PH1401 Principles of Photography** 4 PH1410 History and Survey of Photography 4 PH1413 Fundamentals of Lighting** 4 PH1450 Photographic Design 4 PH1470 Large Format Photography 4 PH2413 Advanced Lighting 4 PH2451 Digital Photographic Production** 4 PH2454 Photographic Language and Culture 4 PH2460 Digital Darkroom 4 PH2470 Editorial Photography 4 PH2478 Location Photography 4 PH3400 The Business of Photography 4 PH3410 Photographic Essays and Visual Narratives 4 PH3413 Photographic Studio 4 PH4410 Specialization** 4 Choose from PH2476 Multimedia for Photographers or CA2440 Digital Video Editing 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 59

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Visual Effects & Motion Graphics BACHELOR OF Science (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM Visual Effects & Motion Graphics is conceptual design in motion and involves creating special effects with computerbased animation and graphics. To create layered and textural landscapes, an artist will creatively weave video clips, graphic elements, and sound with live-action footage for the most impact. This is accomplished through the agility of digital compositing and, more importantly, the artist s vision. Visual Effects & Motion Graphics require a combination of both technical and conceptual skills including: Identifying, analyzing, and creatively solving design-based problems Demonstrating advanced ability in storyboarding, lighting, shooting, and broadcasting video Advanced knowledge of industry-related software used for visual effects and motion graphics especially related to sound and audio Demonstrating technical knowledge and application of animation, compositing, editing, and postproduction techniques Advanced knowledge and use of studio equipment such as lighting grids and dimmers Identifying major contributions to the evolution of visual and special effects The Visual Effects & Motion Graphics program is designed to prepare students to effectively communicate and entertain through captivating content that engages both the mind and the emotions. are offered the tools necessary to create commercially valuable visuals that help tell a story, entertain, or make a statement. Students are introduced to the fundamentals and basics of visual effects and motion graphics including basic design, layout, and typography. Skill sets in imaging and layout are combined with computer applications to begin the formation of video pieces. Students have the opportunity to build upon the basics and move into advanced work in computer techniques, including modeling, animation, lighting, and audio. By integrating technical and conceptual skills, students have the opportunity to learn to create story messages and points. Students are required to complete advanced work in technical skills and are introduced to studio production. The production stages are integrated into final portfolio pieces. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Professionalism: Graduates will demonstrate professional communication, awareness of industry trends, and the ability to work in a team. 2. Technical: Graduates will demonstrate technical application of 3D, live-action elements, and compositing to enhance visual communication. 3. Principles: Graduates will demonstrate fundamental filmmaking principles in cinematography, narrative, animation and editing. 4. Application: Graduates will demonstrate all aspects of the production pipeline from conceptualization to revision and completion. When real world images or concepts are impossible to capture, visual effects and motion graphics are employed to achieve a vision. By fusing the latest computer application with creative talent, students have the opportunity to learn that the craft of visual effects and motion graphics involves a combination of technological innovation and craft. Through digital compositing, animation, and cinematography, students 60 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/225 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science Degree in Visual Effects & Motion Graphics.

BACHELOR OF Science IN VISUAL EFFECTS & MOTION GRAPHICS COURSE LISTING CREDITS CA1400 Production Fundamentals** 4 CA2429 Introduction to 3D Modeling** 4 CA2430 Introduction to Video** 4 CA2440 Digital Video Editing 4 CA3425 Materials and Lighting 4 CA3449 Intermediate 3D Modeling** 4 DF1410 Principles of Preproduction 4 GD1401 Fundamentals of Design 4 GD1402 Drawing and Perspective 4 GD1403 Typography for Digital Media 4 GD1473 Digital Color Theory 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3433 Contemporary Art 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 GE4461 Physics 4 PA4483 Digital Portfolio** 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS PA4486 Internship 4 VE1409 History and Trends in Visual Effects 4 VE1438 Computer Graphics** 4 VE1457 Conceptual Storytelling 4 VE2450 Maps, Mattes, and Masks 4 VE2453 Introduction to VFX** 4 VE2467 Production Design 4 VE2481 Interactive Visual Design 4 VE2486 Broadcast Graphics 4 VE3453 Intermediate VFX** 4 VE3457 Post Production Management 4 VE3465 Digital Cinematography for VFX 4 VE3477 3D Effects 4 VE3486 Intermediate Broadcast Graphics** 4 VE4463 Advanced VFX I 4 VE4467 Production Studio I 4 VE4473 Advanced VFX II 4 VE4486 Advanced Broadcast Graphics 4 Choose from CA2431 Audio Production** or PH1402 Principles of Digital Photography 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 61

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Web Design & Development DIPLOMA (4 quarters, 48 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM The Web Design & Development diploma program teaches students how to create the look, feel and functionality of World Wide Web pages for client Web sites. This involves developing a design that effectively communicates the ideas being promoted by the Web sites, and focusing on the ways in which the Web sites function for optimum information delivery. The program will also focus on the design and development of mobile device applications. Students will have the opportunity to develop abilities in aspects of Web design, computer languages, and multimedia skills, along with developing a professional portfolio as a formal transition into the workplace. Students will also have the opportunity to learn to adapt the most up-to-date programs, techniques and standards in a field that is quickly and continuously changing. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Graduates will demonstrate professional visual communication skills through the use of graphic illustrations, photography and typography. 2. Graduates will integrate composition and design in support of concept. 3. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to program and code to functional requirements of media project(s). 4. Graduates will apply critical thinking and needs analysis to concept design and in developing media marketing. 5. Graduates will apply presentation and communication skills to produce design and business solutions appropriate to a particular client or target audience. 62 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/3130 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Diploma Degree in Web Design & Development.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE diploma in web design & development COURSE LISTING CREDITS CA2430 Introduction to Video 4 GD1401 Fundamentals of Design 4 GD1403 Typography for Digital Media 4 GD1420 Image Manipulation 4 IM1480 Fundamentals of Interactive Design** 4 IM2420 Fundamentals of Scripting Languages** 4 IM2440 User Centered Interface Design 4 IM2460 Introduction to Authoring 4 IM2470 Interactive Motion Graphics 4 IM2490 Interactive Motion Scripting 4 IM3420 Advanced Scripting Languages** 4 PA4485 Portfolio Preparation 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 63

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Web Design & Interactive Communications DIPLOMA (4 quarters, 52 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM The Web Design & Interactive Communications diploma program teaches students how to create the look, feel and functionality of World Wide Web pages for client Web sites with a specific emphasis on professional standards and practical deployment. This course of study extends foundation principles in visual communications and interactive media as related to dynamic delivery through multiple channels including mobile technologies. Students will develop abilities in computer languages, usability principles and information architecture in a team-oriented environment that prepares them for the professional world. Students will also be instructed in current web technologies and in project management on assignments that will enhance their personal portfolio. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Graduates will demonstrate the use of appropriate visual elements and visual communication skills for interactive media. 2. Graduates will create applications that solve specified problems through a variety of scripting techniques. 3. Graduates will critique and evaluate appropriate design solutions. 4. Graduates will design and develop media marketing and business plans. 64 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/3131 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Diploma Degree in Web Design & Interactive Communications.

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE DIPLOMA IN WEB DESIGN & INTERACTIVE COMMUNICATIONS COURSE LISTING CREDITS CA2431 Audio Production 4 IM2460 Introduction to Authoring 4 IM2470 Interactive Motion Graphics 4 IM2490 Interactive Motion Scripting 4 IM3411 Writing for Interactive Design 4 IM3420 Advanced Scripting Languages** 4 IM3460 Intermediate Authoring 4 IM4420 Dynamic Web Applications 4 IM4470 E-Learning Design & Applications 4 IM4440 Usability Evaluation 4 IM4490 Special Topics in Web Design & Interactive Media 4 PA4487 Portfolio 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 65

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Web Design & Interactive Media ASSOCIATE OF Applied SCIENCE (8 quarters, 92 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM Web Design & Interactive Media is the integration of digital media, including combinations of electronic text, graphics, moving images, and sound, into a structured digital computerized environment that allows people to interact with the data for appropriate purposes. Web Design & Interactive Media requires a combination of both technical and conceptual skills including: Envisioning, designing, and producing new media solutions in a professional setting Demonstrating advanced ability in technical skills, including Web design, scripting, and image manipulation Advanced knowledge of industry-related software used for design Utilizing various interactive methods to solve client needs Critical thinking regarding current trends and business practices The Associate s Degree Program in Web Design & Interactive Media is designed to instruct students to combine design talent and creativity with interactive technology to communicate and create user-centered solutions. Students are introduced to a wide variety of computer-based tools that aid in script writing, designing graphics, and utilizing elements of animation. The skills taught in Web Design & Interactive Media cross a range of delivery channels or platforms, allowing for efficient and succinct communication and better reach of target markets. With an eye on new design trends and software developments, professionals in the field are able to listen and respond to a client s needs. Students in the associate s degree program are introduced to the fundamentals and basic elements of web design and interactive media. Elements of design, such as color theory and typography, are examined to build upon the foundations. Students can begin to integrate programming logistics and focus on computer applications as they advance in their design skills. In their second year of the program, associate s degree students work on creating a portfolio of work and explore various careers paths and goals. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Professional Presentation: Graduates will demonstrate professional layout, integrating media elements and employing industry standards and professional practices. 2. Design: Graduates will apply the vocabulary and concepts of interactive design, including communication effectiveness, and interrelationships among imagery and text. 3. Technical: Graduates will demonstrate competencies in interactive development using authoring systems and/or web scripting. 66 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/219 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Associate of Applied Science Degree in Web Design & Interactive Media.

ASSOCIATE OF Applied SCIENCE IN MEDIA ARTS & ANIMATION COURSE LISTING CREDITS CA2430 Introduction to Video 4 GD1401 Fundamentals of Design 4 GD1402 Drawing and Perspective 4 GD1403 Typography for Digital Media 4 GD1420 Image Manipulation 4 GD3445 Marketing Design 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 IM1480 Fundamentals of Interactive Design** 4 IM2420 Fundamentals of Scripting Languages** 4 IM2440 User Centered Interface Design 4 IM2460 Introduction to Authoring 4 IM2470 Interactive Motion Graphics 4 IM2490 Interactive Motion Scripting 4 IM3420 Advanced Scripting Languages** 4 PA4485 Portfolio Preparation** 4 VE1438 Computer Graphics 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 67

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Web Design & Interactive Media BACHELOR OF Science (12 quarters, 180 credits) ABOUT THE PROGRAM Web Design & Interactive Media is the integration of digital media, including combinations of electronic text, graphics, moving images, and sound, into a structured digital computerized environment that allows people to interact with the data for appropriate purposes. Web Design & Interactive Media requires a combination of both technical and conceptual skills including: Envisioning, designing, and producing new media solutions in a professional setting Demonstrating advanced ability in technical skills, including Web design, scripting, and image manipulation Advanced knowledge of industry-related software used for design Utilizing various interactive methods to solve client needs Critical thinking regarding current trends and business practices The Bachelor s Degree Program in Web Design & Interactive Media at The Art Institute of Colorado is designed to instruct students to combine design talent and creativity with interactive technology to communicate and create usercentered solutions. Students are introduced to a wide variety of computer-based tools that aid in script writing, designing graphics, and utilizing elements of animation. The skills taught in Web Design & Interactive Media cross a range of delivery channels or platforms, allowing for efficient and succinct communication and better reach of target markets. With an eye on new design trends and software developments, professionals in the field are able to listen and respond to a client s needs. Students are introduced to the fundamentals of design elements and principles, such as color theory and typography, as well as basic elements of Web design and interactive media. Students can begin to integrate programming logistics and focus on computer applications as they advance in their design skills. They also have the opportunity to learn advanced skills in design and computer applications, and work on producing final products and projects in a team oriented environment. To gain industry-related experience, bachelor s degree students have the opportunity to create a portfolio of individual work. PROGRAM STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Professional Presentation: Graduates will demonstrate the mastery of concept and execution of web design and visual problem solving, and integrate industry standards, professional practices and ethics in a cohesive body of work. 2. Design: Graduates will evaluate and incorporate aesthetics and formal concepts of interactive design, including communication legibility and effectiveness, and interrelationships among applications, imagery and text. 3. Technical: Graduates will demonstrate and apply competencies in interactive development through effective and efficient implementation of integrated functionality with authoring systems and/ or web scripting. 4. Problem Solving: Graduates will apply advanced web design skills to document and produce designs and business solutions appropriate to a particular client or target audience while developing a professional portfolio. 5. Concept: Graduates will integrate theory of design concepts with historical and contemporary trends in interactive media. 68 Visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/218 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science Degree in Web Design & Interactive Media.

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN WEB DESIGN & INTERACTIVE MEDIA COURSE LISTING CREDITS CA2430 Introduction to Video 4 CA2431 Audio Production 4 GD1401 Fundamentals of Design 4 GD1402 Drawing and Perspective 4 GD1403 Typography for Digital Media 4 GD1420 Image Manipulation 4 GD1431 Design Layout 4 GD1473 Digital Color Theory 4 GD2432 Digital Illustration 4 GD3445 Marketing Design 4 GD3470 Law & the Commercial Arts 4 GE1410 English I 4 GE1413 Psychology 4 GE1424 Public Speaking 4 GE1433 Art History 4 GE2411 English ll 4 GE2412 College Mathematics 4 GE2423 Environmental Science 4 GE2442 Critical Thinking 4 GE3424 Interpersonal Communication 4 GE3433 Contemporary Art 4 GE3490 Cultural Anthropology 4 GE4442 Ethics 4 GE4455 Literature 4 GE4461 Physics 4 IM1480 Fundamentals of Interactive Design** 4 IM2420 Fundamentals of Scripting Languages** 4 IM2440 User Centered Interface Design 4 IM2460 Introduction to Authoring 4 IM2470 Interactive Motion Graphics 4 COURSE LISTING CREDITS IM2480 Digital Video Production 4 IM2490 Interactive Motion Scripting 4 IM3411 Writing for Interactive Design 4 IM3420 Advanced Scripting Languages** 4 IM3460 Intermediate Authoring 4 IM4420 Dynamic Web Applications** 4 IM4440 Usability Evaluation 4 IM4470 E-Learning Design & Applications 4 IM4480 IM4490 Web Design & Interactive Media Production Team 4 Special Topics in Web Design & Interactive Media 4 PA4485 Portfolio Preparation** 4 PA4487 Portfolio** 4 VE1438 Computer Graphics 4 Choose from GD2425 Advanced Typography, GD2440 Print Production, PH1402 Principles Digital Photography, GD3455 Package Design, GD3465 Publication Design, PA4486 Internship or VE2453 Introduction to VFX 4 **Denotes a course that requires a C or higher to pass. 69

THE ART INSTITUTE OF SEATTLE Course Descriptions Course descriptions describe the learning opportunities that are provided through the classroom and coursework. It is each student s responsibility to participate in the activities that will lead to successfully meeting the learning outcomes. COURSE PREFIX LETTER CODES: AD = Advertising AP = Audio Production AUDB = Audio Production CA = Computer Animation CU = Culinary Arts DF = Digital Film DFVB = Digital Filmmaking & Video Production DM = Design Management FD = Fashion Design FND = Foundation FRM = Fashion & Retail Management GD = Graphic Design GE = General Education HM = Hospitality Management ID = Interior Design IM = Web Design & Interactive Media INTB = Interior Design PA = Professional Applications PH = Photography PHOB = Digital Photography SM = Studio Major TS = Transitional Studies VE = Visual Effects COURSE NUMBERING Courses with 100-or 200-level course numbers are considered lower level and are typically taken in the first two years of academic study. Courses with 300-or 400-level course numbers are considered upper level and typically taken in the third and fourth academic years of study. The Transitional Studies course is coded as TS and is only taken by students in need of a transitional studies course prior to taking a 1000-level English course. AD1400 History of Advertising This course presents a survey of major events and development in the history of motion media and mass communication. The survey focuses on the relationship between technology and media development and explores the impact motion media and mass communication has on society and economy. AD1420 Conceptual Thinking Students will learn basic skills that will support their learning throughout the course and help them create a foundation for nurturing creativity in their work and lives. They will be given the tools to help them identify and solve problems, formulate objectives, and create a plan to reach their objectives. AD2400 Computer Illustrations, **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AD and PH. Prerequisite: GD1401 Fundamentals of Design and GD1402 Drawing and Perspective This course explores the methods and techniques of computergenerated or manipulated images as solutions to illustration projects. Object-oriented graphics and paint system programs are utilized. AD2420 Organizational Behavior, **This course requires a C or higher to pass in DM. This course is an examination of human relations theory and individual, group, and organizational performance in relation to the organizational structures of contemporary businesses and public agencies. AD2430 Fundamentals of Marketing and Advertising ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AD and DM. Prerequisites: none This course addresses the fundamental concepts and principles of marketing as it relates to advertising, its history, potential, and limitations. An overview of marketing will help students place their knowledge in a framework and understand how each component contributes to the strength and utility of a marketing plan. Students will examine various definitions and methods of advertising communication, as well as advertising objectives, advertising copy, and federal regulations. Students will look at how marketing and advertising have changed over the years and been affected by world events and cultural assumptions. The course will also help the student recognize emerging trends and capitalize on them. AD2440 Media and Advertising Design ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AD. Prerequisites: GD1431 Design Layout This course examines the structures and communications skills used by the various members of a creative team and further defines the role of graphic design in an advertising context. The processes of concept development, media application, and design creation are emphasized. In addition, the variety of media used by graphic designers and their suppliers will be examined. Campaign strategies, based on media and marketing realities will also be defined and applied. 70

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA AD2460 Branding Prerequisite: AD2430 Fundamentals of Marketing and Advertising Branding became a buzz word in 1990s advertising, but this process has evolved into a powerful way to organize and utilize an understanding of consumer needs and motivations in a changing marketplace. As the retail environment changes, marketing people can rely less on the traditional tools of print and broadcast media. Marketing strategists need to learn how to create an identity for their products and services and how to use that identity to support sales. This course is an introduction to the essential concepts and skills of brand marketing. AD2490 Dynamics of Integrated Marketing ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AD. Prerequisite: AD2430 Fundamentals of Marketing and Advertising In this course, students create an integrated marketing plan. Beginning with a situation analysis, students learn and apply the process of analyzing an organization s marketing mix, industry and competition. Based on this information, students learn to identify potential business problems, opportunities and write meaningful objectives. A target audience is selected and studied in depth. Strategy is heavily emphasized, including the characteristics of a strong strategy and various types of strategy. Students will study how to translate the strategy to the audience using the five promotional tools that are advertising, sales promotion, direct marketing, personal selling and public relations. Students will apply all these principles during the creation of their IMC plans. AD3400 Persuasion and the Consumer This course covers persuasive communication techniques, particularly in the area of advertising, and examines the cultural, social, and individual variables involved in consumer behavior. Areas covered include the fields of logic and psychology. Among the topics to be covered are the framing effect, emotional hot buttons, mass appeal, snob appeal, subliminal messages, and the bandwagon effect. Maslow s hierarchy of needs, emotional reactions and how to achieve them, and the various types of media that could be used to achieve the appropriate desired response are also covered. AD3420 Copywriting ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AD. Prerequisites: AD3400 Persuasion and the Consumer This course addresses the need to communicate in writing on the job. A variety of materials must be written for a business: memos, letters, news summaries, proposals, presentations, and copy for advertising or marketing. Students will learn to identify the requirements of different types of writing and to prepare material to communicate clearly and effectively. AD3440 Advertising Campaign ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AD. Prerequisites: AD2490 Dynamics of Integrated Marketing and AD3420 Copywriting and AD3450 Art Direction Students create an integrated marketing campaign consisting of three or more different applications of a single, unified theme or concept. Campaign strategy and tactics are based on media and marketing realities. AD3450 Art Direction Prerequisite: GD1431 Design Layout This course is an introduction to the principles of concept and problem solving for print photography and broadcast media as they relate to the function of the art director. Also studied is the interaction of the creative, marketing and production functions in the promotion of ideas. AD4400 Advanced Copywriting Prerequisite: AD3420 Copywriting In this course, students learn to develop effective advertising strategies and copy executions that underlie and enable creative marketing and advertising campaigns, and to cultivate clear, logical and creative copywriting skills. Students will also learn the unique characteristics of digital media and the creation of scripts for digital media production. Students will also learn to conduct research for media writing projects. AD4410 Public Relations & Promotion This course examines the historical development of public relations, showing the principles, methods, and means of influencing public opinion. AD4420 Sales An understanding of the sales process and the steps to sell a product or service is essential to a student who works in any area of business. Selling is an essential skill for the sales function of a business, but is also part of the job for many other employees. This course focuses on the essential skills and knowledge one needs to affect a sale, as well as the ways that the sales pitch can be focused to solve customer problems. AD4440 Advanced Advertising Campaign Prerequisite: AD3440 Advertising Campaign Students research and develop a fully integrated advertising/promotional campaign for a brand with international distribution. Value is placed on the importance of deadline, budget, client relationship, presentation and its relationship to the design process. The student s senior project documents, supports and argues the rationale and effectiveness of the campaign in written form. Students prepare, present and defend a graduate project suitable for a professional audience. AD4450 Media Planning and Buying Prerequisite: AD2430 Fundamentals of Marketing and Advertising Media as part of a delivery channel for a marketing message will be the focus of this course. Topics include media as critical to the fulfillment of the overall marketing strategy, cost effectiveness, and alternative and new media. AD4460 Global Business Perspectives This course offers an analysis of world markets, consumer behaviors, advertising, foreign environments, and the marketing management required to meet the demands of dynamic global markets. The problems of foreign competition, diminishing US market share and the US economy s interdependence of world markets will be the focus of this course. In addition, different foreign market entry strategies will be analyzed. 71

AD4480 Capstone, **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AD. Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director In this course, students will demonstrate knowledge across the curriculum by creating sample projects that cover marketing, media, sales, and creative coursework completed over all previous quarters. The capstone project simulates the advertising agency work environment, requiring teamwork as well as individual contributions. AP1400 Survey of the Music Industry Students explore the music industry and its constituent sectors, including music performing, recording, promoting, and record distribution. Lectures and projects focus on identifying various career opportunities and typical career paths in the music industry and knowledge and skill sets needed to succeed as an entry level professional. AP1410 Audio Technology I ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AP. Prerequisites: none This course examines the principles of audio signals and the equipment used to record, process, and distribute audio content. Students will begin to develop an understanding of signal flow of audio systems using block diagrams. A survey of audio transmission, manipulation, and delivery systems including cables, connectors, basic stereo mixers, microphones, amplifiers, and loudspeakers will be presented. AP1420 Digital Audio I Prerequisite: AP1400 - Survey of the Music Industry This course introduces students to the theories, practices, and tools used in digital audio production and techniques of non-linear digital audio editing, focusing on the fundamental theories and concepts behind various types of digital audio tools. Through lectures and in class projects, students develop knowledge and skills needed to operate non-linear audio workstations. AP1430 Music Theory I This course introduces students to the rudiments of music theory. Students learn to identify notes and common scales as well as the notation of notes, scales and simple rhythms. The concept and structure of the lead sheet will be introduced. An ear-training component will develop the students skill in identifying and transcribing simple chords, melodies, and rhythms. AP1440 Audio Technology II ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AP. Prerequisites: AP1410 Audio Technology I In this course students continue to study the principles of audio signals and the equipment used to record, process, and distribute audio content. Sound in acoustical form is discussed in relation to studio acoustics. Students expand their understanding of signal flow of advanced audio systems by creating and reading complex block diagrams. Some of the topics studied in depth are: signal processors, dynamic range, distortion, analogue recording, and SMPTE time code. AP1450 Music Theory II Prerequisite: AP1430 Music Theory I This course continues with the development of the rudiments of music theory and expands into an introduction to harmony, voice leading, modes and compound time signatures. Students will learn to create simple lead sheets. An ear-training component will extend the work from Music Theory I to include more complex chords and intervals. AP1460 Digital Audio II ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AP. Prerequisite: AP1420 Digital Audio I Students learn the concepts and production techniques used with Pro Tools integrated into a digital audio workstation. Topics include computer based digital audio workstations, sound design, field recording, digital audio transfer protocols, software-based effects plug-ins, and online automation. AP2400 Audio Recording I ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AP. Prerequisite: AP1410 Audio Technology I This course runs in conjunction with Audio Technology II. The theoretical foundations presented in Audio Technology II are reinforced in this course through practical, handson applications. Students learn the operational techniques of basic audio systems with an emphasis on mixdown of prerecorded multi-track tapes and eight-track recording projects. AP2410 Listening and Analysis Prerequisite: AP1450 Music Theory II This course introduces the student to ear-training and critical listening from the perspective of the audio engineer and contemporary production techniques. The student will learn to aurally analyze and identify typical contemporary popular song forms and the production techniques used to create them. AP2420 Acoustics Prerequisite: AP1440 Audio Technology II and GE2412 College Mathematics This course examines the physical behavior of sound indoors and outdoors. Topics include human hearing and the principles of psychoacoustics, sound propagation, transmission, reflection, diffraction, diffusion, noise reduction, basic studio and room acoustics, and sound isolation. Concepts will be presented through lectures and case studies. AP2440 Audio Recording II Prerequisite: AP2400 Audio Recording I Students expand and develop the skills learned in Audio Recording I through multi-track recording projects. The course focuses on recording techniques used in music production. Emphasis is placed on signal flow for basic tracks, mixdown, and overdubs. Other topics include close and distant microphone techniques, recording session management, analog tape recorders, studio documentation, signal processing, and moving fader automation systems. 72

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA AP2450 Electronics Prerequisite: AP2420 Acoustics This course introduces students to the fundamental concepts of electronics as they relate to audio production. Topics include Ohm s Law, AC and DC circuits, basic troubleshooting for audio equipment, AC line voltage and filtered DC voltage, etc. AP2460 MIDI Systems I ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AP. Prerequisite: AP1450 Music Theory II and AP1460 Digital Audio II This course allows students to develop a working theoretical and skills-based knowledge of the multitimbral synthesizer and the sequencing environment within the context of the contemporary MIDI production studio. Both live and studio applications are covered, and full use is made of the digital signal processing resources available within the equipment. AP3400 MIDI Systems II Prerequisite: AP2460 MIDI Systems I In MIDI Systems II students develop a detailed knowledge of the MIDI language and learn to apply more flexible and in-depth uses of sequencers involving graphical and list based editing, static and dynamic parameter and tempo automation, and the basic recording of MIDI messages. Students gain greater proficiency in MIDI production processes through small group and individual production projects. AP3410 Advanced Recording Techniques I ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass. Prerequisite: AP2440 Audio Recording II This course covers the techniques and technology typical to professional music recording and mixing using advanced large format consoles. Topics include: studio procedures and professionalism, SSL Console operation, advanced signal flow, signal processing, analytical BS Audio Production and critical listening skills, close, distant and stereo mic techniques for a variety of musical instruments, and basic mixdown strategies. AP3420 Live Sound Reinforcement I Prerequisite: AP2440 Audio Recording II and AP2450 - Electronics In this course students learn to set up and operate various audio equipment for a typical live sound reinforcement. Topics include reading block diagrams of audio systems, wiring speakers, connecting powers, testing and adjusting microphones, troubleshooting sound systems, and fine-tune reinforcement effects. AP3430 Live Sound Reinforcement II Prerequisite: AP3420 Live Sound Reinforcement I This course presents students with more sophisticated and complex situations for live sound reinforcement. Through studio settings or real world events, students learn to operate large format analogue and digital mixing consoles and solve signal manipulation problems with transformers. Students also learn professional protocols in live sound reinforcement settings. AP3440 Synthesis & Sound Design I, **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AP. Prerequisite: AP3400 MIDI Systems II This course develops advanced skills using synthesizers and samplers. Students study the elements of sound and how they apply to simple and complex waveforms, envelopes, LFOs, filters and keyboard architecture. Theory and practice with sampling and subtractive synthesis using software and hardware sound sources. AP3450 Advanced Recording Techniques II Prerequisite: AP3410 Advanced Recording Technique I This course provides the student a greater understanding of SSL consoles and VCA automation systems. Students use SMPTE Time Code for synchronization to a variety of multitrack formats, use digital audio sampling for sound replacement, and integrate Pro Tools and MIDI sequencers into the analog studio mixing environment. Critical listening skills and critical analysis of master tapes are emphasized. Students participate in in-class recording sessions and engineer recording projects during and out of class hours, which may be included in their portfolio. AP3460 Synthesis & Sound Design II Prerequisite: AP3440 Synthesis & Sound Design This course will survey both commercially available synthesis methods and recent developments at audio research institutes. Students will also survey the current market for hardware and software implementation of various synthesis methods. Analytical listening sessions will expose students to synthesis methods in various musical contexts. Detailed study of subtractive, FM, physical modeling and granular synthesis will culminate in original sound design projects. AP4400 Senior Project I ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AP. Prerequisite: AP3450 Advanced Recording Techniques II This course initiates a two quarter long comprehensive project which will be integral to students final portfolios. Students will employ their cumulative skills to pre-produce a significant, sophisticated, multi-track digital audio work. Committee and/ or faculty will approve the project content and type of the audio work. Projects will be carried out individually or in groups based on the needs of the class as determined by the instructor. AP4410 Entertainment Marketing & Management Students explore the various aspects and business practices of the entertainment marketing and management field. Students will create a business and promotional plan and are introduced to concepts such as licensing, copyright exploitation, publishing and other promotional vehicles. The course also increases the students understanding of strategic analysis of the entertainment industry. AP4420 Senior Project II Prerequisite: AP4400 - Senior Project I This course continues the two-quarter long comprehensive project begun in Senior Project I. Students will employ cumulative skills to produce a significant, sophisticated, multi-track digital audio work. Projects will be carried out individually or in groups based on the needs of the class as determined by the instructor. 73

AP4430 Portfolio Preparation Prerequisite: AP4400 Senior Project I In this first portfolio course, students will assess personal strengths to establish a career goal and decide how to organize their audio production work in a graduation portfolio. Guided by a faculty member or a team of faculty, each student assembles a preliminary portfolio and identifies areas for more work and/or content enhancement. AP4440 Portfolio ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AP. Prerequisite: AP4430 Portfolio Preparation and Academic Director Approval Built on the preliminary collection of work from Portfolio Preparation, this course allows each student to determine and design the final organization and presentation of the graduation portfolio. Each student is expected to verbally present the portfolio and address audience questions as a format of defense. AUDB101 Fundamentals of Audio Addresses the principles of recording sound and covers sound characteristics, basic acoustics, and techniques for field recording. The role of sound in media production is explained. CA1400 Production Fundamentals ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in MAA. This course is designed to introduce students to the world of computers through lecture and laboratory sessions. Lectures will introduce the conceptual framework of computer systems and how they work, as well as the implications of computer technology in our contemporary environment. The laboratory sessions will provide hands-on training on a specific computer system and will teach functions within a computer environment to complete projects. CA1405 Advanced Drawing for Animation Prerequisite: GD1411 Intermediate Drawing Students will develop their drawing skills and study space, movement, texture and composition. Students will demonstrate creative ideas and advanced skills required to produce their animation projects. CA1409 History and Trends of Animation This course surveys the history of animation with emphasis on the various animation processes in their historical contexts. This survey course also involves discussions of new developments and future trends in the animation industry and analysis of major sectors of the animation industry and career opportunities within them. CA1410 Storyboarding and Animatics Prerequisite: GD1402 Drawing and Perspective This course focuses on the animation preproduction techniques of storyboarding, storytelling, and animatics. The course will cover the purpose, formats, basic terminology, and concepts used in storyboarding and animatics and the application thereof. Use of capture devices, storytelling, composition, and design will be applied. CA1415 Writing for Animation Writing for Animation will explore the various processes used to create treatments, stories, and scripts. Students will see what a treatment is and how it is used. They will explore how an idea is developed into a story and then into a script. Students will see how a story is structured; they will explore how to read a script and how to develop their own scripts. Students will have a chance to see how important content is to the development of a finished product. CA1420 Digital Imaging ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in MAA. Prerequisite: CA1400 Production Fundamentals Students develop basic image manipulation skills in a raster-based computer environment. Emphasis is on mastering the fundamentals of scanning, color management, photo retouching, imaging, special effects, and filters and masks. CA2412 Advanced Drawing for Animation Prerequisite: GD1411 Intermediate Drawing Students will develop their drawing skills and study space, movement, texture and composition. Students will demonstrate creative ideas and advanced skills required to produce their animation projects. CA2413 Acting for Animators Prerequisite: CA2439 Introduction to 3D Animation In this course, students will explore the techniques involved in putting together expressions and movements that convey emotions, impart meaning and tell a story. Students will see how to tell a story with motion and embellish it with expressions. Students will study silent films, physicality and versatility, and alternate ways to tell a story and convey a message. CA2425 Introduction to 2D Animation ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in MAA. Prerequisite: GD1411 Intermediate Drawing This course introduces the principles and fundamentals of animation. Students will study the 12 principles of animation and apply through a variety of fundamental exercises. Use of capture devices, pencil tests and other animation techniques will be explored. 74

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA CA2429 Introduction to 3D Modeling ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in MAA. This is an introductory course in geometric construction. Through critical analysis, students conceptualize 3D coordinate systems and construct 3D models in a computer environment. Students also identify the differences and similarities of 3D modeling with sculpting, 3D design and character design techniques. CA2430 Introduction to Video, **This course requires a C or higher to pass for VE and DF. This course will provide an overview of the video industry and establish a foundation in broadcast technology. Basic video equipment and studio operation will be introduced, along with terminology and its application. CA2431 Audio Production ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in VE and WDIM. This course is a conceptual introduction to audio production techniques. Students will be able to digitize sound and apply it to their work. Students will also learn how to produce appropriate audio effects and transitions. CA2432 Character/Object Design ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in MAA. Prerequisite: GD1411 Intermediate Drawing In this course, students will design characters and related objects for animation. Students will learn the process of character development as well as enhanced life drawing skills. Course assignments include gesture drawing, action poses, turnarounds, and creation of sculpted objects. CA2439 Introduction to 3D Animation ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in MAA. Prerequisite: CA2429 Introduction to 3D Modeling Building on the skills acquired in 3D Modeling, students learn to animate and apply the principles of animation in a computer environment. Students are also introduced to concept of rigging and setting up their model for animation. CA2440 Digital Video Editing Prerequisite: CA2430 Introduction to Video In this course students explore the features and functions of video editing systems and learn to edit video using linear and non- linear video editing systems. Students will also explore various media available for output of animation and use appropriate equipment to output animation to tape. CA3425 Materials and Lighting Prerequisite: CA3449 Intermediate 3D Modeling In this course, students will address lighting 3D objects, lighting movement, and establishing congruence between background, object, reflectivity, and illusion of depth. The course will focus on the correlation between reality and computer rendition, stressing the disparity between real light and the technical facsimile of artificial lighting. The analysis, creation, and application of custom materials and texture maps will also be explored. CA3449 Intermediate 3D Modeling ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in MAA. Prerequisite: CA2429 Introduction to 3D Modeling Using a 3D environment, intermediate modeling techniques and concepts are elaborated. Modeling as character design and development is emphasized while refining techniques in lighting, camera, and textures. CA3459 Intermediate 3D Animation ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass MAA. Prerequisites: CA2439 - Introduction to 3D Animation and CA3449 Intermediate 3D Modeling Using a 3D environment, intermediate animation techniques, rigging and setup techniques are elaborated. Animation storyboard and storytelling concepts are explored while refining techniques in lighting, camera, and timing. Students are also introduced to basic principal of scripting and expressions. CA3460 Computer Animation Studio Prerequisite: CA3459 Intermediate 3D Animation Utilizing advanced computer programs, students will be able to design, produce and edit imaginative animation sequences. Special topics in modeling and animation will be covered such as advanced concepts, lighting, compositing, special effects, camera moves, audio and inverse kinematics. CA3469 Advanced 3D Modeling Prerequisite: CA3449 Intermediate 3D Modeling Using a 3D environment advanced modeling techniques and concepts are applied. Modeling as character design and development is emphasized while students analyze real world observations and their application to modeling. CA3470 Special Topics for Computer Animation Prerequisite: CA2439 Introduction to 3D Animation This course allows the student to select special topics in animation and produce such animations under the guidance of an instructor. The student will be exposed to the various applications of animation and apply animation skills to chosen topics. CA4461 Traditional Animation Studio ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass MAA. Students work with team members to create a full-length traditional 2D, or experimental animation. In this advanced course, all nuances of project creation, production, and post production are taught. CA4480 Team Animation Prerequisite: CA2439 Introdcution to 3D Animation Students will utilize their knowledge of storytelling, animation, modeling, processing, and compositing software to create a team project. Students will strengthen their interpersonal and communication skills by working toward a common goal in an environment that is similar to the animation industry. 75

CU1210 Concepts and Theories of Culinary Techniques 2 credits The fundamental concepts, skills, and techniques involved in basic cookery are covered in this course. Special emphasis is given to the study of ingredients and cooking theories. Lectures teach organization skills in the kitchen and work coordination. The basics of stocks, soups, sauces, vegetable cookery, starch cookery, meat, and poultry are covered. Emphasis is given to basic cooking techniques such as sautéing, roasting, poaching, braising and frying. CU1443 Artisan Breads and Baking Production Prerequisite: CU1642 Introduction to Baking and Pastry Techniques This course provides the information, tools and instruction to gain proficiency in the preparation of a variety of artisan breads. Emphasis will be placed upon learning to mix, ferment, shape, bake and store hand crafted breads. Students will focus on traditional fermentation, as well as the science of the ingredients. Students learn assembly speed and increase their proficiency in meeting production deadlines with quality products. CU1444 European Cakes and Tortes Prerequisite: CU1642 Introduction to Baking and Pastry Techniques Students will build on competencies previously learned and apply those skills into new products to create more elaborate tortes and cakes using complex finishing methods by applying glazes, using decorative sponges, and building multi-component cakes. Topics to be covered include comparison of classical and modern preparations, classical cakes; glazed, iced, molded, and cream filled cakes, and bombes. CU1445 Chocolate, Confections and Centerpieces Prerequisite: CU1642 Introduction to Baking and Pastry Techniques Students are introduced to the fundamental concepts, skills and techniques of chocolates and confections. Students are introduced to the basic techniques used in forming simple centerpieces. Lectures and demonstrations teach chocolate tempering, candy production and the rules that apply when creating centerpieces CU1446 Advanced Patisserie and Display Cakes Prerequisite: CU1642 Introduction to Baking and Pastry Techniques This course explores the techniques of plated desserts and the theory behind building edible art for A la Carte service, competition or banquet functions. Methods and procedures for producing high quality specialty decorated cakes, as well as the design, assembly, and decorating of wedding cakes will be introduced. CU1610 Fundamentals of Classical Techniques 6 credits The fundamental concepts, skills, and techniques involved in basic cookery are covered in this course. Special emphasis is given to the study of ingredients, cooking theories, and the preparation of stocks, broths, glazes, and soups, thickening agents, the grand sauces, and emulsion sauces. Lectures and demonstrations teach organization skills in the kitchen, work coordination, and knife skills. The basics of vegetable cookery, starch cookery, meat, and poultry are covered. Emphasis is given to basic cooking techniques such as sautéing, roasting, poaching, braising and frying. Students must successfully pass a practical cooking examination covering a variety of cooking techniques. CU1620 American Regional Cuisine 6 credits Prerequisite: CU1210 Concepts and Theories of Culinary Techniques and CU1610 Fundamentals of Classical Techniques The course reinforces the knowledge and skill learned in the preceding classes and helps students build confidence in the techniques of basic cookery. The development of knife skills is accented. American Regional Cuisine explores the use of indigenous ingredients in the preparation of traditional and contemporary American specialties. The concepts of mise en place, time-lines, plate presentation, and teamwork in a production setting are introduced and accentuated. Timing and organization skills are emphasized. CU1642 Introduction to Baking and Pastry Techniques 6 credits This course is a combination of theory, lecture, demonstration, and hands-on production to provide an introduction to baking and pastry techniques for use in a commercial kitchen. Special focus is placed on the study of ingredient functions, product identification, and weights and measures as applied to baking and pastry techniques. Instruction is provided on the preparation of yeast-raised dough mixing methods, roll-in doughs, pie doughs, basic cake mixing methods, fillings, icings, pastry cream, and finishing techniques. Students must pass a practical exam. CU2240 Asian Cuisine 2 credits Prerequisite: CU1620 American Regional Cuisine This course emphasizes both the influences and ingredients that create the unique character of selected Asian cuisines. Students prepare, taste, serve, and evaluate traditional, regional dishes of the cuisines of India, the four regions of China, Japan, Vietnam, Thailand, and Indonesia. Importance will be placed on ingredients, flavor profiles, preparations, and techniques representative of these cuisines. 76

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA CU2252 Latin Cuisine 2 credits Prerequisite: CU1620 American Regional Cuisine This course emphasizes both the influences and ingredients that create the unique character of selected Latin cuisines. Students prepare, taste, serve, and evaluate traditional, regional dishes of Mexico, South America and the Caribbean Islands. Importance will be placed on ingredients, flavor profiles, preparations, and techniques representative of these cuisines. CU2272 World Cuisine 2 credits Prerequisite: CU1620 American Regional Cuisine This course emphasizes both the influences and ingredients that create the unique character of selected World cuisines. Students prepare, taste, serve, and evaluate traditional, regional dishes of Spain, Middle East, Turkey, Greece, Africa and India. Importance will be placed on ingredients, flavor profiles, preparations, and techniques representative of these cuisines. CU2273 Classical European Cuisine 2 credits Prerequisite: CU1620 American Regional Cuisine This course emphasizes both the influences and ingredients that create the unique character of selected Classical European Cuisines. Students prepare, taste, serve, and evaluate traditional, regional dishes of British Isles, Italy, France, and Germany, Austria, Switzerland, and Scandinavian countries. Importance will be placed on ingredients, flavor profiles, preparations, and techniques representative of these cuisines. CU2408 Management, Supervision & Career Development This is a multifaceted course that focuses on managing people from the hospitality supervisor s viewpoint, and developing job search skills. The management emphasis is on techniques for increasing productivity, controlling labor costs, time management, and managing change. It also stresses effective communication and explains the responsibilities of a supervisor in the food service industry. Students develop techniques and strategies for marketing themselves in their chosen fields. Emphasis will be placed on students assessing their marketable skills, developing a network of contacts, generating interviews, writing a cover letter and resume, preparing for their employment interview, presenting a professional appearance, and interview follow-up. CU2409 Management by Menu This course prepares future food service managers by giving a clear picture of the important role menu planning plays within operations. It covers topics ranging from menu development, pricing, and evaluation to facilities design and layout. Students will benefit because good menu development is crucial to the success of any foodservice operation. For example: a planning tool, source of operational information and as a merchandising method for reaching patrons. CU2410 Sustainable Purchasing & Controlling Costs This course introduces the student to the methodologies and tools used to control costs and purchase supplies. This course helps the student value the purchasing, planning, and control processes in the food and beverage industry. Primary focus is on supplier selection, planning, and controlling costs, with an introduction to the study of sustainable products and approaches. Topics include planning and controlling costs using budgeting techniques, standard costing, standardized recipes, performance measurements, and food, beverage, and labor cost controls. CU2451 Food and Beverage Operations Management This course addresses front-of-the-house operations and is designed to provide students with an introduction from a managerial perspective of providing exceptional service to increasingly sophisticated and demanding guests. Survey of the world s leading wines classified by type, as well as other distilled beverages. Topics covered include the management and training of personnel to be responsible, professional alcohol servers, product knowledge, the income statement, job descriptions, sales forecasting and cost control. The students will produce a complete dining room and bar operation manual. This project should be saved on diskette or jump drive, as it will be used during Capstone or the development of a business plan. CU2650 Garde Manger 6 credits Prerequisite: CU1620 American Cuisine This course provides students with skills and knowledge of the organization, equipment, and responsibilities of the cold kitchen. Students are introduced to and prepare cold hors d oeuvres, sandwiches, salads, as well as basic charcuterie items while focusing on the total utilization of product. Reception foods and buffet arrangements are introduced. Students must pass a written and practical exam. 77

CU2861 A La Carte Kitchen 8 credits Introduces students to the A La Carte kitchen, emphasis is on a la minute method of food preparation, plus dining room service standards. Industry terminology, correct application of culinary skills, plate presentation, organization and timing in producing items off both a fixed- price menu and a la carte menu are stressed. The principles of dining room service are practiced and emphasized. The philosophy of food is further explored and examined in light of today s understanding of food, nutrition and presentation. Prior work experience or field study experience requires supervised, verifiable experience in the culinary field with a minimum of 90 work hours in food production. Students are responsible for securing the field experience site and may seek assistance through The Art Institutes International Minnesota. Field Experience is a semi-structured and supervised situation in which students receive basic training and directed work experience in selected entry-level positions consistent with career preference. Emphasis is on job competence, performance, professionalism, and work relations. Documentation must be completed during the course. CU3423 Catering and Event Management This course introduces the meeting planner, catering, and banquet manager perspectives in to the various market segments within the special event industry. It includes contracts, checklists, target markets, and closing the sale. CU3444 Art Culinaire This course will celebrate the culinary styles, restaurants, restaurateur and chefs who are in the current industry spotlight. Their style, substance and quality will be discussed and examined. During the hands on production aspect of the class, students will have the opportunity to be exposed to specialty produce and products. CU3455 Human Resource Management This course introduces the principles and practices of human resource management relevant to hospitality organizations, with emphasis on entrylevel manager s role. Topics covered will include employment laws, workforce management, compensation and benefits administration, labor unions, employee safety, diversity, and ethics. CU3480 Quality Service Management and Training This class will examine the role of service in the food service industry and explore how to give quality customer service. Service systems and training programs in quality operations will be examined through the use of case studies and hypothetical scenarios. The course will cover employee training and development from both a strategic and operational perspective. The class will culminate by examining Charlie Trotter s service standards in what is often the bestrated restaurant in the United States. CU3481 Foodservice Technology This course is a survey course in foodservice information systems and technology (IS&T) designed to introduce students to the many diverse facets of IS&T in the foodservice industry. Current systems and issues of major importance in the field of IS&T are explored as they relate to the foodservice industry. Emphasis will be placed on the managerial and business aspects of IS&T, rather then the technical perspectives. Core topics will include key foodservice systems (e.g., accounting and property management systems, point-of-sale, sales and catering, etc.), guest service and customer relationship management (CRM), knowledge management, and IS&T strategy. CU3490 Leadership and Organizational Development Students examine leadership, organizational management and culture, focuses on the role of the managers as facilitators of change within the organizations. The course emphasizes the concepts of motivation, interpersonal relationships, group dynamics, leadership, and organization culture. Examination of leadership styles, development of strategic plans, and critical problem solving in the hospitality industry are covered in the course. CU4410 Foodservice Financial Management In this course, the students develop a working knowledge of the current theories, issues and challenges involved with Foodservice Industry financial management. Students are introduced to the tools and skills that Foodservice Operators use in effective decision making. Topics include key financial statements, budgeting, cash management, cost concepts and behavior, investment analysis, and financial forecasting. CU4412 Exploring Wines and the Culinary Arts This course provides an introduction to the production of wine from vineyard to bottle, as well as a review of the basic grape varietals that are used to make wine. Through lectures, research and tasting, students are exposed to different types, styles, and quality levels of wine. Students will become familiar with the world s most important wine regions and learn common criteria by which wines from these different regions are evaluated. This course is designed to teach students the applied approach to matching wine and food, using flavors textures and components present in food and wine as complementing strategies. The course emphasizes menu planning, preparation of foods, cooking methods, and tasting wines with food. 78

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA CU4420 Facilities Management and Design This course provides students with information related to hospitality facility design and maintenance. Food service layout and design is related to operating issues, new building construction, and renovations. Planning and design of facilities including equipment, space and functional relationships, cost and operating efficiencies are emphasized. Maintenance programs, safety regulations, building code requirements and energy conservation are also explored. CU4421 Culinary Senior Practicum Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director This course is intended to be a practical capstone for the culinary management curriculum. It will draw on the majority of disciplines presented earlier in the program. In this class students will plan, organize, and execute functions that will be booked and/or sold to the public. Students in effect, will experience the necessary functions of opening their own restaurant. CU4430 Global Management and Operations in the Hospitality Industry This course provides students with an introduction to the dimensions and nature of the international hospitality industry. It is designed to review the principles of management and to apply management theory to the global marketplace. Students examine the social, cultural, political, and economic environments within which international hospitality operators compete for survival and growth. Topics emphasized include cultural dimensions of management, international management strategy, international marketing, and international human resource management. CU4492 Innovation and Entrepreneurship This course provides an introductory overview to the knowledge and skills needed for entrepreneurship. The course offers a chance to gain new knowledge and skills about how to identify and pursue entrepreneurial opportunities that can be applied to a student s own interests. Topics include: how entrepreneurs find, screen, and evaluate ideas and new business opportunities. Creativity: Imagination, ingenuity; The ability to create; The act of relating previously unrelated things; The application of a person s mental ability and curiosity to discover something new. Innovation: The introduction of something new; the development of new processes, methods, devices, products, and services for use by oneself and/or others. Entrepreneurship: The pursuit of opportunity without regard to resources currently controlled; the process of creating value by combining resources in unique ways to exploit opportunity. Involves taking responsibility for implementing innovative concepts. DF1400 Survey of Digital Filmmaking and Video Production This course will present a survey of the digital filmmaking & video production industries. It will focus on entry-level jobs and career paths, as well as the responsibilities and skills necessary for success. Students will also explore media s impact on society and gain an overview of the program. DF1410 Principles of Preproduction Prerequisite: CA2430 Introduction to Video This course focuses on preproduction techniques of storyboarding, staging and shot organization to design scenes and effectively translate them using appropriate filmmaking techniques. Contents to be covered include purposes and formats of storyboards as well as basic terminology and concepts used in storyboarding, staging and designing coverage for a scene. DF1440 Lighting Prerequisite: CA2430 Introduction to Video In this course, students will be introduced to the basic concepts and principles of lighting for video. Fundamentals of recognizing and controlling both natural and studio lighting with emphasis on the quality, quantity, and direction and its effect on the image. DF2400 Fundamentals of Cinematography ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in DF. Prerequisite: DF1410 Principles of Preproduction and DF1440 Lighting This course explores the various camera and lighting techniques used in digital filmmaking and video production. Discussions will cover the general concepts and principles of camera moves and lighting techniques. Focus will be placed on applying lighting techniques to create the desired visual effects. DF2410 Fundamentals of Producing & Directing Prerequisite: CA2430 Introduction to Video It is an art in itself to organize and direct digital filmmaking and video production. This course focuses on the production processes and performances from the perspectives of a producer and director and develops the student s talent for this unique form of art. DF2420 Studio Production Prerequisites: DF1440 Lighting and DF2400 Fundamentals of Cinematography This course focuses on broadcast studio operation, live production, studio management, lighting, crew, and sound. Students will also explore the theoretical basis of the electronics behind the equipment needed for studio production. Students will produce their own studio multi-camera program. 79

DF2430 Electronic Field Production ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in DF. Prerequisite: DF2420 Studio Production Students are immersed in the process of professional video field production in two styles: ENG (Electronic News Gathering) and EFP (Electronic Field Production). News encompasses onthe-spot coverage and storytelling in a spur-of-the-moment reporting format. The class will also examine EFP, single-camera location shooting as expressed in documentaries, corporate projects, or commercials. DF2440 History of Motion Media and Mass Communication This course presents a survey of major events and development in the history of motion media and mass communication. The survey focuses on the relationship between technology and media development and explores the impact motion media and mass communication has on society and economy. DF3400 Media Theory and Criticism Prerequisite: DF2440 History of Motion Media and Mass Communications In this course, students explore the different theories and approaches to media and their impact on society and culture so as to inform and enrich their own work. DF3410 Acting and Directing Prerequisite: DF2410 Fundamentals of Producing & Directing This course exposes students to the role and responsibilities of a director in helping actors bring their characters to life. Acting fundamentals will be studied through classroom exercises, assignments, observations and critiques. In addition, this course helps students understand the process of reading a script, conceiving a vision and communicating it to cast members to enhance performance. DF3420 Sound Design This course explores the various methods and techniques for digital sound composition and design. Students will focus on using digital sound systems and manipulating sound elements for intended effects in media content. DF3430 Short Media Production Prerequisite: DF3410 Acting and Directing This course discusses short form as a genre of media production and its features in subject matter and style. Students learn to produce short-form news, information, and dramatic content for multiple delivery platforms. DF3440 Senior Project Preparation ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in DF. Prerequisite: DF3430 Short Media Production This course initiates a three quarter long comprehensive project which will be integral to students final portfolios. Students will employ their cumulative skills to pre-produce a significant, sophisticated, digital film in a chosen genre. Committee and/ or faculty will approve the project content and genre of the digital film. Projects will be carried out individually or in groups based on the needs of the class as determined by the instructor. DF3450 Media Production Workshop Prerequisite: DF3430 Short Media Production Working in production teams, students in this workshop class will deal with real clients, typically representatives of non-profit organizations. Guided by a faculty, students interview the client to determine expectations and work in a team to design and produce the media content for an intended delivery system. DF3460 Audio Post Production Prerequisite: AP3440 Synthesis and Sound Design I for AP and DF3430 Short Media Production for DFVP This post-production audio class requires students to bring together appropriate sonic elements for a final production. This will include foley, automatic dialogue replacement, editing of music and sound sweetening. Once all the sound is locked, the student will mix down to a final audio format, which can then be incorporated with picture into an industry standard format. DF4400 Senior Project Production ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in DF. Prerequisite: DF3440 Senior Project Preparation This course continues the threequarter long comprehensive project begun in Senior Project Preparation. Students will employ cumulative skills to produce a significant, sophisticated, digital film in a chosen genre. Projects will be carried out individually or in groups based on the needs of the class as determined by the instructor. DF4420 Media Delivery Systems and Distribution This course addresses the end part of digital filmmaking and video production delivery and distribution. Students will study a variety of delivery methods and systems and determine the advantages and limitations of each. They will also examine the relationship between delivery systems and distribution methods and evaluate the relative efficiency, cost, and effectiveness of each. DF4410 Multi-Camera Production Prerequisite: DF3450 Media Production Workshop Synchronizing multiple cameras and equipment, students work in teams to execute a production, typically of a live performance or function. Emphasis is placed on operating multiple equipment simultaneously and working as a production team. 80

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA DF4430 Senior Project Post-Production Prerequisite: DF4400 Senior Project Production This course concludes the three-quarter long comprehensive project begun in Senior Project Preparation and created in Senior Project Production. Students will employ cumulative skills to postproduce a significant, sophisticated digital film in a chosen genre. DF4440 Senior Portfolio and Defense ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in DF. Prerequisite: DF4430 Senior Project Post-Production This course allows each student to determine and design the final organization and presentation of the graduation portfolio. Each student is expected to verbally present the portfolio and address audience questions as a format of defense. DF4450 Internship Prerequisite: DF3450 Media Production Workshop and Approval of Academic Director Through a field internship experience, students will be able to apply their skills in a real and practical situation. The main objectives of the internship are to allow students the opportunity to observe and participate in the operation of successful businesses related to their fields of study. Students will gain the experience they need to enter the field upon graduation. DFVB101 Survey of Digital Filmmaking & Video Production A survey of the digital filmmaking and video production field within the larger framework traditional mass media and emerging communication technologies. DFVB102 Introduction to Filmmaking Applications & Design Introduction to professional software applications used for the creation and design of digital filmmaking and video production. DFVB103 Fundamentals of Video Production Prerequisite: DFVB111 Principles of Cinematography Students begin the implementation of fundamental terminology, concepts, equipment and techniques of video production. DFVB105 Conceptual Storytelling Prerequisite: DFVB101 Survey of Digital Filmmaking & Video Production Introduces students to storytelling and the various elements of an effective story. Students will also translate a written story into visual elements in a storyboard. DFVB107 Fundamentals of Producing & Directing Prerequisite: DFVB103 Fundamentals of Video Production Focuses on the production processes from the perspectives of a producer and director. DFVB111 Principles of Cinematography Introduction of the history and principles of visual design for motion pictures through the use of a camera. DFVB113 Fundamentals of Editing Prerequisite: DFVB111 Principles of Cinematography Introduces the student to the editing of visuals and sound using non linear editing software. DFVB133 Lighting for Digital Film Students will be introduced to the basic concepts and principles of lighting for cinematography. Fundamentals of utilizing and controlling both natural and studio lighting with emphasis on the quality, quantity, and direction and its effect on the photographic image. DFVB202 Digital Cinematography Prerequisite: DFVB103 Fundamentals of Video Production Explores various cameras, lighting techniques and styles used in digital filmmaking and video production. Discussions will cover advanced concepts and principles of camera operation, camera movement, use of lenses, composition and lighting techniques. DFVB203 Editing Prerequisite: DFVB113 Fundamentals of Editing Using advanced editing methods; this course focuses on processing audio and video elements in media content and organizing such content for total effect and final delivery. DFVB204 Acting & Directing Prerequisite: DFVB107 Fundamentals of Producing & Directing Develops students understanding of the role and responsibilities of a director and their role in helping actors bring characters to life. DFVB205 History of Film & Media Focuses on the history of film and media, with the goal of delivering a clear outline and analysis of its key developments and innovations. DFVB212 Broadcast Graphics I Prerequisite: DFVB113 Fundamentals of Editing Students study the nature and attributes of motion and broadcast graphics and learn to generate, select, and manipulate still and motion graphics for broadcast and other media delivery. DFVB213 Studio Production Prerequisite: DFVB202 Digital Cinematography Focuses on broadcast studio operation, live production, studio management, lighting, crew, and sound. Students will also explore the theoretical basis of the electronics behind the equipment needed for studio production. 81

DFVB214 Scriptwriting Prerequisite: DFVB105 Conceptual Storytelling Students explore the writing and creative elements needed to create scripts. They will also acquire knowledge of all elements from research to proposal to treatment to script. DFVB222 Broadcast Graphics II Prerequisite: DFVB212 Broadcast Graphics I Reinforces compositing concepts, techniques and vocabulary acquired in Broadcast Graphics I and introduces more sophisticated tools and techniques. DFVB223 Intermediate Audio Prerequisite: AUDB101 Fundamentals of Audio Explores the various methods and techniques for digital sound composition and design. Students will focus on using digital sound systems and manipulating sound elements for intended effects in media content. DFVB233 Electronic Field Production Prerequisite: DFVB213 Studio Production Students will learn video field production in two styles: Electronic News Gathering and Electronic Field Production. DFVB306 Internship Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director Through a field internship experience, students will be able to apply their skills in a real and practical situation. The main objectives of the internship are to allow students the opportunity to observe and participate in the operation of successful businesses related to their fields of study. The students will gain the experience they need to enter the field when they graduate. DFVB307 Media Theory & Criticism Prerequisite: DFVB205 History of Film & Media Introduce students to the major theories used to analyze various media, including film, television and audio. DFVB308 Media Delivery Systems & Distribution Prerequisite: DFVB353 Compositing for Digital Film Addresses the end part of digital filmmaking and video production delivery and distribution. Students will study a variety of delivery methods and systems and determine the advantages and limitations of each. They will also examine the relationship between delivery systems and distribution methods and evaluate the relative efficiency, cost, and effectiveness of each. DFVB309 Portfolio I Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director This course prepares students for the transition to the professional world. This course will prepare students for the industry by helping them compile a portfolio. Students will demonstrate their conceptual, design, craftsmanship, and other skills as they assemble and refine their portfolio projects. Working individually with an instructor, each student will select representative projects showcasing work that reflects a unique style and developing them further as needed. Particular emphasis is placed on identifying short- and long-term professional employment goals, industry and professional related resources and portfolio development strategies. DFVB313 Sound Design Prerequisite: DFVB223 Intermediate Audio Explores the various methods and techniques for digital sound composition and design in film and video. DFVB316 Media Production Workshop Prerequisite: DFVB323 Short Media Production Working in production teams, students in this workshop class will deal with real clients, typically representatives of non-profit organizations. Guided by a faculty, students interview the client to determine expectations and work in a team to design and produce the media content for an intended delivery system. DFVB323 Short Media Production Prerequisite: DFVB103 Fundamentals of Video Production Discusses short form as a genre of media production and its features in subject matter and style. Students learn to produce short-form news, information, or dramatic content for multiple delivery platforms. DFVB332 Senior Project Preparation Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director Initiates a multi-quarter, comprehensive project which will be integral to students final portfolios. With department approval, students will employ their cumulative skills to pre-produce a digital film in a chosen genre. DFVB333 Senior Project Production Prerequisite: DFVB332 Senior Project Preparation This course continues the threequarter long comprehensive project begun in Senior Project Preparation. Students will employ cumulative skills to produce a significant, sophisticated, digital film in a chosen genre. Projects will be carried out individually or in groups based on the needs of the class as determined by the instructor. DFVB353 Compositing for Digital Film Prerequisite: DFVB222 Broadcast Graphics II Students in this course learn the concepts, techniques, and vocabulary of compositing. Students apply rotoscoping, match moving, keying, layering to finalize their multiple-source projects. 82

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA DFVB409 Portfolio II Prerequisite: DFVB309 Portfolio I This course aims to prepare students to seek entry-level employment within the industry by assisting them with the development and presentation of a graphic design portfolio that reflects the stated exit competencies. Students will demonstrate an advanced skill-set in areas as process, conceptual thinking, design, web design, craftsmanship, and other skills, as projects are refined and assembled into a cohesive, comprehensive body of work. Particular emphasis will be placed on identifying short- and long-term professional employment goals, industry and professional related resources and standards, portfolio development and presentation strategies. DM1420 Introduction to Design Management Management: An overview of the field of design management introducing the student to how design is managed within organizations to further business objectives. Covered topics include managing creativity and the value of branding. This course has been developed to introduce you to the business side of design. Outside of the creative realm of conceptualizing and developing creative materials, there is the reality of running a business that has a creative output: whether your business or someone else s. During this elevenweek course, you will learn the basics of how to position, package, project manage, and make money in a creative business. Practical skills of designing a business plan, composing a creative brief, thinking strategically, setting goals and creating a project timeline, as well as presenting your ideas with confidence and aplomb will be delivered through the mechanism of creating your own design brand and company. DM2400 Technology and Productivity Students will learn how businesses use technology to help achieve their objectives. Also, students will become familiar with current business productivity software and its application to design in business today. DM2410 Fundamentals of Business, **This course requires a C or higher to pass in FRM. This course is designed to examine entrepreneurial enterprises as a means of self-employment. The course provides a detailed view of the concepts, practices, strategies, legalities, and decisions involved in successfully establishing and operating one s own business. The basic structure of this course will guide the student in developing a strong working knowledge of creating business credit and banking relations. DM2430 Principles of Managerial Accounting Prerequisite: DM2410 Fundamentals of Business for DM students only This course is an introduction to the basic principles of accounting. Topics include the accounting cycle, general and special journals, subsidiary ledgers, end-ofperiod operations, worksheets, entries, financial terminology and statements. DM2470 Principles of Market Research Prerequisites: AD2430 Fundamentals of Marketing and Advertising and GE2412 College Mathematics Students will expand their understanding of and ability to analyze market research by identifying management challenges and converting them into research objectives, exploring research techniques and methods to collect information, and interpreting research findings in order to make business decisions. DM2480 Business Statistics for Design ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in DM. This course is a study of the statistical tools a design manager uses in the world of business. Methods of characterizing data are studied with emphasis given to proper data display. Permutations, combinations and probability are used to analyze normally distributed data. After an introduction to experimental design, methods for testing the significance of differences are examined. Correlation and regression analysis are used to detect linear trends. DM2490 Project Management ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in DM. Through this course, students are introduced to the fundamentals of business. The course provides students with a foundation in macroeconomics, labor relations, time management, human resources management, and basic marketing principles. The course combines this business foundation with a focus on the multimedia project management process. Students work as teams to successfully achieve multimedia project goals. The process examines the main elements required in every proposal/plan, time frame, and budget. Key areas of multimedia project teams serve to support the fundamental approach that every project team is tailored to achieve project results efficiently and effectively. DM3400 Financial Issues in Design ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in DM. Prerequisite: DM2430 Principles of Managerial Accounting This course is a survey of financial issues that a design manager can expect to encounter. Financial media are used to study money, banking and the Federal Reserve; the stock, bond and commodities markets; and derivatives such as futures contracts and options. This course focuses on economics (specifically macroeconomics) and goes hand-in-hand with the accounting course, which focuses on the individual business profit and loss sheet. DM3460 Business Communications Prerequisite: GE1410 English I This course focuses on written and oral communication skills as used in a business setting. Written projects emphasize publicity in newspapers, trade, and consumer publications. Oral skills will be developed through speeches and group projects such as radio commercials. 83

DM3480 Managing Creativity and Innovation ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in DM. In this course, students will examine the underlying theoretical foundations of creativity and innovation. New and innovative approaches to business problem solving will help students see ways to improve their skills and the skills of the people and organizations that they will manage. DM4410 Design Management Seminar This seminar course prepares students for entering the field of design management by gaining knowledge of current thinking and practices through the examination of case studies and the development of scenarios. DM4450 Business Plan ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in DM. Prerequisite: DM2410 Fundamentals of Business In this course students will learn how to develop a comprehensive business plan. The business plan will include items such as the following: the marketing plan, the financial plan, the human resources plan, the store design (if appropriate), and the merchandising plan (if appropriate). DM4480 Capstone ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in DM. Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director In this course, students will demonstrate knowledge across the curriculum by creating sample projects that cover the cumulative coursework completed over all previous quarters. The capstone project simulates the work environment, requiring teamwork as well as individual contributions. FD1430 Fashion Illustration Prerequisites: none Utilize basic and advanced techniques in rendering the fashion figure, garments, details, and textiles using various media with a focus on application of color and texture. Begin to develop a personal illustrative style. FD2420 Fundamentals of Construction Prerequisites: none This course introduces the student to apparel industry sewing standards and techniques. Through the completion of samples and the construction of basic garments, students learn the processes of measuring, cutting, sewing, and sequence of assembly; and apply fundamental garment construction skills utilizing industrial equipment. FD2430 Fundamentals of Patternmaking Prerequisite: FRM2415 Apparel Evaluation and Construction Introduction to the principles of patternmaking. Working from the flat pattern students will draft basic blocks. FD2450 Technical Drawing and Design Prerequisites: GD1420 Image Manipulation & GD1430 Illustration Development of presentation boards and technical illustrations manually and by computer aided design technology. Students work to develop a computer generated production package to include how to import illustrations for front and back flats. FD2475 Advanced Construction Prerequisites: FRM2415 Apparel Evaluation and Construction and FD2420 - Fundamentals of Construction. In this course students study advanced industrial construction techniques to further refine construction skills and apply to structured garments. FD2480 Advanced Patternmaking Prerequisite: FD2430 Fundamentals of Patternmaking Flat pattern techniques in accordance with garment trade practices. Emphasis will be on the manipulation of patterns for more complex designs. FD2490 Research and Sourcing Fundamentals Prerequisites: FRM1401 Fashion History II, FRM1410 Fundamentals of Management Technology, and FRM1433 Textile and Fabrics Through a variety of in-depth research and analysis, students learn about manufacturing sources and costs that affect production of a garment and the financial viability of their choices. FD3420 Draping and Fitting Analysis Prerequisite: FD2480 Advanced Patternmaking Introduction to the principles and techniques of draping and fitting on a customer or model. Proportion, line, grain and fit are analyzed FD3430 Concept Development Prerequisites: GD1420 Image Manipulation and FD2450 Technical Drawing Design principles applied to the creation of marketable concepts and designs derived from research and practices within the fashion industry. FD3440 Computer Patternmaking Prerequisites: FD2480 Advanced Patternmaking and FRM 1410 Fundamentals of Management Technology Patternmaking utilizing industry standard software. FD3450 Design Studio Women s Wear Prerequisites: FD2480 Advanced Patternmaking, FD3420 Draping and Fitting Analysis, FD3430 Concept Development, and FRM1433 - Textiles and Fabrics Design and construct apparel for the women s market. FD3460 Computer Production Systems Prerequisite: FD3440 Computer Patternmaking Industrial application of patternmaking, including revising style lines, grading, and creating production ready patterns and marker making. 84

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA FD3470 Design Studios Menswear Prerequisites: FD2480 Advanced Patternmaking, FD3420 Draping and Fitting Analysis, FD3430 Concept Development, and FRM1433 Textiles and Fabric Design and construct apparel for the men s market. FD3480 Surface Design Prerequisites: FRM1433 Textiles and Fabric and FD3440 Computer Patternmaking Manual design applications of colors, prints, and motifs on a variety of fabrications. FD3490 Fashion Career Management Prerequisite: FD3480 Surface Design Fashion Career Management prepares students to manage their career path, begin a job search in the fashion industry or a related area of the market, assess career opportunities and develop self marketability. Students also gain practical communication, networking, and interviewing skills, and secure an internship in their area of interest. FD4410 Senior Collection Concept and Technical Prerequisites: FD3430 Concept Development and FD3460 Computer Production Systems Market research, development of concepts, technical drawings, patternmaking and the sourcing of materials for final collection. FD4430 Digital Textile Design Prerequisite: FD3480 Surface Design Textile print design and fabric development exploring applied and structural techniques using pixel and vector based software. FD4450 Senior Collection Technical and Production Prerequisite: FD4410 Senior Collection Concept and Technical Final development phase of collection including specification package. Emphasis is on finish construction and presentation of original line. FD4470 Capstone Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director This course focuses on the completion of the portfolio. Your final portfolio should focus on your individual strengths. This work should reflect your uniqueness and your ability to meet demanding industry standards. FD4490 Internship Prerequisite: Approval of the Academic Director Through a field internship experience, students will be able to apply acquired subject matter and career/professional skills in a real and practical situation. The main objectives of the internship are to allow students the opportunity to observe and participate in the operation of successful business related to their fields of study. Students will gain field when they graduate FND105 Design Fundamentals This introductory course will explore the principles of design, and introduce and develop the creative process. Design elements and relationships will be identified and employed to establish a basis for aesthetic sensitivity and critical analysis. Design will be presented as a tool of communication. FND110 Observational Drawing This course involves the observation and translation of three-dimensional form into two-dimensional drawings. Starting with simple shapes and progressing to more complex organic forms, students will build skill levels in composition, line quality, through the use of tone light and shadow. FND120 Perspective Drawing Prerequisite: FND110 Observational Drawing This course is a fundamental drawing course where the students will explore various art and media and learn to use a variety of drawing tools with an emphasis on perspective, where the students will draw three-dimensional objects in one-, two-, and three-point perspective. FND135 Image Manipulation Introduction to raster-based digital image manipulation, students become acquainted with the concepts, hardware, and software, related to digital image acquisition, image editing, manipulation, color management basics, masking, layering, retouching, scanning and output. FND150 Digital Color Theory Introduction to the principles of color and an exploration of color theory as it relates to media. FRM1400 Fashion History I Students study the development of clothing from the earliest time to the Renaissance and the silhouette reflected through the eyes of the designer. FRM1401 Fashion History II Prerequisite: FRM1400 Fashion History I An in-depth continuation of Fashion History I, from the Renaissance to Modern. FRM1410 Fundamentals of Management Technology This course teaches technology skills in the context of common professional applications. Students will study current trends in digital media and develop essential management productivity software skills including web-based media. FRM1433 Textiles and Fabrics Fabrics are studied from the raw state through processing, spinning, and weaving to finish. The course investigates textile sources and the appropriate selection of fabrics. 85

86 FRM1442 Introduction to Retailing ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in FRM. Students will be introduced to all major retailing topics involving both large and small retailers, brick and mortar retailers and their combinations, and direct marketers. Includes discussion of consumer behavior, information systems, store locations, operations, human resource management, customer communications, computerization and integrating and controlling the retail strategy in the twenty-first century. Careers in retailing will also be discussed. FRM2400 Consumer Behavior Prerequisite: FRM1442 Introduction to Retailing This course examines the cultural, social, and individual variables involved in consumer behavior. It also reviews how they are incorporated into buyer decision processes and marketing practices. FRM2415 Apparel Evaluation and Construction Prerequisite: FRM1433 Textiles and Fabrics This course is designed for fashion management students to evaluate the equation between quality and cost in garments. Students will be able to identify and analyze quality of trims, fabrics and construction in relationship to price point. Included will be women s sportswear, children s wear and men s wear in a range of price points from high end to discounted. FRM2475 Retail Mathematics ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in FRM. Prerequisite: FRM1442 Introduction to Retailing and GE2412 College Mathematics This course provides an understanding of the various financial tools used by retailers to evaluate performance. Students calculate, analyze, and interpret financial concepts associated with accounting from a merchandising perspective. FRM2490 Visual Merchandising Prerequisites: AD2430 Fundamentals of Marketing and Advertising and FRM2415 - Apparel Evaluation and Construction Students learn the importance of eye appeal and consumer buying habits. Students create their own displays using the latest principles and techniques in the visual organization of merchandise. FRM3425 Introduction to Manufacturing Prerequisite: FRM2415 Apparel Evaluation and Construction This course is an overview of the fashion industries including the terminology of fashion and an explanation of the three levels of the industry: design, production and sales. Careers and the organization, structure, and problems of the garment industry are studied. FRM3455 Merchandise Management ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in FRM. Prerequisite: DM2410 Fundamentals of Business Students study the categorizations of stores, organizational components, and the characteristics of various wholesale and retail markets. They will explore the Private Label and Brand Name businesses, develop customer profiles and look at franchising as a means of entering the retail world. Students will become familiar with merchandise accounting as it relates to the various retail formats. FRM4410 Web Marketing for Fashion & Retail Management Prerequisites: AD2460 Branding, DM2470 Principles of Market Research, and FRM3455 Merchandise Management This course focuses primarily on marketing on the Web, addressing the elements and requirements of information distribution, advertising, or sales in this new medium. The content of the course includes an overview of major online services, portals, and developing content aggregators. Students learn how to modify traditional marketing theories and strategies as well as the demands and opportunities unique to the Web. One of these opportunities receives special attention: using server push or other push technologies to develop shows or magazines online. FRM4420 Retail Operations and Technology Prerequisite: FRM3455 Merchandise Management Develops the student s understanding of operational objectives in a retail structure. An emphasis will be placed on planning, control, profitability, and staffing in a retail environment. The use of technology in the industry and the responsibilities of retail executives will be examined as well. Also career opportunities and ethical behavior of those individuals who choose to enter the retail arena will be discussed. Articles pertaining to current issues, (found in trade publications and newspapers) will be reviewed and discussed, in order to understand methods that have been created to expedite and increase profitability for the retailer. FRM4425 Trends and Concepts in Apparel Prerequisite: FRM2415 Apparel Evaluation and Construction A comprehensive study of cultural and social issues that affect fashion and the emergence of trends. Students will analyze the meanings and importance of clothing and apply these concepts for contemporary society. FRM4461 Product Development Prerequisite: FRM3455 Merchandise Management or FD3430 Digital Textile Design In this course students will review design concepts and technology and the development of merchandising in the modern market, analyze target markets and source, cost and develop a product for that market in presentation form including a prototype. FRM4495 Special Topics in Fashion & Retail Management Prerequisites: FRM4425 Trends and Concepts in Apparel and FRM4461 Product Development This course allows the student to select a special topic in Fashion & Retail Management under the guidance of an instructor and the Academic Program Director. This course also allows for any deficiencies noted in the students development as outlined through evaluation of student work, and informal, formal interviews with the Professional Advisory Committee.

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA GD1401 Fundamentals of Design This course will introduce the basic principles of design. Using a variety of materials and techniques, the creative process will be introduced and developed. An exploration of design elements and relationships will establish a basic aesthetic sensitivity. GD1402 Drawing and Perspective Visual awareness is expanded through the observation and translation of three-dimensional form into twodimensional drawings. Starting with simple forms and progressing to more complex organic forms, students will increase their skill levels in construction techniques, composition, line quality, and human anatomy. GD1403 Typography for Digital Media ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in AD and GD. Students will investigate the relationship among letters, space, fonts, and type systems. Students activities include copying, fitting, and styling text type; spacing and rendering display arrangements; and marking up and specifying both text and display type. Typographic attributes will be applied to enhance readability; logos will be designed and titles for computeranimated and broadcast graphics will be story boarded. Students will develop the ability to work within traditional and contemporary design context. GD1411 Intermediate Drawing Prerequisite: GD1401 Fundamentals of Design and GD1402 Drawing and Perspective Continuing to develop the various drawing skills from the first and second drawing courses, students will focus on depicting gesture and motion, capturing essence of movement and form in space, and creating compositions based on the four basic lighting situations. GD1420 Image Manipulation This course is designed to examine photo retouching and image manipulation using computers. Students will use software to manipulate photographic images to the point where they no longer resemble the original artwork. GD1430 Illustration Prerequisite: GD1401 Fundamentals of Design and GD1402 Drawing and Perspective This course will introduce students to basic skills and principles of illustration. Various methods and functions of illustration will be explored. Students will learn the role of illustration in the design process and apply that knowledge to the projects. GD1431 Design Layout Prerequisite: GD1402 Drawing & Perspective and GD1403 Typography for Digital Media This class will enable the student to design with type and visuals and to utilize technology in problem solving. Emphasis will be on the process of design development from roughs to comprehensives, layout and marker techniques, and the use of a grid system for multi-component layouts. GD1473 Digital Color Theory Prerequisite: GD1401 Fundamentals of Design Introduction to the principles of color and an exploration of color theory as it relates to media. GD2421 Art and Design Concepts Prerequisite: GD1403 Typography for Digital Media This course will emphasize the conceptualization process of art and design solving given problems. The student will use creative problem solving and research techniques, specifically, problem identification, analysis, brainstorming, and idea refinement. Portfolio quality projects will be produced. GD2425 Advanced Typography Prerequisite: GD1403 Typography for Digital Media This course is an exploration of printed communication and the use of typography as an exclusive element of design. The course will focus on the development of marketable, original, and creative problem solving solutions with an emphasis on professional presentation techniques. D2432 Digital Illustration Prerequisite: GD1420 Image Manipulation This course will help students communicate and design with the computer as a professional tool. Using different software applications, the student will demonstrate an understanding of electronic illustration. The course will explore vector-based graphic applications that are used in the industry. GD2433 Electronic Design Prerequisite: GD1431 Design Layout This course will explore various means of indicating, placing and manipulating visual elements in page design, systematically developing strong and creative layout solutions by means of a cumulative, conceptual design process. The ability to integrate photographs, illustrations, and display and text type effectively will be developed using page composition software. GD2437 Design History This course will examine the influences of societal trends, historical events, technological developments, and the fine arts on contemporary graphic design, illustration, typographical design, photography, and fashionable design trends in general. Through lectures, supplied visual examples, independent research, and design assignments, the student will gain insight into a variety of major design influences. The student will learn how to research and utilize a wide variety of design styles. 87

88 GD2440 Print Production ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in GD. Prerequisite: GD1420 Image Manipulation or PH2451 Digital Photographic Production and GD1431 Design Layout In this course, traditional print production techniques are employed in the preparation of camera-ready art. Production of single- and multi-color mechanical processes and discussion of various printing processes are covered. GD2480 Designing for the Web Prerequisite: IM1480 Fundamentals of Interactive Design Students Integrate design skills with the basic computer language skills (HTML) required in order to create web pages. Emphasis is balanced between the design and technical elements of Web Page design and production. GD3411 Corporate Identity and Communications Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director This course is in-depth study of the history, psychology, and function of corporate identification. Students will produce a multi-faceted design presentation acceptable for a contemporary corporation. GD3431 Advanced Design ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in GD. Prerequisite: GD1401 Fundamentals of Design and GD1402 Drawing & Perspective and GD2440 Print Production This advanced course enhances and builds on skills developed in fundamental design courses. Refining typographic skills and furthering design sensitivities will be emphasized. Critical analysis and evaluation will be explored in the context of goalfocused design objectives. Portfolioquality projects will be developed. GD3435 Media Design The course examines the structures and communication skills used by various members of a creative team. The processes of concept development, media application and design creation are emphasized. In addition, the variety of media used by graphic designers and their suppliers will be examined. GD3445 Marketing Design This course is a review of popular culture as it relates to social, informational, economic, political and educational current events. A special emphasis is placed on the relationship of trends and pop topics to advertising. Current media, including books, television, movies, tele-communications media, on-line communications, and marketing trends and strategies are reviewed. GD3455 Package Design This course will define the role of packaging in product identification, presentation, and production. The unique challenges of adapting typography, illustration, design and materials to 3D form will be explored. Research will include marketing objective, structural integrity and display aesthetics. GD3465 Publication Design In this course, students will prepare scanned and object-oriented graphic files and integrate them with text in a multiple-page composition file. File transfer and document printing is covered. The process of page imposition for printing and other technical procedures specific to publishing will be introduced, and the place of the electronic page make-up in modern print production will be studied. GD3470 Law & the Commercial Arts This course includes the study of basic legal principles related to the conduct of business. Specifically, this course includes an overview of the legal system, contracts, personal property, intellectual property, real property, law of sales, agency and employment law, business organizations, insurance, security devices, bankruptcy, and alternative dispute resolution. GD4435 Advanced Illustration Prerequisite: GD1430 Illustration This course will emphasize the importance of concept and originality of ideas in contemporary illustration. GD4480 Design Production Team Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director This is a special project course in which students utilize their knowledge of design, typography, production techniques, video, and audio to execute a team project. Students also apply communications, teamwork, and organizational skills. Students work cooperatively to achieve a common goal, similar to industry experience. GE1406 Nutrition This course centers on an explanation of the basic principles of nutrition and their relationship to health. The structure, functions, and sources of nutrients, including carbohydrates, fats, proteins, vitamins, minerals, and water are discussed. Current issues in nutrition are reviewed, including dietary guidelines, energy balance, vitamin supplements, and food facts. GE1410 English I Prerequisite: C or higher in TS094 Transitional English OR Accuplacer English Placement score of 87 or higher This course is the first of two courses in the composition sequence. Students are introduced to college-level writing as a process of developing and supporting a thesis in an organized essay. The use of appropriate diction and language is emphasized along with reading and responding to the writing of others. Students will adhere to the standard conventions of written English.

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA GE1413 Psychology This course will provide the students with an introduction to the field of psychology as a science in the study of human and animal behavior. The course will survey the development of theoretical perspectives and practices from the onset of psychology at the beginning of the 20th century to today. Students will examine human development, theories of personality, cognitive process, learning, intelligence, motivation and emotion, sensation and perception as well as psychological and physiological basis of behavior. In doing so, students will gain a better understanding of an individual s interactions with the world around them. GE1424 Public Speaking In this course, students will develop and refine oral presentation skills necessary for personal and professional life. Students will be introduced to various aspects of the communication process, including establishing credibility, identifying and applying research materials, and using appropriate audio and/or visual aides. Additionally, they will gain knowledge of audience analysis and critical listening skills. GE1433 Art History This course combines a visual overview of art and architecture from Western civilization, with interpretive projects and writing assignments. Students will learn to differentiate between artistic styles and movements. They will create relevant research projects that illustrate and combine visual aspects of artistic styles and periods. GE1456 Music Appreciation This course will introduce the student to the historical development of music and the composers of different eras. Students will focus on the role that music plays in our lives today as well as examining the cultural influences that have determined the varied musical languages throughout the world. GE1466 Principles of Economics As an introduction to the fundamental nature of micro-and macroeconomics theory, students acquire a basic understanding of how economic systems and principles work and the way they influence daily life. The course will present the role of markets, the forces of supply and demand, the importance of producer/consumer relationships, distinctions between fiscal and monetary policy, and the natures of international trade. GE2411 English II Prerequisite: GE1410 English I This course is the second of two in the composition sequence. Students expand their experiences reading, writing, and researching. Students write essays demonstrating their ability to analyze and evaluate the ideas of others and integrate those ideas into their own writing. The course includes in-depth examination of research methods, conventions of documentation, and style guides. Students select, evaluate, and integrate a variety of sources to support a thesis in a research paper. GE2412 College Mathematics This course centers on the basic concepts of arithmetic, as well as algebra. Topics include: linear and quadratic equations, polynomials, exponents, functions, and graphical representations of functions. This course is designed to build an adequate background for subsequent science and business courses. GE2423 Environmental Science This course explores environmental science as an interdisciplinary study from the natural sciences (biology, chemistry, and geology) and the social sciences (ecology, politics, ethics) to gain an understanding of how nature works and how interconnections occur. The use and abuse of the environment is also examined. Students will also explore the future of the environment and what effect they can have on it. GE2442 Critical Thinking This course assists students in becoming more effective learners through the identification and development of skills, processes and techniques for improving comprehension. This course also teaches students to apply reasoning principles for critical analysis and evaluation of thought and discourse and to use creative and critical techniques in problem-solving and decision making. GE2477 Spanish I This is the first of two courses that introduce the student to Spanish language. It will be taught as an interactive class, with the students participating in written and oral assignments. Along with learning conversational phrases and key words, the student will understand the differences between singular and plural, masculine and feminine words, regular and irregular verbs and how to conjugate verbs. In order to develop functional proficiency, the students will be provided opportunities for immediate usage of vocabulary and grammatical structures in culturally authentic communicative situations on a daily basis. GE2478 Spanish II Prerequisite: GE2477 Spanish I This is the second class in Spanish and will build on the knowledge gained from Spanish I. There will be increased challenges to the student to use Spanish spontaneously and accurately. There will be additional activities, such as realistic day-to- day situations, group work to bring Spanish into daily use in the business sector and in the home. GE3424 Interpersonal Communication Prerequisite: GE1424 Public Speaking This course examines the art of social interactions in human relationships, focusing on the application of theory and research. Students will explore and analyze the social relationships that link humans in a variety of contexts, such as culture, gender, religion, etc., in order to practice the process of interactions within their own relationships. 89

GE3432 History and Culture of Cuisine This course provides an examination of the major historical and geographical developments that have affected the creation of various cultural patterns including, but not limited to, gastronomic choices, cooking habits, folkways, and the use of local ingredients to meet nutritional and cultural considerations. Topics will include the power and impact of cultural symbols and the ways in which generations teach their young to honor a cultural heritage. Students will complete a term paper on a topic of their choice related to the content of this course. GE3433 Contemporary Art Prerequisite: GE1433 Art History This course provides a visual examination of recent Western art. Students will demonstrate knowledge of the various movements in modern and contemporary art through writing assignments and exams. Class participation is emphasized with group discussion and critiques. GE3466 World Music Influences Prerequisite: GE1456 Music Appreciation Students are introduced to themes and issues relating to music and cultures and the relationship between them around the world. They explore music theory, harmony, melodies, and scales from a diverse range of cultures, as well as the integration of Western musical traditions and African musical forms and rhythms as they relate to American idioms such as jazz, blues, and popular music. GE3490 Cultural Anthropology Prerequisite: GE1413 Psychology or GE1466 - Principles of Economics This course is designed to introduce the principles and findings of contemporary cultural anthropology, including the systems of social structure, economic structures, family, crime, technology, multiculturalism, and the relationships of these systems to our lives. Specifically, we will look at these issues as they relate to designated roles across cultures. GE4442 Ethics Prerequisite: GE2442 Critical Thinking This course examines human life, experience and thought in order to discover and develop the principles and values for pursuing a more fulfilled existence. This course helps students to apply theories designed to justify ethical judgments in a selection of contemporary personal and social issues. GE4455 Literature Prerequisite: GE2411 English II This course focuses on literary selections. Topics include the critical evaluation of the literary genres: story, poetry and drama. GE4461 Physics Prerequisite: GE 2412 College Mathematics This is a course that introduces the concepts and methods of physics, including mechanics, heat, electricity and magnetism, and modern physics. An interdisciplinary approach will be stressed to integrate physics topics into students area of study to help facilitate creative work. HM1430 Sales and Public Relations This course will focus on the sales function in varied hospitality settings. The relationship of sales to marketing will be explored, and the process of the actual personal sales call will be emphasized. The role of a successful public relations plan will also be examined, as well as the benefits of favorable public impression on a hospitality operation. HM1440 Lodging Operations This course will represent an overview of the various types of lodging operations in the industry. The guest cycle will be examined, as well as the role of front office operations. The housekeeping and building maintenance functions will be discussed in detail, and students will be expected to produce a management flowchart and detail the inter-relationship of the various departments in a lodging operation. HM2450 Front Office Management Prerequisite: HM1440 Lodging Operations This course will present the overall front office/front desk work environment and train students how to enter the front desk in a supervisor role. Emphasis will be given to the hospitality target markets, reservations, guest accounting, back office interfaces, communications, guest services and guest relations. The night audit function and revenue management techniques will be explored, as well as staff motivation and training. HM2451 Purchasing/Contract Service In this course, students will learn the importance of the purchasing function in various hospitality settings. Particular emphasis will be placed on food and beverage purchasing, linen, chemical and general supply buying. In addition, the role of contract services in support of a hospitality operation will be explored, including contract negotiation and cost/benefit analysis. The relationship of the purchasing function to the inventory process and the profit and loss statement will also be reviewed. HM2480 Hospitality Law This course covers legislation and statutes governing hospitality law. Legal issues such as innkeepers liability, Dram Shop liability, ADA compliance, and OSHA regulations are combined with a historical perspective and present day application. The class will also address pertinent key industry issues with a critical eye towards those laws that may hinder the industry s growth, as well as those laws that strengthen our rights as hospitality professional. HM2481 Institutional Operations This course will discuss the varied options for employment in the institutional operation. Healthcare, senior care, cruise line, casino, education, corrections, airline and contract service companies will be detailed. Special attention will be given to the unique opportunities and challenges this segment of the industry presents to supervisory staff and management. 90

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA HM3412 Travel and Tourism This class will provide an overview of the national and international travel market. The evolving role of travel agents will be discussed, as well as the emergence of the internet as a planning tool. The importance of tourism to the world economy will be discussed, with a consideration of the effect of terrorism on world markets. The airline, cruise, rail and automobile industries will be examined, correlating their influence on the hospitality industry. HM3490 Risk Management This course explores risk management issues in the business property and liability area. It includes the operation of insurance companies, as well as the duties and functions of the hospitality manager and risk manager at the property level. An analysis of commercial property, business interruption, owners, surety, general liability, workers compensation, health, life and professional insurance needs and coverage will be examined in the context of the hospitality operation. HM3491 Multi-Unit/Chain/ Franchise Operations This class will discuss the relationship of the individual property to the parent organization. A discussion of small chain vs. large chain, local, regional, national and international organizations will provide the student with a globe perspective on corporate hospitality operations. The role of the franchise organization will be explored, as well as the place of the property manager as owner s representative in a franchise location. Several different franchise models will be presented, as well as a discussion of the cost/benefit relationship of a franchise vs. independent property. HM4401 Hospitality Accounting Prerequisite: DM2430 Principles of Managerial Accounting This class will build on the knowledge gained in the accounting principles class, with a focus on the unique requirements of the hospitality operation. Forecasting, budgeting and adherence modules will be included, as well as an in-depth examination of the profit and loss statement as a management tool. The POS and property management software interface will be included, with discussions on the cost of inventory, inventory procedures and proper food and variable costing practices. A section on hospitality finance will explore the purchase, sale and capitalization requirements of sample properties in the industry. HM4430 Hospitality Capstone Through competencies developed with previous related studies course work, students will develop a complete business plan for a hospitality operational unit. The project will include Market Analysis and Marketing Strategy, Operating Budget, Sales Projections, Opening Inventories, Capital Equipment, Demographics, Labor Schedule, and Facilities Design as appropriate to the project. The student will have the assistance of an Instructor to facilitate the completion of the project. ID1420 Architectural Drafting ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in ID. This course is an introduction to basic drafting equipment, techniques, terminology, and symbols used in design. Drafting requirements include lettering, plan views, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and paraline drawings. ID1421 Perspectives Prerequisite: ID1420 Architectural Drafting This course is an introduction to the principles of one-and-two point perspective and the techniques to represent shade and shadow. ID1426 Mixed Media Prerequisite: ID1420 Architectural Drafting Sketching and the rendering of elevations, plan, and interior perspectives using a variety of media and surfaces are the main focus. The course will introduce students to the world of computers through lecture and laboratory sessions. The laboratory sessions will provide hands-on skills on a specific computer system and will teach functions within a computer environment to complete projects. ID1433 Textiles and Fabrics Course explores the properties of man-made and natural fibers and their production, uses, and characteristics. Content includes discussion of fibers, yarns, fabrics, finishes, design methods, aesthetic applications, and ordering specifications. ID1440 3D Design This course is an introduction to the basic elements and principles of 3D design and exploration of the visual and structural qualities of objects. Students solve problems by organizing and constructing. 3D forms within spatial environments. ID2420 History of Design to 1830 This course explores the evolution of furniture interiors and design from the ancient world to 1830 and discusses the major cultural, political, social and economic factors that affect the design of material culture and the relationship of furniture and interiors to significant movements in art and architecture. It includes the history of the profession of interior design and contributions of interior designers to the development of the profession. The course also introduces students to major architectural developments, including various architectural movements. 91

ID2422 Introduction to Space Planning Prerequisite: ID2430 Computer Aided Drafting This course explores the issues related to preliminary space planning, and spatial volume with special emphasis placed on human factors. Students will develop skill and judgment in ordering and defining space and represent their ideas through conceptual drawings and other supporting graphic material. ID2424 Elements of Interior Design Prerequisites: ID1420 Architectural Drafting and ID1421 Perspectives Characteristics and selection criteria for the identification and evaluation of interior materials, finishes, and treatments is the focus of the course. ID2425 Building Materials and Mechanical Systems Prerequisite: ID2430 Computer Aided Drafting This is a survey of the principles of interior construction and the interrelationship between materials and structure. The course includes discussion of wall, floor, ceiling, mechanical, and electrical systems. This course is an introduction to the process of producing and using a set of contract documents for interior spaces. Content includes formatting, cross-referencing drawings, and how to represent details, section and legends. Content also includes a study of the codes and regulations covering public health and welfare. ID2430 Computer Aided Drafting ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass on ID. Prerequisite: ID1426 - Mixed Media This course examines the hardware that constitutes a CAD work station and the operating system (MS- DOS/Windows) that enables the equipment to function as a unit. It also shows how to use AutoCAD to set up drawings and add lines, circles, arcs, and other shapes, geometric constructions, and text. Students use display and editing techniques to obtain information about their drawings and work with drawing files. ID2431 Revit Prerequisite: ID2430 Computer Aided Drafting The major focus of this course is the use of Revit to render 3D images. ID2440 Design Process Prerequisite: ID1420 Architectural Drafting Students will be introduced to the basic elements and principles of Interior Design. Exploration of the process and methodology used in the development of Interior Design solutions. Content includes anthropomorphic and ergonomic data and its relationship to interior space. Development of alternative design solutions, and the visual and verbal vocabulary necessary to communicate design ideas at the schematic level. ID2441 Design Development: Residential Prerequisite: ID2430 Computer Aided Drafting This course explores the design development phase of the design process. Students transition from thinking conceptually to fully developing a residential interior space. Course content centers on the inter-relationships of the elements of 3-D space, such as proportion and volume, planning, materials, detailing, and finishing. Discussions also include physical and psychological needs unique to the home. ID2442 Design Development: Commercial Prerequisite: ID2430 - Computer Aided Drafting This course is a study of the 3D aspects of interior space and the understanding of interior spaces as volume. Students work through the process of designing a corporate space in complete detail from conceptualization to presentation drawings. Research centers on the technical elements involved in commercial spaces, corporate furnishing, materials, and finish. Applications are produced using CAD. ID2443 Problems in Residential Design Prerequisite: ID2441 Design Development Residential for Interior Design Students only This course examines issues relevant to residential needs of people from various age groups, economic levels, and/or physical and emotional conditions. ID3420 History of Design from 1830 to Present Prerequisite: ID2420 History of Design to 1830 This course examines the development of furniture, interiors, architecture, and decorating arts from 1830 to the present. Projects emphasize English, American, and international styles in a contemporary idiom. ID3421 History of 19th and 20th Century Architecture This course examines the evolution of modern architecture in the 19th and 20th centuries. Content includes discussion of the theoretical basis of significant architectural styles and places architectural developments within their cultural, historical, and social framework. ID3425 Lighting Prerequisite: ID2430 Computer Aided Drafting This course involves the study of lighting under a variety of studio location situations. The student acquires a working knowledge of natural and artificial lighting. Students apply problem-solving techniques to different lighting conditions. ID3427 Interior Tectonics & Codes ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in ID. Co-rerequisite: ID2430 - Computer Aided Drafting This course surveys the principles of interior construction and the interrelationship between materials and structure. Course includes discussion of wall, floor and ceiling systems, mechanical and electrical systems and their relationship to interior design. Content also includes a study of the codes and regulations covering the health and welfare of the public. 92

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA ID3429 Interior Detailing Prerequisite: ID2430 Computer Aided Drafting This course examines the study of materials and fabrication techniques involved in the design and construction of basic interior details and how these details are communicated in the documents package. Content includes detailing of cabinetry, ceiling, walls, floors and millwork. ID3440 Specialty Design Prerequisite: ID2430 Computer Aided Drafting This course focuses on advanced space planning that emphasizes the development of sculptural space and the concept of plan as art. The course emphasizes precedent and contextual thinking in the development of a creative design for a variety of interior applications. ID3441 Advanced Residential Design Prerequisite: ID2443 Problems in Residential Design This course focuses on programming and development of a high-end residential space with emphasis on interior details. ID3442 Advanced Corporate Design Prerequisite: ID2442 Design Development: Commercial This course focuses on the complete analysis of a corporate interior design project by developing in-depth programming, schematics, design development, modeling, construction documents, and specifications. This group project also helps further develop time management, organization, and group communication skills. ID4425 Advanced Detailing ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in ID. Prerequisite: ID3429 Interior Detailing This course is designed to involve the student in the research and design of complex casework pieces, millwork, interior construction details, and custom furniture. ID4440 Advanced Specialty Design Prerequisite: ID3440 Specialty Design This course focuses on the research and design of a hospitality space. Pre-design research focuses on industry standards, design issues, codes and products relevant to the development of hospitality space. ID4479 Professional Practice This course focuses on principles governing the business, legal, and contractual aspects of the interior design profession for both commercial and residential applications. This includes in-depth discussion of the legal, contractual and ethical elements required to run a 21st century business. Further discussion addresses client relationships, developing marketing services, business plans, and a comprehensive resume and cover letter. ID4480 Senior Design Project Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director This course will prepare students for job interviews by helping them compile a portfolio. Students will demonstrate their conceptual design, craftsmanship, and other skills as they assemble and refine their portfolio pieces. Each student will select representative pieces, showcasing work that reflects a unique style. Particular emphasis is placed on identifying short and long term professional employment goals, as well as related strategies and resources. IM1480 Fundamentals of Interactive Design ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in WDIM. The course introduces students to the history, trends, terminology, and concepts in the field of interactive design. Through materials presented in the course, students become familiar with the roles and responsibilities of people working in the field, professional organizations, and significant organizations. Students are also introduced to the basic concepts and tools for developing interactive media applications. IM2420 Fundamentals of Scripting Languages ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in WDIM. Prerequisite: IM1480 Fundamentals of Interactive Design Students develop and refine basic programming skills. Emphasis is placed on programming concepts including logic, problem solving, process flow and flowcharting, syntax and structures, and debugging and troubleshooting. Students will acquire skills needed to design, develop, and produce practical interactive applications. IM2440 User Centered Interface Design Prerequisite: GD1420 Image Manipulation This course provides students with the skills to design interactive interfaces. Emphasis is placed on examination of the information architecture, communication and business goals, media, and delivery platform. Students will develop an interface prototype that meets the goals of the project. IM2460 Introduction to Authoring Prerequisite: GD1420 Image Manipulation n Web Design & Development Diploma and the Web Design & Interactive Media (AAS, BS) This course will introduce the student to concepts and designs utilized in the development of education, sales, and marketing presentations. Students will create an integrated, interactive multimedia presentation using the basic concepts and principles of multimedia and graphic design. IM2470 Interactive Motion Graphics Prerequisite: IM1480 Fundamentals of Interactive Design n Web Design & Development Diploma and the Web Design & Interactive Media (AAS, BS) An advanced course that applies motion graphics as an integrated interactive solution; students will script interaction, sequencing, and motion for interactive projects. Optimization is a critical consideration in the creation of the user-centered experience. 93

IM2480 Digital Video Production Prerequisite: CA2430 Introduction to Video Students will demonstrate knowledge of editing using non-linear editing software and hardware in a computer lab. Students will produce and edit video and audio using digital desktop video techniques. IM2490 Interactive Motion Scripting Prerequisite: IM2470 Interactive Motion Graphics An advanced course that applies motion graphics as an integrated interactive solution. Students will script interaction, sequencing, and motion for interactive projects. Optimization is critical consideration in the creation of the user-centered experience. IM3411 Writing for Interactive Design This is a specialized writing course for interactive design. Students will learn the unique characteristics and techniques of media writing and apply them to interactive media production. Students will also learn to conduct research for media writing projects. IM3420 Advanced Scripting Languages ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in WDIM. Prerequisite: IM2420 Fundamentals of Scripting Languages in Web Design & Development Diploma and the Web Design & Interactive Media (AAS, BS) Students will refine dynamic scripting skills to develop complex interactivity and applications (applets). The course also examines client-side forms in conjunction with server-side scripting applications. IM3460 Intermediate Authoring Prerequisite: IM2460 Introduction to Authoring This course will build on the skills taught in the Introduction to Authoring class. Students will design production quality interactive presentations using intermediate-level scripting techniques focusing on good user interface design and usability. IM4420 Dynamic Web Applications ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in WDIM. Prerequisite: IM3420 Advanced Scripting Languages Students apply user-centered design principles, database structures and server side scripting to design and develop content for server-based dynamic delivery. Attention will be paid to design issues relating to the display of dynamic content on the screen and how that dynamic content will be delivered. IM4440 Usability Evaluation This course introduces students to concepts and techniques used in usability evaluation. Through theories presented in the course, students learn ways to research, design, implement, and analyze evaluation of interactive projects. IM4470 E-Learning Design & Applications Prerequisite: IM2420 Fundamentals of Scripting Languages in Web Design & Development Diploma and the Web Design & Interactive Media (AAS, BS) This course will introduce students to the principles of instructional design as applied to e-learning. The course introduces different options for authoring tools, principles of effective design, instructional analysis, and production of e-learning materials. Students design, build, evaluate, and revise instructional applications using industry standard authoring systems. IM4480 Web Design & Interactive Media Production Team Prerequisites: IM3420 Advanced Scripting Languages and IM2490 Interactive Motion Scripting This course focuses on the interactive design project management process. The development of the project team as key to the successful achievement of interactive design project goals is stressed. The process examines the main elements required in every proposal/plan, time frame, and budget. The course also examines issues of copyright and intellectual property as they relate to project implementation. IM4490 Special Topics in Web Design & Interactive Media Prerequisites: IM2490 Interactive Motion Scripting and IM3420 Advanced Scripting Languages and IM2460 Introduction to Authoring Topics are based upon important trends and developments in Web Design & Interactive Media. Lectures, demonstrations, or research reports pertaining to areas of interest in Web Design & Interactive Media are presented by resident faculty, expert visitors, and working professionals. Group projects may also be assigned. Study and discussion of computer hardware, operating systems, networking, programming languages, interactive digital media, streaming media, entrepreneurship, marketing, workgroup organization, and the interactive industry. INTB101 Architectural Drafting ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in ID. This course is an introduction to the basic drafting techniques, terminology, and symbols used on drawings, including use of drafting equipment, lettering, plan and elevation construction with an emphasis on proper line weight, quality, and scale. INTB102 Introduction to Interior Design Students are introduced to the responsibilities of today s interior design professional. Assignments require the application of the elements and principles of design for interior spaces to create aesthetic solutions. Basic lessons in ergonomics, space planning, and human factors introduce the skills used to make functional and purposeful design decisions. INTB103 Computer Aided Drafting I** ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in ID. Prerequisite: INTB101 Architectural Drafting This course is an introduction to the principles and operation of computeraided drafting to produce floor plans, elevations and other components of construction drawings. 94

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA INTB105 Sketching & Ideation Prerequisite: FND120 Perspective Drawing Students visually conceptualize design solutions through rapid sketching in this course. INTB107 History of Architecture, Interiors & Furniture I This course covers the evolution of architecture, interiors, furniture, and design from the ancient world to the mid 19th Century. The cultural, political, social, and/or economic conditions of the times are included. INTB111 Space Planning Prerequisite: INTB101 Architectural Drafting This course begins the design series by introducing the interior design process including programming, schematics, design development, space planning and alternate design solutions. INTB112 Design Basics 3D Prerequisite: INTB101 Architectural Drafting This course explores the basic elements and principles of three-dimensional design. Students will use traditional and/ or digital tools to help them visualize their designs volumetrically and apply 3D design elements to the spatial envelope. INTB201 Textiles, Materials & Specifications This course explores materials and finishes utilized in interior applications through lecture, demonstrations, and/or field trips. Various methods of specification and estimation are covered. Students research and assess performance criteria including aesthetics, function, and environmental factors. INTB202 Presentation Techniques Prerequisite: INTB103 Computer Aided Drafting I This course explores alternate methods of creating and producing interior design presentations. Combining a variety of software, reproduction methods, and digital rendering techniques, students explore ways to manipulate images into a cohesive graphic presentation. INTB203 Computer Aided Drafting II** ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in ID. Prerequisite: INTB103 Computer Aided Drafting I Students will enhance their CAD skills while increasing their speed and problem solving capabilities. Students will gain proficiency in computer-assisted drafting through progressively complex applications. INTB207 History of Architecture, Interiors & Furniture II This course covers the development of architecture, interiors, furniture, and design from the Industrial Revolution to the present. The cultural, political, social, and/or economic conditions of the times are included. Assignments provide opportunities to recognize how the styles of the past continue to influence design today. INTB211 Codes & Regulations This course studies the principles, policies, and practices required by regulatory bodies and jurisdictions having authority over interior construction building, fire codes and ADA regulations as they apply to interior design projects. INTB212 Residential Design I Prerequisite: INTB11 Space Planning This course explores the design of residential interiors as a problem solving process, with applications to a variety of residential interiors. Areas of study include concept development, human factors, programming and space planning, color, furniture and finish selection as well as concepts of universal design and sustainability. INTB232 Lighting Design Prerequisite: INTB111 Space Planning This course covers a comprehensive study of the various natural and artificial lighting techniques as they apply to interior environments. INTB262 Construction Documents Prerequisite: INTB203 Computer Aided Drafting II This course explores the contract document process for interior spaces. Students produce an advanced set of design drawings to support their senior studio. INTB302 Residential Design II Prerequisite: INTB212 Residential Design I This course is the design and presentation of a complex residential project with an emphasis on historic precedent. INTB306 Professional Practice Prerequisite: Approval of the Academic Director This course presents the principles governing the business, legal, and contractual aspects of the interior design profession. INTB313 Digital Modeling Prerequisite: INTB202 Presentation Techniques This course introduces students to 3D modeling software as a communication tool. Students produce design solutions volumetrically as part of the design process. Students will also apply camera and lighting techniques as they apply to interior environments. INTB322 Interior Detailing & Building Systems Prerequisite: INTB203 Computer Aided Drafting II This course is a study of the materials, principles and sustainable concepts utilized in basic construction, building, and mechanical systems for interiors. 95

INTB332 Environmental & Sustainable Design Prerequisite: INTB211 Codes & Regulations This course covers the principles and practices of sustainable and environmental design as applied to a design project. INTB342 Commercial Design Prerequisite: INTB211 Codes & Regulations This course is the design and presentation of a complex commercial project with emphasis on universal and barrier free design as well as the workplace environment. INTB352 Hospitality Design Prerequisite: INTB342 Commercial Design This course is the design and presentation of team-based hospitality project with emphasis on innovation and creativity. INTB402 Senior Studio I Prerequisite: INTB306 Professional Practice Students select a subject based on their individual career aspirations and develop a project of a substantial scope. Emphasis is on real-world needs that could be better met through more responsible interior design and architecture. Content includes problem identification, analysis of user needs, observation and information gathering. Ultimately a design program and schematic solution are prepared that will be further developed into a complete design solution in Senior Studio II for an interior environment that will better support the psychological and physiological health, safety and welfare of the public. INTB406 Internship Prerequisite: Approval of the Academic Director Through a field internship experience, students will be able to apply their skills in a real and practical situation. The main objectives of the internship are to allow students the opportunity to observe and participate in the operation of successful businesses related to their fields of study. The students will gain the experience they need to enter the field when they graduate. INTB409 Portfolio Prerequisite: Approval of the Academic Director This course prepares students for the transition to the professional world. This course will prepare students for the industry by helping them compile a portfolio. Students will demonstrate their conceptual, design, craftsmanship, and other skills as they assemble and refine their portfolio projects. Working individually with an instructor, each student will select representative projects showcasing work that reflects a unique style and developing them further as needed. Particular emphasis is placed on identifying short- and long-term professional employment goals, industry and professional related resources and portfolio development strategies. INTB412 Institutional Design Prerequisite: INTB342 Commercial Design This course is the design and presentation of an Institutional Project with emphasis on anthropometrics, human factors, and human behavior. INTB422 Senior Studio II Prerequisite: INTB402 Senior Studio I In this culminating studio course, students continue the development of a viable solution for the project initiated in Senior Studio I. Skills from the entire program are leveraged into a final portfolio project motivated by environmentally sound, cost-effective and responsible design practices. PA095 College Success 0 credit This course is designed to help incoming students make a successful transition to the academic, cultural and social climate of The Art Institutes International Minnesota. Highlights of the course include a focus on the necessary survival skills for academic and personal growth and development. PA3411 Capstone/Portfolio 2 credits Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director Through competencies developed with previous related studies course work, students will develop a business plan for a minimum one hundred seat restaurant. The project will include: Market Analysis and Marketing Strategy, Operating Budget, Sales Projections, Opening Inventories, Capital Equipment, Standardized Recipes and Costing for all standardized recipes, Menu, and Facilities Design. The course covers the components of a business plan as well as techniques for developing and presenting sections of the plan. Business related competencies are reviewed and tutored as necessary for completion of the project. PA3415 Management Internship Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director In this course, the student serves as a management intern at a food service facility. The student learns hands-on duties that managers perform on a day-to-day basis. Interviewing, hiring, employee relations and discipline, scheduling, and team building are possible duties to be performed. The student should also practice good customer relations and may be involved in marketing and promotion. The student may also be required to participate in cash handling, inventory, or other duties that the host site may require. 96

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA PA4416 HM Management Internship 16 credits Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director The purpose of the 16 credit Hospitality Management Internship is to provide students with comprehensive immersion in a selected Hospitality Operation. Students will spend one full quarter observing and interacting with management at the selected property. Interns will be expected to become involved with all aspects of managing a Hospitality operation, including human resource functions, scheduling, financial analysis, supervision and leadership modeling. Interns will be expected to work closely with the management of the internship site in preparation for their careers in the industry. Interns will become involved in every department and aspect of the operation, specifically with a management orientation that will provide detailed information by department and an overall coordinated vision. PA4483 Digital Portfolio ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in MAA and VFX. Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director The objectives of this course are to complete the digital portion of the student s portfolio, to assess its strengths and weaknesses, to correct those weaknesses and augment the students strengths, and to produce a professional-level demo tape. This course will also stress the importance of professional development and help the student obtain the necessary completion of the initial job search requirements. PA4484 Portfolio Presentation ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in MAA. Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director In this course, students will assemble and enhance the print portion of their animation portfolio, as well as sharpen their job seeking skills. PA4485 Portfolio Preparation ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in GD and WDIM. Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director This course will prepare students for job interviews by helping them compile a portfolio. Students will demonstrate their conceptual design, craftsmanship, and other skills as they assemble and refine their portfolio pieces. Each student will select representative pieces, showcasing work that reflects a unique style. Particular emphasis is placed on identifying short and long-term professional employment goals, as well as related strategies and resources. PA4486 Internship Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director Through a field internship experience, students will be able to apply acquired subject matter and career/professional skills in a real and practical situation. The main objectives of the internship are to allow students the opportunity to observe and participate in the operation of successful business related to their fields of study. Students will gain the experience they need to enter the field when they graduate. PA4487 Portfolio ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in WDIM. Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director This course focuses on the completion of the portfolio and enables students to begin their job search. Students should come into this course with work for the portfolio already begun. During the term, students will determine the quality of their work so that enhancements may be made. In addition, they will complete a professional resume and begin the job search. PH1401 Principles of Photography ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in PH. In this foundation course, students examine the essential tools, materials, and techniques of photography. The student will learn to use the camera, film processing, composition, print finishing, and basic darkroom printing. The student will be challenged to investigate the photographic medium and consider its role in image making. PH1402 Principles of Digital Photography This course introduces students to the fundamental terminology, concepts, and techniques of digital image acquisition, image archiving, manipulation, and output. This course focuses on the principles of using color, composition, lighting and other techniques for overall thematic and visual effects of photographic images. PH1410 History and Survey of Photography This course will provide a framework for critically considering significant photographers and their work. Students will be expected to describe, interpret, and evaluate the origins, stylistic changes, and artistic innovations in the history of photography from the 19th Century through contemporary times. PH1413 Fundamentals of Lighting ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in PH/DIM. Prerequisite: PH1401 Principles of Photography (PH1402 Principles of Digital Photography for DIM students) In this introduction to the essential concepts of lighting for photography, students explore the manipulation of quantity, quality, direction, contrast, and color of both natural and artificial lighting. The course covers equipment and processes required to produce professional image quality in the studio and on location. PH1450 Photographic Design Prerequisite: PH1401 Principles of Photography (PH1402 Principles of Digital Photography for DIM students) In this course, students experience primary design elements of visual communication as they apply to the photograph. Topics include image composition, color theory, lighting theory and the art of the critique. 97

PH1470 Large Format Photography Prerequisite: PH1413 Fundamentals of Lighting Working individually and in teams, students will utilize large format cameras both in the studio and on location, working with various light sources. This course offers essential experience with the large format or view camera. Topics include sheet film, film holders, exposure and process control, and the management of perspective and focus with the movements that are unique to the view camera. PH2413 Advanced Lighting Prerequisite: PH1413 Fundamentals of Lighting This course expands on the PH1413 Fundamentals of Lighting, with an emphasis on lighting for products and people in both the studio and on location. The necessary and correct utilization of electronic flash and lighting tools in the studio and on location is covered. Emphasis is placed on the imaginative application of lighting technique and style. PH2451 Digital Photographic Production ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in PH/DIM. Prerequisite: PH1413 Fundamentals of Lighting In this introduction to digital photo production, students become acquainted with the concepts, hardware, and software related to digital image acquisition, manipulation, and output, including scanning, masking, layering, retouching, and printing. PH2454 Photographic Language and Culture Prerequisites: PH1410 History and Survey of Photography and PH1450 Photographic Design This course will address issues in aesthetics related to art, photography, cinema and writing within the context of contemporary society and culture. Emphasis will be placed on the surveying and contextualization of contemporary photographic practices and examples using current research technology. PH2460 Digital Darkroom Prerequisite: PH2451 Digital Photographic Production Emphasis will be placed on those digital techniques that correspond to traditional darkroom processes. The course will address issues related to color theory, resolution, contrast and density controls and the production of photo quality digital prints from scanned film and direct digital captures. PH2470 Editorial Photography Prerequisite: PH2413 Advanced Lighting Students will produce assignments related to photojournalism, location, and editorial photography. Emphasis is placed on digital technologies and formal assignment presentation. The class is devoted to subject research and creative photography in both fine art and commercial applications. PH2476 Multimedia for Photographers Prerequisites: PH2470 Editorial Photography and CA2430 Introduction to Video This course will introduce students to the technical components integral to multimedia design and its relationship to photography. Students will expand their knowledge of capturing, downloading, editing, and outputting digital audio and image files using multimedia software to produce effective and compelling presentations. Through these skills, students will explore the relationships between time, sound, and still photographs. In addition to a demonstrated understanding of using multimedia as a platform to present photographic work, students will also explore its use as a marketing tool and will develop an understanding of its integration with current web technology. PH2478 Location Photography Prerequisite: PH2470 Editorial Photography This course explores the special needs of location photography, including both the technical and logistical aspects of location work. Students are challenged with a variety of assignments related to fashion, portraiture, product, stock, and architectural photography PH3400 The Business of Photography This course reviews considerations faced by photographers when establishing and managing a studio operation. Topics include recruitment, appraisal, and delegation to a studio staff; negotiating with clients and talent; and the management of large productions. Students must use business management software to estimate costs for photographic work and manage a studio budget. PH3410 Photographic Essays and Visual Narratives Prerequisite: PH2470 Editorial Photography or PH2478 Location Photography This course addresses photography as a narrative or illustrative medium used in support of the text content of publications. Students are required to produce their own renditions of picture stories, illustrations, magazine covers, and page layouts for all types of print media. PH3413 Photographic Studio Prerequisite: PH2413 Advanced Lighting Students will develop the ability to solve problems of visual communication through assignments designed to challenge their skills in lighting, camera operation, and commercial interpretation. All aspects of studio photography are discussed from lenses to lighting and people to products. PH4410 Specialization ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in PH. Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director In this course, the student elects to specialize in one or more of the major fields of photography, including photographic illustration, industrial, editorial, photojournalism, landscape/nature, commercial and portraiture. Advanced application, marketing and preparation of portfolio for employment are stressed. 98

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA PHOB101 Principles of Photography ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in PH. Students will identify basic photographic tools and their intended purposes, including the proper use of aperture, shutter speed, ISO, focal length, and light metering. Students will analyze photographs and produce their own visually compelling images by employing professional photographic techniques and digital workflow. PHOB102 Introduction to Photography Applications Introduces the student to an overview of vector, raster, and time-based software tools used in the digital media industry. It sets expectations for future classes regarding standards for files, their construction and delivery within the classroom and professional studio. PHOB103 Digital Image Management Introduces digital photographic workflow and asset management. Students become acquainted with the terms, concepts and processes of photographic editing. Areas of instruction include image acquisition, management, global and local adjustments and modes for output. PHOB105 Photojournalism Addresses the photography as a narrative or illustrative medium used in support of the text content of publications. Students are shown examples of photojournalism and will be required to produce their own renditions. PHOB112 Photographic Design Prerequisite: PHOB101 Principles of Photography Students demonstrate their ability to define and solve advanced design problems. Students will analyze the characteristics and purposes of various problems and then offer clear and creative solutions for each. The students are expected to communicate ideas using symbolism appropriately. PHOB113 Lighting Prerequisite: PHOB101 Principles of Photography Students will be introduced to the basic concepts and principles of lighting for photography. Fundamentals of recognizing and controlling both natural and studio lighting with emphasis on the quality, quantity, and direction and its effect on the photographic image. PHOB115 History of Photography Prerequisite: GE1410 English I The history of photography through the discussion of recognized photographers and their influences on society and provides a framework for critically considering photographs through describing, interpreting, evaluating and theorizing. Students are expected to write papers and review exhibitions. PHOB122 View Camera Theory Prerequisite: PHOB113 Lighting Students will learn the operational principles, concepts and theories related to the view camera. In this course, students will explore the technical and visual context for view camera related equipment, consider the potential within their own work and examine the history of images produced with the view camera or associated tools. PHOB123 Color Management & Printing Prerequisite: FND135 Image Manipulation Students learn and apply the techniques of digital color management including building and applying color profiles. The course covers the calibration of devices to produce consistent, predictable color. Students will refine printing skills and theory to create a benchmark for quality digital output. Students will develop proficiencies in file preparation, resolution selection, print-profiling, paper selection and soft-proofing techniques. PHOB202 Studio Photography Prerequisite: PHOB122 View Camera Theory or Approval of Academic Director Students will develop the ability to solve visual communication problems through assignments designed to challenge their skills in lighting, camera operation, and commercial applications. All aspects of studio photography are discussed from lenses to lighting and people to products. This course emphasizes in-camera image production and problem solving. PHOB203 Photographic Post-Production Students research, develop concepts, and execute digital montage methods to produce creative and surrealistic imagery not possible in the camera moment. Students will apply channels, masks, blending modes, vector tools, selections, filters and layers to photographs. In addition the course will cover post-production techniques, including retouching and compositing. PHOB205 Advertising / Art Direction Prerequisite: PHOB223 Advanced Lighting Students will learn photographic techniques directed toward contemporary advertising. In this production-driven class students will explore various client scenarios to produce studio and on-location images. PHOB208 Business of Photography An overview of current trends and an assessment of the skills and materials necessary for a student to comprehend small business operations and/or make themselves a productive member of a commercially viable team. 99

PHOB209 Portfolio I Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director This course prepares students for the transition to the professional world. This course will prepare students for the industry by helping them compile a portfolio. Students will demonstrate their conceptual, design, craftsmanship, and other skills as they assemble and refine their portfolio projects. Working individually with an instructor, each student will select representative projects showcasing work that reflects a unique style and developing them further as needed. Particular emphasis is placed on identifying short- and long-term professional employment goals, industry and professional related resources and portfolio development strategies. PHOB213 Time-Based Media I Prerequisite: PHOB102 Introduction to Photography Applications Introduces students to the technical components integral to timebased media and its relationship to photography. Students expand their knowledge of capturing, downloading, editing, and outputting digital audio and image files using time based media software. PHOB222 Web Design for Non-Majors Prerequisite: PHOB102 Introduction to Photography Applications Introduces some of the techniques, tools, software applications, and technologies associated with web development and interactive design for web. Students learn how to build a basic website using current HTML standards while incorporating an objectoriented programming language, various multimedia, or other interactive solutions. PHOB223 Advanced Lighting Prerequisite: PHOB202 Studio Photography Synthesizes previously introduced lighting skills for products and people in both the studio and on location. Emphasis is placed on the creative application of lighting technique and style. PHOB232 Portraiture Prerequisite: PHOB202 Studio Photography Students learn basic portrait techniques applicable to general portraiture and consumer, corporate, advertising, and editorial photography. Emphasis is placed on creating the visual narrative through the effective use of portraiture techniques. PHOB233 Advanced Photographic Post-Production Prerequisite: PHOB203 Photographic Post-Production Students continue to develop and refine concepts to create images using advanced digital montage methods. Through planning and research students will apply advanced compositing techniques in order to create a series of digital illustrations exemplary of contemporary creative photography. PHOB242 Editorial Photography Prerequisite: PHOB223 - Advanced Lighting or Approval of Academic Director Editorial photography is an exploration of the non-fiction narrative delivered through a variety of media. The class is devoted to subject research and creative photography. Emphasis is placed on storytelling, the production process and contemporary media output methods. PHOB302 Location Photography Prerequisite: PHOB223 Advanced Lighting Explores the special needs of location photography. The tools and logistics of shooting on location are covered. Students develop photographic problem solving skills. PHOB303 Time-Based Media II Prerequisite: PHOB213 Time-Based Media I Focuses on conceptual development, visual communication and storytelling through the use of time-based media. PHOB307 Photographic Essay Prerequisite: PHOB303 Time-Based Media II Students will develop an extended photographic narrative. Students produce a set of imagery that conveys a story or idea that has written narrative support. Photographs will be analyzed not only for their stand-alone creative content, but also for their ability to introduce transition and conclude an essay with maximum visual effect. Multiple delivery platforms are considered. PHOB317 Photography Criticism Prerequisite: PHOB115 History of Photography Offers an in depth study into photographic criticism. To assist students in developing a vocabulary for critically analyzing photographs, they will look carefully at contemporary critical thought. Further study will examine how personal beliefs and cultural values are expressed and represented in photography. PHOB408 Photography Marketing & Portfolio Package Prerequisite: PHOB209 Portfolio I Students will finalize a complete selfpromotional and marketing package incorporating the knowledge acquired during the program. The developed materials will target a specific market in alignment with their career goals. PHOB419 Portfolio II Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director This course aims to prepare students for entry-level employment within the industry by assisting them with the development and presentation of a graphic design portfolio that reflects the stated exit competencies. Students will demonstrate an advanced skill-set in areas as process, conceptual thinking, design, web design, craftsmanship, and other skills, as projects are refined and assembled into a cohesive, comprehensive body of work. Particular emphasis will be placed on identifying short- and long-term professional employment goals, industry and professional related resources and standards, portfolio development and presentation strategies. 100

SM1401 Studio Major I Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director The student declares a primary studio concentration and track from a design discipline offered at the college in consultation with their advisor. Primary concentration tracks include 8 courses, of which 4 are in the upper division. SM1402 Studio Major II Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director The student declares a primary studio concentration and track from a design discipline offered at the college in consultation with their advisor. Primary concentration tracks include 8 courses, of which 4 are in the upper division. SM2403 Studio Major III Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director The student declares a primary studio concentration and track from a design discipline offered at the college in consultation with their advisor. Primary concentration tracks include 8 courses, of which 4 are in the upper division. SM2404 Studio Major IV Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director The student declares a primary studio concentration and track from a design discipline offered at the college in consultation with their advisor. Primary concentration tracks include 8 courses, of which 4 are in the upper division. SM3405 Studio Major V Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director The student declares a primary studio concentration and track from a design discipline offered at the college in consultation with their advisor. Primary concentration tracks include 8 courses, of which 4 are in the upper division. SM3406 Studio Major VI Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director The student declares a primary studio concentration and track from a design discipline offered at the college in consultation with their advisor. Primary concentration tracks include 8 courses, of which 4 are in the upper division. SM4407 Studio Major VII Prerequisite: Approval of Academic Director The student declares a primary studio concentration and track from a design discipline offered at the college in consultation with their advisor. Primary concentration tracks include 8 courses, of which 4 are in the upper division. SM4408 Studio Major VIII Prerequisite: may vary based on specific courses The student declares a primary studio concentration and track from a design discipline offered at the college in consultation with their advisor. Primary concentration tracks include 8 courses, of which 4 are in the upper division. TS094 Transitional Studies: English ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass for all programs. This course emphasizes the skills needed to produce clear, competent English prose. Coursework concentrates on basic paragraph writing with its attendant skills: various sentence structure, spelling, subject/verb agreement, punctuation, and correct verb tense. (Course is required for students with an Accuplacer Sentence Skills placement score of less than 87). VE1409 History and Trends in Visual Effects This course provides an overview of the visual effects industry, with an emphasis on traditional techniques and their historical context. This survey class also explores major trends in the visual effects industry, and identifies career opportunities in the field. THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA VE1438 Computer Graphics ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in VFX. This course will explore the history, psychology, and artistic interpretation of typography and digital design elements. Focus will be upon systematic application of typographic elements to enhance readability and visibility as well as communications for video, digital publishing, computer animation, and broadcast graphics. Desktop publishing activities will include the integration of computers and vector-based drawing programs. VE1457 Conceptual Storytelling The course is an introduction to storytelling and the components of story. The goal is to develop storytelling skills, and an understanding of story form. Students will examine story art through story structure, character and composition. Students will be presented with the tools, techniques, and understandings of what stories are and how they work. The course will comprise reading, writing, and discussion about traditional storytelling as well as the impact of technology and interactivity on storytelling. Students will learn to craft, analyze and critique stories while working with the tools necessary to present material in digital format. VE2450 Maps, Mattes, and Masks Prerequisite: CA2429 Introduction to 3D Modeling This course continues the development of digital imaging skills, with an emphasis on advanced techniques in masking, maps, channels, and compositing. VE2453 Introduction to VFX ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in VFX. Prerequisite: CA2430 Introduction to Video This course will explore basic color theory and the various techniques of digital compositing. Emphasis will be placed on combining separately shot pieces of live action footage to create a seamless finished shot. 101

102 VE2467 Production Design Prerequisite: VE1457 Conceptual Storytelling This course explores the production designer s role of interpreting a screenplay (or similar work), and then combining reality and imagination to create visual elements that reinforce the screenplay s narrative and aesthetic requirements. Students will consider both the explicit and underlying meanings in a scene, and then employ set and effects design to reinforce these ideas. VE2481 Interactive Visual Design Students learn about interactive computer programs that combine animation with facilities for integrating text, sound, images, and fill-motion video into interactive products. This course allows students to explore the role of 2D and 3D animation in the production of interactive products. VE2486 Broadcast Graphics Prerequisites: VE1438 Computer Graphics and GD1403 Typography for Digital Media This course introduces techniques in type design and animation using compositing software. Emphasis is on design, storytelling and technical precision. VE3453 Intermediate VFX ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in VFX. Prerequisite: VE2453 Introduction to VFX and VE2450 Maps, Mattes, and Masks Utilizing various painting and compositing packages students will learn the principles of rotoscoping and digital painting, as applied to rig removal and special effects. Students will also build upon the principles in previous classes towards the creation of more advanced live action composites. VE3457 Post-Production Management Students will learn to manage the production process. They will develop skill in managing clients and personnel. Students will discover the critical nature of preplanning and organization. Course will explore the various technical and artist issues that affect a project. Students will understand the financial implications of project management. Skill will be developed in establishing timelines and deadlines. VE3465 Digital Cinematography for VFX Prerequisite: VE3453 Intermediate VFX This course will prepare students for on-set supervisory roles in the visual effects industry. By utilizing a complete survey of lighting conditions and physical set measurements, students will acquire the necessary data to incorporate 3D elements into live action plates. VE3477 3D Effects Prerequisite: CA3449 Intermediate 3D Modeling Within a 3D environment, students will use dynamic simulation, particle systems, and rigid bodies to create a variety of convincing effects, including natural phenomena. This course will build a foundation for students to create complex, dynamic effects, integrated into live action footage. VE3486 Intermediate Broadcast Graphics ; **This course requires a C or higher to pass in VFX. Prerequisite: VE2486 Broadcast Graphics This course will expose students to the disciplines used in finalizing a video or animation project using compositing software. The class will reinforce compositing concepts, techniques, and vocabulary that students have learned in previous classes. More sophisticated tools and techniques will be introduced. Each student should produce a final edited project utilizing these skills. VE3490 Advanced Editing Principles Prerequisite: CA2440 Digital Video Editing Advanced editing gives students the opportunity to refine knowledge and skill learned in the introductory and intermediate editing courses. The main focus of advanced editing is applying shot relations and transitions by creating a short video from original idea to edited master. Students explore shot relationships temporally, graphically, spatially, and rhythmically. VE4463 Advanced VFX I Prerequisite: VE3465 Digital Cinematography for VFX This course will continue to explore the disciplines used in creating and compositing video shot on a blue or green screen. More sophisticated methods will be introduced for color correcting and adjusting video to produce seamless composites. The class will reinforce compositing concepts, techniques, and vocabulary that students have learned in previous classes. The concepts of background replacement and the use of miniatures in visual effects will also be introduced.

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Notes VE4467 Production Studio I Prerequisite: VE3465 Digital Cinematography for VFX Students will build upon foundation skills in broadcast design and visual effects by simulating a real-world production environment. Emphasis will be placed on the competitive and collaborative aspects of production, as well as various professional methods, procedures, techniques, skills, resources, and equipment. VE4473 Advanced VFX II Prerequisite: VE4463 Advanced VFX I In this course, the further exploration of 3D tracking and matchmoving concepts will be emphasized to create more complex interaction between 3D elements and live action footage. Advanced 3D lighting systems will be introduced to produce photorealistic composites. VE4486 Advanced Broadcast Graphics Prerequisite: VE3486 Intermediate Broadcast Graphics This course will expose students to more advanced compositing techniques. The class will reinforce compositing concepts, techniques, and vocabulary that students have learned in previous classes. More sophisticated tools and techniques will be introduced. The class will focus mainly on group-oriented projects. Each student will have a vital role in producing a group project involving, animation, live action video, editing, and compositing for a final portfolio piece. 103

104

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA General Information & Policies CAMPUS VISIT Prospective students are encouraged to visit The Art Institutes International Minnesota ( The Art Institute ), although a visit is not a condition for submitting the Application for Admission and the Enrollment Agreement. Arrangements for an interview and tour of the campus may be made by contacting: OFFICE OF ADMISSIONS The Art Institutes International Minnesota 15 South 9th Street Minneapolis, Minnesota 55402 612-332-3361 OR TOLL-FREE: 1-800-777-3643 ADMISSIONS REQUIREMENTS All applicants are admitted into The Art Institutes International Minnesota based on the following criteria: An official copy of high school transcripts from an accredited educational institution including proof of graduation or a GED certificate An entry essay with a minimum of 150 words. A minimum high school GPA of 1.5 or a GED certificate including proof of graduation if an applicant is applying for an Associate s program. A minimum high school GPA of 2.0 or a GED certificate including proof of graduation if an applicant is applying for a Bachelor s program (not including Audio Production). Students that come from a school with no GPA (i.e. pass/fail system or portfolio grading system) must have a letter from a Registrar, Principal, Vice Principal or Superintendent from the Academic Institution or School Board indicating the applicant has met the high school graduation requirements and explanation of the grading system. Students applying for Diploma programs in Fashion Retailing, Digital Image Management, Web Design & Development, and Web Design & Interactive Communication may demonstrate preparedness by either college transcripts showing relevant coursework or portfolio, and a program-specific essay of 250 words. The following will also be considered: Portfolio, or body of work in their program of interest, successful completion of placement exam, norm referenced exams like the ACT, and successful completion of post secondary education. High school seniors who have not yet graduated must submit a partial transcript that indicates their expected graduation date. Students who have completed high school or its equivalent, yet cannot provide the necessary documentation, may provide alternate documentation to satisfy this requirement. The Art Institutes International Minnesota President or designee must approve all exceptions. A student may submit proof of any post-secondary degree from an accredited post-secondary institution to satisfy the high school or GED requirement. All applications will be reviewed for completeness and eligibility. If applicants do not meet the minimum requirements for the program for which they are applying, their applications will be reviewed by the Admissions Committee. A minimum high school GPA of 2.5 if an applicant is applying for an a Bachelor s degree in Audio Production or a GED certificate with an average score of 450 based on the new GED or a 4.5 based on the old GED scoring. 105

THE ART INSTITUTE OF MINNESOTA General Information & Policies (CONTINUED) 106 CULINARY STANDARDS I. Purpose or Scope The culinary profession requires skills and abilities in the classroom and kitchen settings. As such, guidelines for students are necessary to provide appropriate expectations. Industry and kitchen standards introduced and reinforced throughout the curriculum are essential for student s success in the classroom and the industry. Abiding by local health codes is essential for safety and sanitation in the kitchen. The Art Institute is committed to equal opportunity in its culinary programs and does not discriminate on the basis of disability (or any other reason) and will make reasonable accommodations to a qualified student to enable the student to participate in culinary programs, provided that the accommodation does not jeopardize safety, pose an undue hardship, or materially alter the academic integrity of the program. II. Policy Provisions To participate in any program in The International Culinary Schools at The Art Institute, each student, with or without reasonable accommodations, must be able to safely and effectively: Attend and participate in both day and night shift (including first and fourth shifts) classes Communicate in person with co-workers, students and guests and process written and verbal instructions Attend and participate in laboratory and production classes of up to 6 hours in length Regularly lift and transport food and other culinary product, equipment, small wares and utensils weighing up to 40 pounds Regularly lift and transport trays with hot and cold plated foods, small wares and other items, and serve and clear tables where guests are seated Pour and serve liquids and beverages, including hot liquids up to temperatures of 180-185 degrees Fahrenheit (82.2 85 degrees Celsius) Use knives and other commercial cooking utensils Perform repetitive motion skills required in the kitchen and the food industry, such as whisking, dicing, or piping Handle and cook different varieties of fish, seafood, beef, pork, chicken, lamb, venison, or other meats, vegetables, and fruit products Handle and bake/cook using different flours including all grains as well as chocolate, fruits, and nuts Operate commercial cooking and food service equipment Stand or maneuver in professional or commercial kitchens, dining rooms and related facilities for up to 2 hours Sit on a kitchen stool or at a classroom desk for up to 50 minutes Visually assess, and evaluate the taste, appearance, texture and aroma of food and beverage products Use commercial cleaning and sanitizing equipment and materials Produce food products within the time parameters designated by a course objective within a class or for a hands-on cooking or baking practical The foregoing technical standards are essential to the programs of instruction in The International Culinary Schools at The Art Institute and also reflect industry requirements and standards. ENROLLMENT PROCEDURE An application for admission must be completed and signed by the applicant and submitted to The Art Institutes International Minnesota with a $50 application fee. As part of the application, the applicant is required to independently conceive and write an essay of approximately 150 words stating how his/her education at The Art Institutes International Minnesota will help attain his/her career goals. The Art Institutes International Minnesota also requires a high school transcript or GED scores. A student may submit proof of a degree from any accredited post-secondary school to satisfy the high school or GED requirement. Applicants must submit

a completed enrollment agreement and are assessed a $100 enrollment fee which is due within 10 days of submitting an application. Applicants not accepted for admission will receive a full refund of all fees paid. Each school quarter is typically 11 weeks. The quarterly tuition and fees charged are subject to adjustment annually. Students are given a notice of 90 days in the event of an adjustment. The starting kit is optional and consists of basic equipment, first-quarter textbooks and materials required for beginning each program. A list of the components of the starting kit is provided to each enrolled student. These materials may be purchased at The Art Institute or at most supply stores. The Art Institutes International Minnesota reserves the right to schedule or reschedule classes to accommodate classroom and facility usage. INTERNATIONAL ADMISSIONS POLICY All non-u.s. citizen or lawful permanent resident (LPR) Students must meet the same admissions standards as all other students when seeking to enroll in the Art Institute. Please refer to Admissions Requirements. Those international students applying to SEVP-certified schools and requiring the school s sponsorship for international student visa status (Form I-20) must meet the additional requirements listed below. the Institute requires nonimmigrant students present in Visa Waiver, B-1, B-2, F-2, and M-2 status to change visa to F-1 or other qualifying status prior to enrolling in programs of study (other than avocational or recreational courses). Please note that some programs may not be eligible for international students requiring Form I-20 sponsorship. Please ask to speak with the Art Institute s International Admissions Representative for more detail. ENGLISH LANGUAGE PROFICIENCY POLICY As the lectures, seminars, materials, and discourse which comprise programs of study at the The Art Institute are presented in English, the Art Institute requires that all students possess and demonstrate a minimum level of English language proficiency required to substantially benefit from the programs offered. A student is deemed proficient in the English language if he or she: Holds a U.S. high school diploma or U.S. General Equivalency Diploma (GED) or international high school diploma, e.g., U.S. military base, business/diplomat expat community, etc., in which instruction is delivered primarily in English Holds the equivalent (evidenced by credential evaluation) of a U.S. high school diploma from overseas institution in which instruction is delivered primarily in English Completes (with passing grades in all courses) a minimum of two (2) academic terms at a regionally or nationally accredited U.S. post-secondary institution in which instruction is delivered primarily in English Completes (with passing grades in all courses) English 101 and 102 at a regionally or nationally accredited U.S. post-secondary Institution in which instruction is delivered primarily in English Presents acceptable English Language Proficiency test scores meeting the minimum required levels set forth below. Minimum Acceptable Proof of English Language Proficiency Standards ELP TEST DIPLOMA ASSOCIATE/ BACHELOR Please contact an International Student Admissions Representative for questions about acceptable alternative measures of English Language Proficiency. GRADUATE TOEFL PAPER 480 500 550 TOEFL i-bt 54-55 61 79-80 IELTS Level 5.5 Level 6.0 Level 6.5 American College 17 19 21 Testing (ACT) English EF International C1 C1 C2 Language Schools ELS Language Schools 108 109 112 itep 4.0 4.5 5.0 Pearson 42 44 53 Michigan English Language 73 80 85 Assessment Battery (MELAB or Michigan Test ) Scholastic Aptitude Test 420 526 572 (SAT)-English Section Prueba Aptitud Academica 453 526 572 (Puerto Rico)- English Secion TOEIC (Academic Test) 600 650 700 107

General Information & Policies (CONTINUED) 108 ADDITIONAL ADMISSIONS REQUIREMENTS FOR NONIMMIGRANT STUDENTS Applicants seeking to enroll in valid student nonimmigrant status must submit each of the following items: A completed and signed Application for Admission, including required essay; A completed and signed Enrollment Agreement; Original or official copies of all educational transcripts (high school and, if applicable, university level academic records) and diplomas. These educational transcripts and diplomas must be prepared in English or include a complete and official English translation; Official credential evaluation of non- American educational credentials, if applicable. Proof of English language proficiency (see English language proficiency policy); A completed and signed Sponsor s Statement of Financial Support; (This statement is not required if the student is self-sponsored) Official Financial Statements. Financial statements (typically provided by a bank) must verify sufficient funds to cover the cost of the educational program as well as all living expenses; A U.S. $50 non-refundable application fee and a U.S. $100 refundable tuition deposit; A photocopy of the student s passport to provide proof of birth date and citizenship (Students outside the United States who have not yet acquired a passport will need to submit a copy of their birth certificate); For all nonimmigrant applicants residing in the United States at the time of application: a photocopy of the visa page contained within the student s passport as well as a photocopy of the student s I/94 arrival departure record (both sides); For all nonimmigrant applicants residing in the United States at the time of application in either F or M non-immigrant classification: written confirmation of nonimmigrant status at previous school attended before transferring to The Art Institutes International Minnesota. If an applicant seeking to enroll in valid student nonimmigrant status is transferring from a college or university in the United States, the International Student Transfer Clearance Form is also required. If the applicant is accepted, he/she will be sent additional information regarding the student visa application process. The Art Institutes International Minnesota is authorized under federal law to admit nonimmigrant students. ORIENTATION At the start of each quarter, The Art Institutes International Minnesota hosts an orientation program for all new students and their parents. Students are advised of the date, time, and events. Attendance is strongly recommended for all new students. STUDENT ID CARDS Students are required to wear their Student ID card issued by The Art Institutes International Minnesota. Students must present their student ID to Security Guards upon entering buildings. Certain entrances and doors are kept locked at all times; student ID cards are used to access these locations through the use of the electronic lock. Student ID cards are also used to check out material in the library and equipment cage. ID cards are also required to receive any official student documentation. If a student loses his or her ID card he/she must immediately report the loss or theft to the equipment Cage. There is a $15 replacement fee. FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT The Art Institutes International Minnesota includes over 100,000 square feet at our locations at 15 South 9th Street and 800 Hennepin Avenue in Minneapolis, Minnesota 55402. In addition to classrooms, students will find studios, laboratories, offices, student lounges, a learning resource center, and an exhibition gallery. The Art Institutes International Minnesota maintains an art supply store and printing service center for the convenience of students. The year-round class size for The Art Institutes International Minnesota averages approximately 21 students. Equipment provided at

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA The Art Institutes International Minnesota is specific to the program of study and includes computers, workstations, printers, as well as photo, video, and audio equipment. The Art Institutes International Minnesota is not responsible for loss or damage of student property, including artwork or photos. PLACEMENT EVALUATIONS Standardized placement evaluations are used at The Art Institutes International Minnesota as a means to place students in the appropriate Transitional or college level English course. (See Academic Affairs for a description of Transitional Studies.) Placement scores are not used to determine admission to the college. There are three assessments tests students may use: ACCUPLACER, ACT and SAT. SAT and ACT scores are considered to be valid for up to five years after the date of completing the evaluations. Students found to need assistance based on the placement evaluation will be required to enroll in appropriate Transitional Studies courses offered by the college. These courses are four credits in length and are charged at the current per-credit rate and do not count towards the required credits for graduation. ACCUPLACER For placement test scoring requirements and options, please speak with an Assistant Director of Admissions or the Academic Director of General Education. Students who score at least 87 in the English section of the ACCUPLACER may be placed in the college level English course. Scoring below 87 in English will place a student in the appropriate Transitional Studies course. Students are only allowed to take the ACCUPLACER test a maximum of two times in each area. If a student receives transfer of credit for GE1410 English I prior to the start of the quarter they are exempted from the appropriate assessment exam. ACT Students who score at least 18 in the appropriate section of the ACT will be placed in the appropriate college level English course. Scoring less than 18 in the appropriate section will require the student to take the Accuplacer Assessment Placement prior to entering College level English. SAT Students who score at least 450 in the appropriate section of the SAT will be placed in the appropriate college level English course. Scoring less than 450 in the appropriate section will require the student to take the Accuplacer Assessment Placement prior to entering College level English. ECOLLEGE AND VITALSOURCE SYSTEM AND HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS The Art Institutes International Minnesota uses ecollege and Vital Source to deliver its digital resources. As with any software, the faster the processor, the more RAM, and the larger hard drive space you provide, the better the performance. Users wanting to move their material to their hard drive may need additional space. It is also important that users understand the process and benefits of maintaining their machines in top operating condition by keeping them current with the latest operating system updates, correctly configuring virus control, and other beneficial habits. PREFERRED REQUIREMENTS: Preferred Software Specifications: Mac OSX 10.5 or 10.6 - OR - Windows 7 or Vista with Microsoft.Net 3.5 SP1 Latest version of Safari Browser, Mozilla Firefox, or Internet Explorer PREFERRED HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS: 2.0 GHZ Intel Processor 1 GB of RAM Graphics card capable of 1024 x 768 resolution or larger Soundcard & speakers High speed internet access MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS: minimum Software Specifications: Apple Mac OSX 10.4 - OR - Microsoft Windows XP SP2 or higher with Microsoft.Net 3.5 SP1 Safari browser 3.0.4 or higher, Mozilla Firefox 2.0 or higher, Internet Explorer 6 or higher Minimum Hardware Specifications: 1.0 GHz processor 512 MB of RAM Graphics card capable of 1024x768 screen resolution Dial-up internet access is the minimum standard, however, a higher speed is recommended 109

General Information & Policies (CONTINUED) NON-DISCRIMINATION POLICY The Art Institutes International Minnesota does not discriminate or harass on the basis of race, color, national origin, sex, gender, sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, age, religion, veteran s status, genetic marker, or any other characteristic protected by state, local or federal law, in our programs and activities. The Art Institutes International Minnesota will not retaliate against persons bringing forward allegations of harassment or discrimination. The Dean of Student Affairs, (612) 656-6865 has been designated to handle inquiries and coordinate the institution s compliance efforts regarding the non-discrimination policy. School Policies Students are expected to be familiar with the information presented in this catalog, in any supplements and addenda to the catalog, and with all school policies. By enrolling in The Art Institute International Minnesota, students agree to accept and abide by the terms stated in this catalog and all school policies. STUDENT FINANCIAL SERVICES Student Financial Services assists students and their families with financial plans to help ensure students completion of their programs. Financial Aid Officers from this department also help in the completion of federal and state applications for grants and loans. Once students eligibility for financial aid is determined, students receive help to develop plans for meeting educational expenses. BOOK PROCESS Students in need of purchasing books for their classes will need to sign an authorization form either approving or not approving the use of excess Title IV funds, if applicable, to cover the cost of books and supplies. If the purchase of books and supplies should exceed the amount of the student s credit balance after all aid pays in, the remaining amount due will be posted to the student s account and the student will be responsible for making alternative payment arrangements. Students who do not authorize and who have excess Title IV funding due to receiving funds from a Pell Grant will receive the lesser amount of either the amount of their Pell Grant excess or their full credit balance amount, for the term in question, within seven days of the start of the term. Students who do not authorize and who are receiving excess Title IV funds but do not have a Pell Grant will receive a stipend within the later of the term begin date or 14 days of the date of their credit balance on their ledger card. REFUND POLICY Refund Policy Prior to Matriculation, All Students The effective date of termination for refund purposes will be the last day of attendance. As allowed under federal, state, and accreditation agency rules, the refund policy may be changed. Students will be notified approximately sixty (60) calendar days in advance of any changes. Applicants may cancel their enrollment in person or in writing before the beginning of classes. An applicant not requesting cancellation before the scheduled starting date indicated on this Enrollment Agreement will be considered a student. 1. All monies paid by applicants will be refunded if they are not accepted for admission. 2. All monies paid by the applicant will be refunded if requested by the applicant within five (5) business days after signing this Enrollment Agreement and making an initial payment, regardless of whether the program has started. 3. Applications requesting cancellation more than five (5) business days after signing the Enrollment Agreement (and making an initial payment) but prior to the beginning of classes will receive a refund of all monies paid, less 15 percent of the total cost of the program (15 percent not to exceed $50.00). 4. All tuition and fee monies paid by applicants will be refunded if requested within three (3) business days after their first tour of the school and inspection of equipment or if requested within three (3) business days of the student s attendance at the regularly scheduled orientation program for their starting quarter, whichever is sooner. 5. Refunds will be made within thirty (30) calendar days after the applicant s/ student s request or within thirty (30) calendar days after his/her first scheduled class day. 110

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Refund Policy after Matriculation, All Students In the event of withdrawal by the student or termination by The Art Institutes International Minnesota during any quarter of study: 1. Prepaid tuition and fees for any period beyond the student s current quarter will be refunded in full. 2. The student may officially withdraw from school by notifying the Office of the Registrar in person or in writing. The termination date will be the student s last date of attendance. If the student stops attending without notifying the Office of the Registrar, The Art Institutes International Minnesota shall determine the date of withdrawal. This determination date will be considered the notification date for refunding purposes. Refunds due shall be paid within thirty (30) calendar days of the notification date, unless the student is withdrawing at the end of the quarter. 3. Refunds for a student notifying The Art Institutes International Minnesota prior to the end of a quarter that he/she will be withdrawing at the end of that quarter will be paid within thirty (30) calendar days of the last day of that quarter. 4 For a student who attended a previous quarter of study and did not indicate that he/ she was not returning, refunds will be made within thirty (30) calendar days of the first scheduled day of class in the quarter in which the student was expected to return. 5. The refund shall be paid to the student, unless payment to a lender or other entity is required by the terms of a student financial aid program in which the school participates. 6. In the event of a fully documented extreme illness or personal emergency that makes it impractical for the student to complete the program, The Art Institutes International Minnesota may modify the tuition refund policy as deemed appropriate to the circumstances. 7. A separate lease agreement and refund policy exists for students who lease housing accommodations arranged by The Art Institutes International Minnesota. The Art Institutes International Minnesota reserves the right to apply any student payment, or any refund due a student, to any student financial liability. 8. Each academic quarter is eleven (11) weeks in duration. The calculation of refunds is based upon the last day of attendance within the quarter. 9. Session II academic terms are approximately five and one-half weeks in duration. The calculation of refunds is based upon the last day of attendance within the term. Information in the catalog or student handbook will apply except for the following changes specific to Session II classes: For students only scheduled to attend Session II, the add/ drop period is two days from the start of Session II classes. Students who drop or add one or more may change financial aid eligibility may change. Please see a Financial Aid Officer before dropping or adding a class. 10. Cancellation of a scheduled class start date for any program shall entitle a student to elect either: (a) a guaranteed reservation in the next scheduled class for that program, or (b) cancellation of enrollment with a full refund of all monies paid. Return of Federal Title IV Aid In compliance with Federal regulations, the school will determine how much Federal student financial assistance the student has earned or not earned when a student who is a Title IV recipient withdraws from school. The school will calculate the percentage and amount of awarded Federal student financial assistance that the student has earned if the student withdraws up through the 60 percent point of the term or session if the student is only attending a session. If the student has completed more than 60 percent of the term, the student earns 100 percent of the Federal student financial assistance. The amount earned will be based on the percentage of the term that was completed in days up to and including the last date of attendance. To calculate the amount earned, the school will determine the percentage by dividing the number of calendar days completed in the term up to and including the last date of attendance by the total number of calendar days in the term. If there is a scheduled break of five or more days, it will reduce the term length. If the scheduled break is before the student s last date of attendance, it will also reduce the calendar days completed. If the student received more than the amount of Federal student financial assistance earned, the difference will be returned to the Federal student 111

General Information & Policies (CONTINUED) financial assistance programs from which funds were received in the following order: Federal Unsubsidized Direct Loans, Federal Subsidized Direct Loans, Federal Perkins Loans, Federal PLUS Loan, Federal Pell Grant, FSEOG. Funds will be returned to the aid source within forty-five (45) calendar days of the date that the school determines that the student has withdrawn. If more Federal student financial assistance has been earned than has been received, the student may be eligible for a post-withdrawal disbursement. The school will notify the student of any post-withdrawal disbursement loan funds for which the student may be eligible and what steps need to be taken for the Federal financial assistance funds to be received. The student or parent, in the case of the Federal PLUS Loans, needs to provide permission before any loan funds may be disbursed on the student s account or disbursed to the student or parent. However, the school may automatically use all or a portion of the post-withdrawal disbursement of grant funds for tuition, fees, and room and board charges (as contracted with the school), and, with the student s authorization, the school may automatically use the grant funds for other educationallyrelated charges. Any balance of grant funds that may be available will be offered to the student. If Federal student financial assistance funds need to be returned, the institution must return a portion or all of the unearned funds equal to the lesser of: The institutional charges multiplied by the percentage of the unearned Federal student financial assistance funds; or The entire amount of unearned funds. If there are remaining unearned Federal financial aid funds to be returned, the student must return any loan funds that remain to be returned in accordance with the terms and conditions of the promissory note. If the remaining amount of funds to be returned includes grant funds, the student must return any amount of the overpayment that is more than half of the grant funds received. The school will notify the student as to the amount owed and how and where it should be returned. If students are only scheduled to attend Session I or Session II, the Return of Title IV calculation as described in the Enrollment Agreement will be applied to the applicable session attended using the session start and end dates. Adjustment of Charges In accordance with school policy, if a student gives written notice of cancellation after the start of the period of instruction for which the student has been charged, but before completion of 75 percent of the period of instruction, then the student is assessed a pro rata portion of tuition, fees and all other charges based on the number of days in the term plus 25 percent of the total program cost (25 percent not to exceed $100.00.) Any notice of cancellation shall be acknowledged in writing within ten (10) business days of receipt of such notice and all refunds shall be forwarded to the student within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of such notice. This refund policy is not linked to any student conduct policy and any promissory instrument shall not be negotiated prior to the completion of 50 percent of the course. Written notice of cancellation shall take place on the date the letter of cancellation is postmarked or, in the case where the notice is hand carried, it shall occur on the date the notice is delivered to the school. The date of execution of the enrollment agreement shall be presumed to the date of delivery of the notice of acceptance: and if delivered by mail, the postmark dates of the letter of acceptance. Refund Policy for Online Course Withdrawal Students who withdraw from a Session I or Session II online class after the add/drop period are treated the same as if they withdrew from an on-ground class. Session II classes begin approximately the day after Session I classes end and run approximately five and one-half weeks. The ending date of Session II classes may not coincide with the ending date of on-ground classes. Non Federal Refund Policy Refunds for state aid programs and non-state aid programs are calculated on a proportional basis using the state mandated or institutional refund policy. Charges are adjusted proportionately up to the 75% point in the quarter. After the 75% point, The Art Institutes International Minnesota will retain 100% of the charges. To calculate the minimum refund due to the Minnesota State Grant program, the SELF Loan Program, and other Aid Programs, with the exception of the State Work Study Program, the Minnesota Office of Higher Education Refund Calculation Worksheet, Appendix 13, of the Minnesota State Grant manual is used. 112

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Refund Calculations after Matriculation If there is additional money to be refunded from federal funds after calculating the Return of Title IV formula and the refund policy, the refund will be made to the student or, with the student s authorization, to the federal loan program(s) in the following order, up to the amount received for the term of withdrawal: Federal Unsubsidized Direct Loans, Federal Subsidized Direct Loans, Federal Perkins Loans, Federal PLUS Loans and Alternative Loans. If there is an additional credit balance made up of non-title IV funds, it will be refunded in the following order, up to the amount received for the term of withdrawal: Federal Unsubsidized Direct Loans, Federal Subsidized Direct Loans, Federal Perkins Loans, Federal PLUS Loans, Alternative Loans, other loans, other aid (if required), and student. Supply Store Return Policy During the first six (6) calendar days of the student s attendance, the supply kit and individual components of the kit may be returned for a refund only if the item being returned is in good condition and able to be resold. All refunds and return of funds will be made within thirty (30) calendar days of the date the student notifies The Art Institutes International Minnesota of the withdrawal. Examples of the calculations for these policies are available in the Student Accounting Office. Policy for Official and Unofficial Withdrawal The student may officially withdraw from school by notifying the Office of the Registrar in writing or in person. The refund policies outlined above shall apply in the event that a student withdraws, is suspended or is terminated from school. A student who withdraws from a program before the end of week 9 will be assigned a W code for each course within that quarter. To withdraw from a program, a student must notify the Registrar s Office. Every course for which a student receives an F or a W grade/code must be repeated and completed with a passing grade in order to graduate. The original grade/code and the subsequent passing grade(s) will remain on the record for reference purposes. However, when a course is successfully repeated, only the passing grade will be computed in the grade point average. Tuition is charged for repeated courses. Withdrawals and failed courses can affect the student s Incremental Completion Rate and ability to succeed. For the purpose of determining a refund, a student is deemed to have withdrawn from a course of instruction when any of the following occur: 1. The student notifies The Art Institutes International Minnesota of withdrawal or of the date of withdrawal. 2. Art Institutes International Minnesota terminates the student s enrollment in accordance with institutional policies. 3. The student exceeds the number of absences allowed in accordance with institutional policies, and must be withdrawn from school. The date of withdrawal shall be deemed the last date of recorded attendance. 4. All refunds and return of funds will be made within thirty (30) calendar days of the date of determination. Non-Payment of Charges Non-payment of tuition, housing, fees and/or other charges due to The Art Institutes International Minnesota will result in the student being obligated for interest, collection agency costs and additional collection costs, and legal costs. In addition, The Art Institutes International Minnesota reserves the right to report the student s failure to pay amounts owed to one or more national credit bureau organizations and not release the student s academic transcript until all debts to The Art Institutes International Minnesota are paid in full. Interest on Outstanding Balances Students who have entered into a line of credit with the school may be subject to interest being charged based on their method of payment. Students that agree to have their balance paid off within each term or students who are financing their entire education with financial aid will not be charged interest. All other payment arrangements are subject to interest being charged if applicable. Please reference the retail installment agreement and opening disclosure documents to understand the interest rate that will be charged and how interest charges are computed. When a final course grade has been established and recorded in the student record, the grade may not be changed without approval by the Academic Director or Chair and the Dean of Academic Affairs. 113

General Information & Policies (CONTINUED) FINANCIAL AID Various federal and state programs are available to those who are eligible as follows: Federal Stafford Loan (Subsidized/Unsubsidized) Federal Pell Grant Federal Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant (SEOG) Federal Work-Study Federal PLUS Loan Program State-Funded Student Assistance Programs Vocational Rehabilitation Assistance Veteran s Administration Benefits Awards under these programs are based on the student meeting eligibility requirements, individual need, the availability of funds, and specific program requirements. A number of states also offer educational grants. Some states permit their residents to use the grants at schools outside of the state. Contact the Student Financial Services office for complete details about financial aid resources. Students receiving financial assistance must maintain satisfactory academic progress standards as outlined in this catalog. For detailed and complete information on all federal financial aid awards, processes, requirements, and deadlines, please refer to the school s current Financial Aid Guide, the Student Consumer Information on the school s website, or contact the Student Financial Services Office directly. STUDENT FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE 1. All students who receive federalsponsored financial assistance must maintain satisfactory academic progress for financial assistance eligibility. 2. State grant eligibility is based on current regulations as detailed on the student s state grant notice. Each student should refer to the award notice or contact the Student Financial Services department when his or her status changes. SUSPENSION AND REINSTATEMENT OF FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE Students who are suspended from a program of study or terminated from The Art Institutes International Minnesota are ineligible for financial assistance until they regain admission and comply with Satisfactory Academic Progress Policy requirements. FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE STUDENT APPEAL Students who are denied or suspended from financial assistance may file an appeal, under appropriate federal guidelines, with the College s Student Financial Assistance Review Committee. STUDENT FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE REVIEW COMMITTEE This committee consists of the President, the Regional Director of Finance, and the Director of Student Financial Services. The committee is responsible for the review of all student financial-aid awards when there is a question regarding a student s eligibility for such awards. Furthermore, the committee serves as an appeal panel when a student is denied financial assistance under the Satisfactory Academic Progress Policy. STUDENT FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE APPEAL PROCESS Any student who is denied financial assistance under The Art Institutes International Minnesota s Satisfactory Academic Progress Policy has the right to appeal such a decision. The student: 1. Writes a letter to the attention of The Art Institutes International Minnesota s Director of Student Financial Services that details all mitigating circumstances. This letter must be received within 10 days after notification of financial-aid denial. 2. Attaches any documents that give justification or reason for the student s situation leading to the denial of financial assistance. 3. May request a personal appearance before the Student Financial Assistance Review Committee. The Review Committee: 1. Secures a copy of the student s academic and financial-aid records. 2. May request the appearance of the student to clarify any materials/statements presented by the student. 114

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA 3. Reviews the student s records and all materials presented by the student, and renders a final decision regarding the student s financial assistance status. STUDENT TUITION APPEAL PROCESS 1. Students have the right to make a tuition appeal if an error by The Art Institutes International Minnesota results in the student s inability to continue in a class or at the institution. 2. The appeal should be in writing, and the letter should be directed to the Tuition Appeals committee. Letters should be delivered to the Dean of Academic Affairs, whose office is located in the Administration Office, 341 LaSalle building. 3. The written tuition appeal must be filed within thirty days from the time of the discovery of the error. Documentation of the error should be provided with the letter of appeal. 4. A response from the committee will be provided within three weeks of the receipt of the letter. 5. If students have questions regarding the tuition appeal process, they should see the Dean of Academic Affairs. MILITARY & VETERAN SERVICES Veteran services are available to the following students: Currently serving in the military Previously served in the military Survivor, or dependents of a veteran Received military benefits in the past The Registrar serves as the certifying official. To receive or continue to receive benefits students need to provide proper military documentation to the Registrar. VETERANS INFORMATION The College is approved by the Minnesota State Approving Agency for veterans educational benefits and may receive assistance in the filing of appropriate forms from the Registrar s office. These students must maintain satisfactory attendance and academic progress as outlined in this catalog. Makeup work is not permitted for the purpose of receiving Veteran s Administration training allowances. Purpose and Scope The Art Institutes International Minnesota maintains and enforces an attendance policy for all its students. Participation in classroom activities is vital to a student s successful completion of each course and is an important facet of each student s professional development. All students including students who receive Veterans Administration educational benefits are expected to attend all classes as scheduled, to be on time, and to remain in the classes for their full duration. The VA requires the school to notify them when students receiving Veterans Affairs educational benefits cease to pursue any of their courses. Additionally, multiple absences in a course could result in loss of VA educational benefits. I.. Definitions Attendance: Attendance must be recorded by the instructor, facilitator, other designee, or by an automated system for all classes in which a student is registered. Absence: Absence is defined as being not in attendance for the total number of class hours that are scheduled for the class during a particular day. This includes the final exam and/ or the last scheduled session of the quarter. Absence for an online course is defined as a student not making at least one academicallyrelated post in an approved learning management system during a particular week. Absences are recorded from the first day of the term regardless of the reason for absence. Holidays and official class cancellations are not considered as absences. Student: For the purposes of this policy, a student is someone who is enrolled in the institute and is receiving VA educational benefits. VA Course Attendance, Campus: Students who receive VA educational benefits are required to pursue each of their courses to be eligible for benefits. In order to receive the full benefit allowance the student must attend all classes in which the student is registered throughout the academic term at the campus. A student who is absent from a particular course for a period of 21 consecutive calendar days will be considered not pursuing the course. THE ART INSTITUTES NOTIFYING THE VA OF STUDENTS NO LONGER PURSUING A COURSE POLICY POLICY IS EFFECTIVE AS OF SEPTEMBER 30, 2013 115

General Information & Policies (CONTINUED) At the end of a quarter, a student must complete their final assignment or take their final exam (these dates must be documented) or not receive a grade of W, WF or an unearned F, or their last date of attendance will be provided to the VA. VA Course Attendance, Online: Students who receive VA educational benefits are required to meet attendance requirements to be eligible for benefits. In order to receive the full benefit allowance the student must make at least one academically-related post for each online course in an approved learning management system during a particular week. A student who does not make at least one academically-related post in an approved learning management system during a 2 week period will be considered not pursuing the course. Pursuit (Title 38 law of the VA Certifying Official handbook): The term pursuit means to complete coursework, while enrolled, toward the objective of a program of education. This coursework must be in accordance with approved institutional policy and regulations, and applicable criteria of title 38, United States Code; must be necessary to reach the program s objective; and must be accomplished through resident courses (including teacher training courses and similar courses which the VA considers to be resident training), independent study courses, a graduate program of research in absentia, or medical/ dental internships and residencies, nursing courses and other medical/dental specialty courses. The VA considers a person who qualifies for payment during an interval between terms or school closing, or who qualifies for payment during a holiday vacation to be in pursuit of a program of education during the interval, school closing, or holiday vacation. Reinstatement: Reinstatement is the process of returning the student to active pursuit status after the VA has been notified that the student is no longer pursuing a course. This may occur when a student is erroneously withdrawn from school due to the posting of erroneous attendance or when a student appeals the withdrawal with mitigating circumstances. II. Policy Conditions and Guidelines COURSE ATTENDANCE The Art Institutes maintain an institutional attendance policy to support the academic achievement of its students. Students are expected to attend all scheduled class, laboratory, and examination periods each week. We will notify the VA if a student is no longer pursuing the course, as defined above. For students enrolled in campus-based courses Students missing 21 consecutive calendar days of class in any course in which they are enrolled during an academic term could lose their VA educational benefits. If a class session during the course falls on a holiday or the class is cancelled by the faculty member, the student is not considered to be absent. For students enrolled in online courses Students not making at least one academically-related post for each online course in an approved learning management system during a 2 week period will be considered absent. The VA will be notified about students who do not meet these pursuit criteria. The last date of attendance (LDA) will be determined and reported to the VA within 30 days of the change in enrollment. A notice of Change in Student Status with an Adjust action will be placed in the student file. COURSE OFFICIAL WITHDRAWAL POLICY A student can officially withdraw from any class through the ninth week of an 11-week course (or through the 4th week of a 5.5-week course or the 8th week of a 10- week course) and receive a grade of W (Withdrawal, with no grade penalty). Course withdrawal forms must be submitted to the Registrar s Office by the close of business on Friday of week nine (week 4 of a 5.5-week course) in order to receive a W grade. Students receiving VA educational benefits who withdraw from a course(s) or interrupt their training will have their enrollment status for VA purposes changed and their last day of attendance reported to the VA, which will result in a loss or reduction of VA educational benefits. 116 A change in enrollment status will result in a loss or reduction of VA educational benefits. Benefits loss or reduction may include VA payments for tuition, fees, monthly housing allowance (MHA), and the books and supplies stipend. As of a result of these benefit losses, the student may have

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA their future eligibility for VA educational benefits reduced or may be liable for a debt to the VA. Please note that withdrawing from courses or ceasing to pursue a course will negatively impact a student s Satisfactory Academic Progress as well as the Standards of Progress and ability to graduate. In most cases, the student will have to retake the course(s) and be charged again for the course(s). We strongly advise that the student meets with his or her academic advisor and Veterans Affairs School Certifying Official on campus before withdrawing or before the student stops attending a course(s). Students will have their VA educational benefits reduced or terminated when they expressly request to be withdrawn from a course(s) or their training is interrupted. Please note that the Institute does withdraw both VA and non-va students from school, if the student does not attend all of his or her registered courses for 21 consecutive days for on-ground campus classes. Online students, both VA and non-va, who do not make at least one academically-related post in any of their online classes in a 2 week period will be withdrawn from school. In both cases, the VA will also be notified of a VA student s last day of attendance when the student is administratively withdrawn, which will result in a loss or reduction of VA educational benefits. If the student submits the final project and/or sits for the final examination does not pass a course(s) and receives an F (sometimes referred to as an earned F), the student will be deemed to have earned the F and to be in compliance with the pursuit requirements. If the student fails but did not submit the final project and/ or sit for the final exam, the student will receive an F (sometimes referred to as an unearned F) and will be deemed not to be in pursuit of the course. In situations where the student is deemed not to be in pursuit (has an unearned F), the VA will be notified of the student s last date of attendance in that course(s), which will result in a loss or reduction of VA educational benefits. If a student receives a W or WF, the VA will be notified that the student is no longer pursuing the course(s) and the Last Day of Attendance for each course will be provided to the VA, which will result in a loss or reduction of VA educational benefits. Minimum Academic Achievement Standards for Student Receiving Department of Defense Tuition Assistance: In addition to the College s Standards of Satisfactory Academic Progress Policy, in order for a Service member student to continue to receive Tuition Assistance (TA) military education benefits for TA-funded courses, the following minimum academic standards must be achieved. The Department of Defense requires reimbursement from the Service member if a successful course completion is not obtained. For the purpose of reimbursement, a successful course completion is defined as a grade of C or higher for undergraduate courses, a B or higher for graduate courses and a Pass for Pass/Fail grades. Reimbursement will also be required from the Service member if he or she fails to make up a grade of I for incomplete within the time limits stipulated by the educational institution or 6 months after the completion of the class, whichever comes first. Students using TA must maintain a cumulative grade point average (GPA) of 2.0 or higher after completing 15 semester hours/23 quarter hours, or equivalent, in undergraduate studies, or a GPA of 3.0 or higher after completing 6 semester hours/9 quarter hours, or equivalent, in graduate studies, on a 4.0 grading scale. If the GPA for TA funded courses falls below these minimum GPA limits, TA will not be authorized and Service members will use alternative funding (such as financial aid or personal funds) to enroll in courses to raise the cumulative GPA to 2.0 for undergraduate studies or 3.0 for graduate studies. The Secretary of the Military Department will establish recoupment processes with the Service member directly for unsuccessful completion of courses.scholarship & GRANT INFORMATION The Art Institutes International Minnesota offers various merit and competitive scholarships. Scholarships rules and awards may change after the printing of this catalog. For current information, please visit, http:// www.artinstitutes.edu/competitions/high-school.aspx. THE ART INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL The Art Institutes International Minnesota Need Based Grant is a quarterly scholarship and is given to students who have demonstrated financial need and are not eligible for the Federal PELL Grant or are not a Minnesota resident but would have received the Minnesota State Grant had the student been a resident. The award ranges from $100-$500 each quarter and is contingent on a yearly review. 117

General Information & Policies (CONTINUED) THE ART INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA MERIT SCHOLARSHIP The Art Institutes International Minnesota Merit Scholarship is a quarterly scholarship and is given to students who have demonstrated financial need and have earned at least a 2.0 cumulative GPA during their high school or college education. To be eligible, students must have started their program between Winter 2013 and Fall 2013. The award ranges from $250-$750 each quarter and is contingent on the student maintaining a cumulative GPA of 2.0 or higher while attending The Art Institutes International Minnesota. The student must enroll for at least 12 credits per quarter. Application is due at the time of initial financial aid appointment. THE ART INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA SCHOLARSHIP PROGRAM The Art Institutes International Minnesota Scholarship Program is a quarterly scholarship and is given to students who have demonstrated financial need and have earned at least a 2.0 cumulative GPA during their high school or college education. To be eligible, students must have started their program Winter 2014 or later. The award ranges from $350-$1050 each quarter and is contingent on the student maintaining a cumulative GPA of 2.0 or higher while attending The Art Institutes International Minnesota. The student must enroll for at least 12 credits per quarter. Application is due at the time of initial financial aid appointment. THE ART INSTITUTES INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA SECOND FAMILY MEMBER SCHOLARSHIP The Art Institutes International Minnesota provides this quarterly award to students attending The Art Institutes International Minnesota concurrently with another member of their nuclear family (parent, sibling, spouse or child). The maximum amount a student receives is $150-$300 and is based on their credit load. STUDENT SUCCESS SCHOLARSHIP To be eligible, a student must have a CGPA of 3.3 or higher and then register for 16 credits for the following quarter. Students must remain enrolled in 16 credits through schedule adjustment period to be eligible. At the end of schedule adjustment period, the student will be credited the value of one credit of tuition after week 2 of the quarter. The credit value will be based on the individual student s tuition rate. For more information, visit the Student Financial Services office located on the second floor. THE EDUCATION FOUNDATION SCHOLARSHIP This annual tuition-based scholarship award is offered to students 24 years of age and older. To qualify, incoming and current non-traditional students must meet the following requirements: A completed application form and scholarship application agreement A personal statement that tells us something about you that cannot be discerned from the application materials and what you plan on doing with your education after graduation. Unofficial copies of all high school or college transcripts. Transcripts must demonstrate a minimum Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) of 3.0. Two letters of recommendation a copy of any letter of recommendation is acceptable. One letter may come from an instructor, but not both letters. For more information, please visit Student Financial Services. DOLLARS FOR SCHOLARS SCHOLARSHIP The Art Institutes International Minnesota is a collegiate partner of Citizens Scholarship Foundation of America and the Dollars for Scholars family of community scholarship foundations. The Art Institutes International Minnesota has agreed that Dollars for Scholars awards of up to $1,000 per student will not adversely affect scholarship funding provided by The Art Institutes International Minnesota. Interested students should go online at http://scholarshipamerica.org/ for details. 118

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA NATIONAL ART HONOR SOCIETY SCHOLARSHIP High school seniors who also belong to the National Art Honor Society may apply for an Art Institutes National Art Honor Society Scholarship. Details may be obtained by calling The Art Institutes location of your choice or 1-800-777-3643. Senior class members of the National Art Honor Society are eligible to compete for these tuition scholarships: First place: $20,000 Second place: $10,000 Third place: $5,000 The National Art Honor Society scholarships cover tuition only. Scholarship awards may not be applied to fees, living expenses, or supply costs. All entries must be addressed to: The Art Institutes, attn.: National Art Honor Society Scholarships Julie Walsh 210 Sixth Avenue, 33rd Floor Pittsburgh, PA 15222-2603 DEADLINE Application must be postmarked by midnight, March 9, 2015. Winners will be notified after April 20, 2015. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS: You must be a high school senior graduating in the 2014-2015 academic year and a member of the National Art Honor Society. Submit six slides of six different original pieces of artwork representing your creative ability and interest. Digital files may be submitted in lieu of slides. Submit a written statement describing your artistic career goals and why you want to be considered for a scholarship. Use the list on the back cover to select The Art Institute you wish to attend. Winners must apply for admission at an Art Institutes location and be accepted to validate the scholarship. Upon receipt, all submissions become the sole property of The Art Institutes International Minnesota and will not be returned. VICA/SKILLSUSA CHAMPIONSHIP Students who are members of SkillsUSA may compete in local, state, and national championships. The winners of the national championships are awarded the following scholarships. Winners of the Advertising Design, Culinary, and Photography championships will be awarded a $20,000 tuition scholarship, second place prize of $5,000 and third place prize of $2500. Winners of the 3D Visualization and Animation, Web Design, and Television Production championships will be awarded a first place prize of $10,000 tuition scholarship, second place prize of $5,000 and third place prize of $2500. Each Art Institutes location has a limited number of scholarships. Winners are permitted to choose The Art Institutes location of their choice and scholarships will be awarded on a first-comefirst- serve basis. National championships are held in June. For details, visit the SkillsUSA Web site: http://www.skillsusa.org or call 703-777-8810. Winners of the SkillsUSA competition may contact Student Financial Services at The Art Institutes International Minnesota at 1-800- 777-3643 for scholarship details. SCHOLASTICS ARTS AND WRITING COMPETITION Four $10,000 scholarships will be awarded by The Art Institutes International Minnesota to the Scholastic National Award recipients on a first-comefirst-serve basis. To receive information about this scholarship, visit the Scholastic Web site at http:// www.scholastic.com/artandwriting or call 212-343- 6100. National Award recipients must contact Julie Walsh at The Art Institutes at 1-800-275-2440 as soon as they are notified of the award. Submit your name, home address, and telephone number, along with your school name, address, and school telephone number, and the name of your National Art Honor Society advisor. Entries must be postmarked by midnight, March 9, 2015. 119

General Information & Policies (CONTINUED) C-CAP Students who are enrolled in a C-CAP program may compete for a two or four-year full-tuition scholarship at The Art Institutes International Minnesota. The value of this scholarship is approximately $38,000 to 95,000. For information, speak to the C-CAP director at your high school, visit: http:// www.ccapinc.org, or call: 212-974-7111. NATIONAL PROSTART INVITATIONAL First-place winners of the National ProStart Invitational Culinary Competition and Management Competition will be awarded a non-renewalbe $$10,000 tuition scholarship to The Art Institutes International Minnesota. A non-renewable $7,500 tuition scholarship for secondplace winners and $$5,000 tuition scholarship for third place winners will also be awarded. Applicants must be high school seniors graduating in 2015 enrolled in a ProStart program to be eligible for competition. For more information, visit the ProStart Web site at www.nraef.org/ prostart/ or call 1-800-765-2122. Winners of the invitational may contact Student Financial Services at The Art Institutes International Minnesota at 1-800-777-3643 for scholarship details. DEAN S CHOICE AWARD Each quarter, enrolled students representing all programs are encouraged to submit their best work to the Dean s office. The Dean selects a work for display in the Dean s office. The studentartist receives a $200 tuition scholarship in recognition for his or her winning submission. CULINARY ARTS STUDENT SCHOLARSHIP Up to three scholarships are awarded per year each in amounts varying between $750 and $2000 to current Culinary Arts students. To qualify, Culinary Arts students must meet the following requirements: Minimum 3.0 GPA from The Art Institutes International Minnesota Currently and continuously enrolled students who are in good academic and judicial standing. Two letters of recommendations one from a faculty member and another from the Academic Director for Culinary Arts. A three-part essay: 1. How has your education at The Art Institutes International Minnesota allowed you to fulfill your culinary goals? 2. How will this scholarship contribute to your college experience while attending The Art Institutes International Minnesota? 3. How will the achievement of your Culinary Arts degree or certificate influence your future career? To learn more, visit: http://www.artinstitutes.edu/competitions PRESIDENT S AWARD FOR EXCELLENCE Each quarter, enrolled students representing all programs are encouraged to submit their best work to the President s office. The President selects a work for display in the President s office. The student-artist receives a $250 tuition scholarship in recognition for his or her winning submission. All scholarship winners must adhere to the scholarship rules established by The Art Institutes International Minnesota. Scholarship winners must apply to and be accepted at The Art Institutes International Minnesota to validate the scholarship. Scholarships cover tuition only, unless otherwise noted. The scholarship does not cover books, supplies, or miscellaneous fees. Students attending The Art Institutes International Minnesota on scholarships must maintain at least a 3.0 cumulative grade point average, or otherwise stated, in order to retain eligibility. 120

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Academic Affairs OVERVIEW Academic Affairs at The Art Institutes International Minnesota engages students in an innovative education that supports them in becoming critical and creative thinkers with the ability to shape their chosen fields. Academic Affairs values: Excellence in educational programs, teaching, and student support Honesty, integrity, and caring in all interactions Openness to new ideas in a changing world Commitment to continuing improvement Academic Affairs serves the students, faculty and community through the development and implementation of postsecondary educational programs that prepare students with the necessary skills for entry-level positions in a variety of design-related and business-related careers. The office serves students through: The selection, development, and retention of exemplary faculty The careful, continual planning and development of a curriculum that is responsive to the needs of students and employers The provision of academic support services The provision of appropriate technology for instructional purposes The promotion and support of an effective library which provides access to materials and information supporting educational programs at The Art Institutes International Minnesota ACADEMIC DIRECTORS AND ACADEMIC PROGRAMS The administration and faculty members of the Academic Affairs department have been carefully selected to assure excellence in the educational process. The faculty members have professional experience and backgrounds in the career-related areas in which they teach. The major focus of the educational process is devoted to the development of employable skills and professional attitudes so that graduates are prepared for the working world. ACADEMIC DIRECTORS AND PROGRAM COORDINATORS Each academic program at The Art Institutes International Minnesota has an Academic Director/ Program Coordinator. The Academic Director/ Program Coordinator is responsible for working directly with students to ensure a quality learning experience, and for ensuring that well qualified faculty members are employed to teach in programs. They also ensure, through continual observation and evaluation, that faculty members implement best practices in the teaching and learning process. Academic Directors/Program Coordinators develop the curriculum and maintain an appropriate schedule of classes. They also encourage students to meet with them to discuss the competencies and outcomes for student learning in the program. They are available to meet with students on individual plans for career employment. The Academic Director/Program Coordinator works with a Professional Advisory Committee (PAC) for each program. PAC members are industry professionals who advise the program to ensure that curriculum is staying current with industry standards, offer insight into the changing dynamics of the industry, and report on the skills and knowledge needed for employment. STUDENT PARTICIPATION AND ACTIVE LEARNING The Art Institutes International Minnesota encourages students to be active participants in their own learning. Students need to engage in their coursework by attending classes, participating in learning activities, completing reading, and submitting assignments. The Art Institutes International Minnesota faculty members assist students in becoming professionals and lifelong learners. Students are encouraged to communicate regularly with their faculty members and take advantage of both scheduled office hours and informal meeting times. ACADEMIC FREEDOM Founded in the belief that freedom of inquiry is essential to the learning process, The Art Institutes International Minnesota supports academic freedom for its faculty members and students. The College strives to create an environment in which students are exposed to a variety of significant scholarly viewpoints on the subjects examined in their courses. This environment extends beyond the classroom, and fosters and protects independence of thought and speech. This environment is conducive to the civil exchange of ideas. 121

Academic Affairs (CONTINUED) ACADEMIC ADVISING Academic Advisors encourage success and persistence through academic planning, educational goal setting, and resource referral. Advisors can direct students to campus services as well as off-campus resources that may enhance their ability to succeed. Students should see an Academic Advisor for assistance with: Accessing any services on campus Course planning and registration Online courses Adding or dropping classes Changing majors Clarifying goals Communicating with faculty Strategies for academic success Connecting with resources Accessing Student Portal accounts CAMPUS ACADEMIC ADVISOR The Campus Academic Advisor is the in-person primary advisor for a cohort of new, first year, and re-entry students. The Campus Academic Advisor is dedicated to helping these students transition into the college environment; learn about campus resources; understand campus policies and procedures; and assist the students in building connections to other students, staff, and faculty at the campus. ACADEMIC ADVISORS AT THE ADVISING CENTER The Academic Advisors at the Academic Advising Center are responsible for advising and supporting students during the middle portion of their degree programs. The Academic Advisors are available at a distance (via phone or email) and will be responsible for all advisement, monitoring, and outreach required for all continuing students. Contact your team of Academic Advisors at 1-855-855-0590 from 8am to 7pm Monday through Thursday and 7:30-4pm on Fridays. ACADEMIC ACHIEVEMENT CENTER AND INTERIOR DESIGN SKILLS CENTER Academic Achievement Services provide tools, services, and opportunities for improved academic success. Academic Achievement Services provide peer-tutoring and academic support workshops to enhance academic skills. Appointments are not r equired for tutoring services. The current schedule of tutors can be found on the doors outside the tutoring centers or with the Academic Advisors. LIBRARY The Library of The Art Institutes International Minnesota plays a central role in supporting students and faculty of the Art Institute in their academic and professional pursuits by providing relevant information resources in multiple formats, encouraging and promoting information literacy, and maintaining a supportive environment that complements the educational experience of our patrons. The Library maintains a readily available collection of resources and materials, both online and in traditional formats. The collection consists of books, DVDs, journals and periodicals, ebooks, access to dozens of online databases, royalty-free images, footage and sound effects. Students also have access to interlibrary loan (ILL) services both locally (via MINITEX) and through the EDMC family of schools. REGISTRAR The Registrar and staff are responsible for monitoring, recording, and reporting student academic performance each quarter. Additional services include: Maintenance of all permanent academic records Issuance of grade reports and/ or attendance reports Issuance of student transcript records. Processing of student information, including but not limited to: Leaves of absence/complete withdrawal from program, Program/major changes, Veterans enrollment certifications, Verification of enrollment, and Address/ Name/ Phone number changes Forms to process student requests are available in the Registrar office or through the registrar online site, http://aim.aiiresources.com/departments/ registrar/forms/forms may be downloaded from this site, but hard copies with the student s signature must be turned in to the Registrar office. 122

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA OFFICIAL ADDRESS/NAME/ PHONE NUMBERS The Registrar s Office must be notified by each student of any name, address, or phone number changes. Delivery of mail to the last address on record constitutes official notification to students. ATTENDANCE POLICY Regular, on-time attendance is both courteous and professional. The Art Institutes International Minnesota expects students to demonstrate professionalism by attending all classes as scheduled, arriving on time, and remaining for the full duration of the class. Outside employment should not be scheduled during class hours. In the event of illness or emergency, students are responsible for class material and should follow the procedures described in the course syllabus for contacting the instructor and keeping up with planned learning activities. In the case of unavoidable but planned absences, the student should communicate with the instructor and prepare assignments in advance when possible. Even with prior notification, a student will be marked absent and there may still be an impact on grades. Individual faculty may determine the impact, if any, of absences on grades. The Art Institutes International Minnesota supports the attendance policy for each class as it is described in the syllabus. Each student is responsible for reading and understanding the policy for each class. Students with excessive absences will be withdrawn from class. Excessive absence is defined as missing two consecutive weeks of classes. Appeals of excessive absence withdrawal are limited in scope and rarely granted, following a presumption that a student who has missed two consecutive weeks of class is too far behind to reasonably make up the learning from that time period. The primary basis of an appeal should be clerical or record error in which the student can demonstrate attendance was inaccurately recorded. A student that stops attending all of their courses for two consecutive weeks will be given an attendance termination from the College. Students may be considered for readmission to the College following the submission of a written request to the Dean of Academic Affairs. If the student does not meet the standards of the Satisfactory Academic Progress Policy, he or she must follow the re-entry process within that policy. INDEPENDENT STUDY POLICY Students may be allowed to take, on a very limited basis, courses through directed or independent study. Courses with a laboratory or internship component cannot be completed through directed or independent study as lab time must be properly supervised. Students must be making appropriate progress towards graduation to be considered for directed or independent study. The students must obtain permission from the Academic Director and the Dean of Academic Affairs to enroll in a directed or independent study course and must complete a contract for Independent Study prior to the course start date. A student who has previously attempted a specific class and has either withdrawn or did not successfully complete that class is not eligible for an Independent Study. It is the sole discretion of the Dean of Academic Affairs as to whether a student qualifies for an Independent Study. INTERNSHIP Internship Attendance Requirements Students must attend their internship on the days and hours designated by the site. Days or times of internship may not be rearranged without permission from appropriate school personnel and the site supervisor. In the event a student will be absent from a site, the student must call the site and the appropriate school official in advance. If the site supervisor or school/ program official determines that a student is not reliable for any reason, including absences, the student may be removed from the site and may be dismissed from the program. In any case, if a student misses five or more consecutive days of their internship assignment, the student may be dismissed from school. Students are required to complete 100% of required internship hours. Students will not be considered to have completed their internship until the site supervisor and appropriate school official has certified all required attendance hours. Internship Conduct Internship sites are professional environments where students are expected to conduct themselves in a mature, professional manner appropriate for the workplace. Students are expected to arrive and leave on time and perform their duties in a reliable and responsible manner. Students may not substitute or replace paid staff members. Students are expected to obey the rules and regulations of the internship site and program. The site has the right to remove any student who demonstrates disregard for program and/or site policies and procedures. 123

Academic Affairs (CONTINUED) UNDERGRADUATE SATISFACTORY ACADEMIC PROGRESS POLICY Effective October 1, 2014 Applicable to every student enrolled in diploma and undergraduate degree programs, the Satisfactory Academic Progress Policy ensures that students make satisfactory progress towards successful completion of their academic programs. The evaluation points and milestones contained in the policy are meant to identify problems for which actions of early intervention and/ or remediation can be taken. Most critical to this policy is a student s ability to enroll in and complete courses on a consistent manner. This ability is measured in two ways: cumulative grade-point-average (CGPA); and incremental completion rate (ICR). Failure to complete courses successfully for any reason may negatively affect Satisfactory Academic Progress. Failing courses or withdrawing from courses could result in the loss of financial aid and academic dismissal. In order for a student to graduate the minimum requirements are 1. CGPA of 2.0, 2. ICR 66.67%, and; 3. Completion of the program without attempting more than 150% of the credits in the program. The College has the right to modify the Satisfactory Academic Progress Policy at any time. Criteria for Honors Designations To promote academic excellence and to recognize exemplary academic achievement, the following system is recommended for honor designations on a quarter basis and upon graduation. Quarter Honors Designations (at the completion of a quarter ) Any student who enrolls for and completes 12 credits or more is eligible for the following designations: Quarter GPA Honors Designation 4.0 President s Honor List 3.7-3.99 Dean s Honor List 3.5-3.69 Honor Roll Honors Designation at Graduation Students who achieve a CGPA of 3.5 or better are designated as Honor Graduates. Transitional studies courses are not considered when evaluating honors designations. Milestones and Evaluation Points for Satisfactory Academic Progress Compliance with Standards of Academic Progress is reviewed every quarter for all Certificate and Diploma programs. Certificate and Diploma Programs: 1. At the end of the first quarter, students must attain a minimum CGPA of 1.0 and an ICR of 33.33%. Anything below these milestones will result in Academic/Financial Aid Warning for one quarter. Students who are only participating in Transitional Studies courses are considered to be maintaining Satisfactory Academic Progress (SAP). 2. At the end of the second quarter, students must attain a minimum CGPA of 1.5 and an ICR of 50.00%. Anything below these milestones will result in Academic/Financial Aid Warning for one quarter unless the student was on Academic/Financial Aid Warning in his or her previous quarter. If the student was on Academic/Financial Aid Warning in the previous quarter, failure to meet these standards will result in Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal. Students who are only participating in Transitional studies courses are considered to be maintaining SAP. 3. At the end of the third quarter, and every quarter thereafter, students must attain a minimum CGPA of 2.0 and an ICR of 66.67%. Anything below these milestones will result in Academic/Financial Aid Warning for one quarter unless the student was on Academic/Financial Aid Warning in his or her previous quarter. If the student was on Academic/Financial Aid Warning in the previous quarter, failure to meet these standards will result in Academic/ Financial Aid Dismissal. 4. Students may not attempt more than 150% of the credits in their programs; anything in excess of 150% of the credits will result in Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal. Dismissal for violating the maximum timeframe (MTF) can happen at any time. 5. Students should note that if they are on Academic/Financial Aid Warning, it will be very difficult to meet the minimum requirements of the next evaluation point. Students should consult with their academic advisor concerning their exact requirements. 124

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA 6. Transitional Studies courses are based on the result of the academic assessment tool. Like any course, students must successfully complete such courses in order to progress in the program. Transitional Studies course credits do not count towards the total number of credits for graduation nor do they count in the CGPA. Additionally, the courses do not count in determining the maximum time frame allowable to earn the certificate or diploma or in the incremental completion rate as attempted credits and, if successful, earned credits. 7. Transitional Studies courses do have credit hours assigned to them for enrollment and tuition charging purposes. While Transitional Studies courses are not included in the CGPA, a student who attempts but does not pass or withdraws from the same Transitional Studies course three times is dismissed and there is no right to appeal the termination. 8. Students on Academic/Financial Aid Warning are considered to be making progress toward meeting Standards of Satisfactory Academic Progress and, if otherwise eligible may receive financial aid. 9. The grades, grade point average, cumulative data for all courses a student attempted at the Institution, as well as courses successfully transferred in from prior postsecondary education, are available on the student portal for review. There is also an indication if a student is on Academic/ Financial Aid Warning, on Academic/Financial Aid Probation, or on Academic/ Financial Aid Dismissal. CERTIFICATE/DIPLOMA Evaluation Point End of 1st Quarter End of 2nd Quarter End of 3rd Quarter and every quarter thereafter Anything in excess of 150% MTF Both Milestones (CGPA and ICR) Must be Met Required Action < 1.0 and/or 33.33% Academic/Financial Aid Warning < 1.5 and/or 50.00% Academic/Financial Aid Warning (if 1st time)/ Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal (if on Academic/Financial Aid < 2.0 and/or 66.67% Academic/Financial Aid Warning (if 1st time)/ Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal (if on Warning) Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal Please note that if you do not pass the same Transitional Studies course after three attempts, the result will be Academic / Financial Aid Dismissal with no right to appeal the dismissal. Unless otherwise noted, Academic/Financial Aid Dismissals can be appealed. Please see the Appeal Process on page. 10. Compliance with SAP is reviewed every quarter for Certificate and Diploma programs. A student who starts or re-enters at a MID session will have that session count as an entire quarter for SAP purposes. 125

Academic Affairs (CONTINUED) Degree Programs: Degree programs are evaluated after a student has attempted three quarters and sixth quarters (including portions of a quarter) during the first six quarters. After the sixth quarter, the student is evaluated at the end of each quarter. While grades, GPAs, and Incremental Completion Rates are made available at the end of a student s quarter, they are informational only except at evaluation points. Please note students may be alerted of their progress at any time and may be required to take specific action. 1. At the end of the first academic year (an academic year is three (3) quarters in which courses are attempted in each quarter); students must achieve a minimum CGPA of 1.25 and an ICR of 50.0%. Anything below these milestones will result in Academic/ Financial Aid Dismissal. 2. At the end of the second academic year, students must attain a minimum CGPA of 2.0 and an ICR of 66.67%. Anything below these milestones will result in Academic/ Financial Aid Dismissal. 3. Starting the quarter after the sixth attempted quarter, and every quarter thereafter, students are evaluated at the end of each quarter and must attain a minimum CGPA of 2.0 and an ICR of 66.67%. Failure to meet these standards will result in Academic/ Financial Aid Warning unless the student was on Financial Aid Warning the previous quarter. If the student was on Academic/Financial Aid Warning in the previous quarter, failure to meet these standards will result in Academic/ Financial Aid Dismissal. 4. Students may not attempt more than 150% of the credits in their programs; anything in excess of 150% of the credits will result in Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal. Dismissal for violating the maximum timeframe (MTF) can happen at any time. 5. Placement into Transitional Studies courses are based on the result of the academic assessment tool. Like any course, students must successfully complete such courses in order to progress in the program. Transitional studies course credits do not count towards the total number of credits for graduation nor do they count in the CGPA. Additionally, the transitional study course(s) do not count in determining the maximum time frame allowable to earn the degree and do not count in the incremental completion rate as attempted credits and, if successful, earned credits. Please note that the student will be dismissed immediately if the student does not successfully complete the same Transitional Study upon a third attempt. 6. Transitional Studies courses do have credit hours assigned to them for enrollment and tuition charging purposes. While Transitional Studies courses are not included in the CGPA, a student who attempts but does not pass or withdraws from the same Transitional Studies course three times is dismissed and there is no right to appeal the dismissal. 7. The grades, grade point average, cumulative data for all courses a student attempted at the Institution, as well as courses successfully transferred in from prior postsecondary education, are available on the student portal for review. There is also an indication if a student is on Academic/Financial Aid Warning, on Academic/Financial Aid Probation or on Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal. 8. For Degree programs, compliance with SAP is reviewed every academic year during a student s first two years and then quarterly thereafter. A student who starts or re-enters at a MID session will have that session count as an entire quarter for SAP purposes. 126

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Degree Programs Evaluation Point Both Milestones (CGPA and ICR) Must be Met Required Action End of First Academic Year < 1.25 and 50% Academic/ Financial Aid Dismissal End of Second Academic Year < 2.0 and/or 66.67% Academic / Financial Aid Dismissal End of Seventh Quarter and Thereafter < 2.0 and/or 66.67% Academic/Financial Aid Warning (if 1st time)/ Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal (if on Academic/Financial Aid Warning) At anytime in excess of 150% MTF Academic/Financial Aid Dismissa Please note that if you do not pass the same Transitional Studies course after three attempts, the result will be Academic / Financial Aid Dismissal with no right to appeal the dismissal. Unless otherwise noted, Academic/Financial Aid Dismissals may be appealed. Please see the Appeal Process below. A student enrolled in Transitional Studies courses must be able to pass the same Transitional Studies course after three attempts or that student will be placed on Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal. If the review of a student s Satisfactory Academic Progress performed at any time indicates that it is mathematically impossible to meet the minimum requirements of the Standards of Satisfactory Academic Progress policy at the next mandatory check point, the student will result in Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal from the Institution. To be removed from Academic/Financial Aid Warning or Academic/Financial Aid Probation, a student must meet the Satisfactory Academic Progress requirements at the applicable measuring point. 127

Academic Affairs (CONTINUED) 128 OTHER STANDARDS OF ACADEMIC PROGRESS Procedure for Appealing Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal A student who is dismissed for violating Satisfactory Academic Progress must appeal in writing to the Dean of Academic Affairs for re-entry before the start of the quarter in which he/she wishes to return. The written appeal must state the mitigating circumstances that contributed to the dismissal. The written appeal must be supported with appropriate documentation of the mitigating circumstances with an explanation on how the circumstances have been remedied or changed to ensure that he or she will be able to meet satisfactory academic progress if re-admitted. The Dean of Academic Affairs or an Appeals Committee will review the student s appeal and will determine within 14 business days of the date of the receipt of the appeal whether the circumstances and academic status warrant consideration for re-admission. The student may be asked to appear in person during the review process when deemed necessary by the Dean of Academic Affairs or the Appeals Committee. Upon the Appeals Committee decision, the student will be notified by the Dean of Academic Affairs both verbally and in writing. The Appeals Committee decision will be final. Following is a comprehensive list of events that indicate there may be a mitigating circumstance which has negatively impacted academic progress: Death of an immediate family member Student illness requiring hospitalization (this includes mental health issues) Illness of an immediate family member where the student is the primary caretaker Illness of an immediate family member where the family member is the primary financial support Abusive relationships Divorce proceedings Previously undocumented disability Work-related transfer during the period Change in work schedule during the period Natural disaster Family emergency Financial hardship such as foreclosure or eviction Loss of transportation where there are no alternative means of transportation Documentation from a Professional Counselor A doctor documented illness of the student for a significant period of time Military deployment Military Permanent Change of Station (PCS) Students should understand that by having a mitigating circumstance it does not automatically mean the appeal will be approved. The Appeal Committee will review that the student sufficiently providing documentation of the mitigating circumstance (as outlined above) and that the student has resolved the mitigating circumstance. A student who is successful in his or her appeal is able to apply for re-entry and if otherwise eligible, receive financial aid for one quarter; however, the student will be placed on Academic/Financial Aid Probation at the start of the academic quarter. A student on Academic/ Financial Aid Probation may receive financial aid (if otherwise eligible) for one quarter. If the appeal is denied, aid cannot be paid and the student is dismissed. Students who have an appeal denied can reapply however the passage of time by itself does not impact the Appeal Committee s decision. The Dean of Academic Affairs is responsible for determining the appropriateness of the mitigating Circumstance in regards to severity, timing and duration of the mitigating circumstance, and for determining whether the student s situation has changed that would allow the student to demonstrate satisfactory academic progress at the end of the Academic/Financial Aid Probation or the end of the period of the Academic Plan. Any consideration of the conditions outside of the list provided should be discussed with the Art Institute Vice President of Academic Affairs. Student life issues and making the transition to college are not considered mitigating circumstances under this policy. Documentation from a professional counselor should not breach the student/counselor relationship and should remain confidential. A memorandum or letter on school or organizational letterhead indicating a counselor s opinion that the student issues may be accommodated to ensure that the student will be able to meet Satisfactory Academic Progress will suffice as proof

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA of mitigating circumstances as well as documentation that the student s circumstances have been remedied or changed to ensure that the student will be able to meet Satisfactory Academic Progress with the accommodations from the institution. If a student s appeal is successful, the student will be placed on Academic/Financial Aid Probation for one quarter. Academic Advisors, Registrars, and/or Academic Department Chairs/Program Directors must document and maintain as part of the appeals process a concrete plan for how a student will complete his remaining coursework by the next measurement point as well as how the student s progression will be monitored. The Academic Plan must detail specific time frames and student success measures and cannot be greater than one (1) quarter for certificate or diploma programs certificate or diploma programs in length but for degree programs may be up to two (2) quarters. The Academic Plan must be reviewed with the student to ensure that designated Academic Plan is being met and the student is on track to achieve the success measures within the approved timeframe. Failure to meet the established goals approved in the appeal will result in Academic/ Financial Aid Dismissal. Registrars will ensure that Academic Advisors or Academic Department Directors have notified students in writing that they are in Academic Warning/Financial Aid Warning, Academic Probation/ Financial Aid Probation, or Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal with a student signed SAPP Prediction Calculation Form or other local documentation. A student denied an appeal must sit out one year before being eligible to apply for re-entry. Also, any student who ceased attendance and whose grades in the last quarter of attendance caused him or her to not meet the minimum standards of the Satisfactory Academic Progress must go through the same appeal process. The appeal procedure described in the preceding section applies. The student must demonstrate resolution to any mitigating circumstances and demonstrate that he or she will be able to meet satisfactory academic progress if re-admitted. If the appeal is granted, the reentering student will be placed on Academic/Financial Aid Probation at the start of his or her quarter of return. The student must meet the standards of Satisfactory Academic Progress by the end of his or her first quarter if in a diploma program and up to the second quarter if in a degree program (but only if there is a documented Academic Plan between the Institution and the student) to continue in the program. The student may be asked to retake courses previously failed in order to raise both the CPGA and ICR. If a student was initially denied a re-entry appeal and sat out for one year before attempting to re-enter, the student must submit a second appeal for consideration for reentry. If the second re-entry appeal is denied, no additional appeals may be allowed and the student is permanently academically dismissed. Upon the Appeals Committee decision, the student is notified by the Dean of Academic Affairs both verbally and in writing. The Appeals Committee decision will be final. Any student who is on Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal can no longer attend school nor get Title IV at the Institution. Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal Appeals not Allowed A student who attempts but does not pass the same Transitional Studies course three times is Dismissed and there is not a right to appeal the dismissal. Explanations of Related Issues Calculation of CGPA A student s cumulative grade point average is calculated by a) Multiplying credits for each course by grade points associated with the grade earned; b) Totaling the grade points earned for all the courses, and c) Dividing total grade points earned by the total number of quality credits. The Institute uses a 4.00 scale in assigning grade points. Note: that if there is a change of programs, only courses applicable to the new program will be considered in the CGPA. Transitional Studies Courses Many Art Institutes require academic assessments. Depending on assessment scores, students may be required to take Transitional Studies courses. Students must successfully complete such courses in order to progress in the program. Transitional Studies course credits do not count towards the total number of credits for graduation nor do they count in the CGPA. Additionally, they do not count in determining the maximum timeframe and the incremental completion rate. 129

Academic Affairs (CONTINUED) 130 While Transitional Studies course(s) are not included in the CGPA, each individual Transitional Studies course may be attempted no more than three times. Failure to pass the courses within the attempts permitted will result in dismissal from the Institution and there is no right to appeal the dismissal. Repeated Courses and Grades As courses are retaken, only the highest grade will count in the GPA/CGPA. All attempts are included in the credit hours attempted for the purposes of calculating the incremental completion rate (ICR). Withdrawn and failing grades are included in the maximum allowable timeframe and incremental completion rate as credit hours attempted but not earned. The grade Incomplete (I) is calculated as if it is an F for CGPA and ICR purposes until it is changed to another grade and the course will be included as credits attempted but not credits earned until it is changed to another grade. Remediation of Academic Deficiencies It is strongly recommended that any student with withdrawn or failing grades enroll in the same course(s) in the subsequent quarter to improve academic performance. Transfer Credits from another Postsecondary Institution Credits from transfer courses are calculated in the maximum allowable credits and incremental completion rate requirements as credits attempted and credits earned. Grades for credits transferred from any other postsecondary institution will be recorded as Transfer Credit (TR) and will not be calculated in the student s CGPA Change of Program Students will be allowed one change of program. Changing from a day program to an evening program of the same major is not considered a change of major. Changing from an associate s program to a bachelor s program in the same major is not considered a change of major. Courses that apply to the second major will be recorded as earned credit and will affect the student s CGPA and will be included as credits attempted and credits earned. Students who change programs must sign a new program enrollment agreement which must be filed in the student s academic file. Note: If a student is at the point of dismissal for Satisfactory Academic Progress in the first major, that student must be put on Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal, appeal the dismissal, have the appeal granted based on mitigating circumstances before transferring to the new major. Under no circumstances can a request to change majors circumvent a dismissal of Satisfactory Academic Progress. In cases in which a student has graduated from one program in the Institution then subsequently begins work in a different program, grades earned in the first program, if applicable to the new program, will be recorded with the letter grades and thus will be included in the Cumulative Grade Point Average and will be included in the Incremental Completion Rate as credits attempted and credits earned. Transfers from another Art Institute A student must be maintaining Satisfactory Academic Progress in order to be allowed the opportunity of transferring from one program to another or from one school or campus to another. A student who is on Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal and wishes to transfer to another affiliated Art Institute must appeal his/her Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal at the originating school and receive reinstatement prior to the transfer. An affiliated Art Institute is any campus that shares the same leading six-digit OPE-ID number with the originating school. Campuses that share the same leading six-digit OPE-ID number are the same institution. Please note that course credits and applicability of those credits at each Art Institute for a program can vary from location to location. Please carefully discuss any possible transfer with the Art Institute you wish to attend. The Metrics of SAP Academic Grading System The grading system incorporates letter grades, equivalent numeric values and letter codes as follows: Letter Grade Quality Points A 4.0 A- 3.7 B+ 3.4 B 3.0 B- 2.7 C+ 2.4 C 2.0 C- 1.7 D+ 1.4 D 1.0 F 0.0 * *F does compute in GPA and CGPA and does count as credit attempted.

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Other Grade Codes worth Zero Quality Points: CR = Credit through examination Credits Earned/TR grade. This does not affect CGPA. They do impact ICR and MTF. I = Incomplete Affects ICR/MTF/CGPA (Computes as an F) IPA = Incomplete Pass This grade is assigned only when some portion of a course has not been completed for good and sufficient reason. Courses in which IPA grades are assigned must be completed no later than the end of the next regular term in which the student is enrolled or the grade will be recorded as F on the permanent record in the term in which the grade is granted to replace the IPA. IPA does not affect CGPA/ICR/MTF. S = Suspension Affects ICR/MTF/CGPA (Computes as an F) NC = No Credit NP = Not passing/fail P = Proficiency Credit by Exam or Portfolio PA = Pass SP or SA = Satisfactory/Pass This grade is reserved for zero-credit courses only. Non-credit courses are not computed in the CGPA/ ICR/ MTF. Does not affect ICR/CGPA. This grade designation is utilized to indicate that a student did not acceptably complete a non credited course This does not affect CGPA. They do impact ICR and MTF. This grade designation is utilized to indicate that a student acceptably completed a non credited course. Does not affect ICR/MTF/CGPA. This grade designation is utilized to indicate that a student acceptably completed a non credited course. Does not affect ICR/MTF/CGPA. T = Termination from course Affects ICR/MTF/CGPA (Computes as an F) TR = External Transfer Credit U = Unsatisfactory W = Withdrawal WF = Withdrawal Fail WV = Waiver WX = Course was registered for but never attended Grade designation utilize for transfer credits. This does not affect CGPA. They do impact ICR and MTF. Indicates that a student unsuccessfully completed a non-credited course. Does not affect ICR/MTF/CGPA. When a student withdraws from the total program of study by the end of the ninth week of the quarter or from individual classes after drop/ add but before the end of the ninth week of the quarter. The W is not used in the calculation of the GPA or CGPA but is considered attempted credits but not earned credits. When a student withdraws from individual classes or a total academic program of study after the ninth week of classes. The WF is calculated as an F in the GPA and CGPA. The WF also counts as attempted credits and not earned credits. Commonly used when waiving a Transitional course and does not affect ICR/MTF/CGPA Self-explanatory and does not affect ICR/MTF/CGPA Students receive grades at the end of each quarter including mid-quarter. The grade report contains both the grade point average for the quarter (GPA) and cumulative grade point average (CGPA) for the program. When a course is repeated after failure, the grade earned upon repeating the class replaces the original grade in determining the grade point average, though the failing grade will still appear on the transcript. 131

Academic Affairs (CONTINUED) 132 Repeating Courses Grades earned in repeated courses will replace grades of F, W, or WF. Course credits with grades of F, W, or WF are included in the maximum time frame (MTF) and incremental completion rate (ICR) requirements as credits attempted but not earned. Students with incomplete grades will receive an F if a grade change is not submitted by the end of the second week of the following term. The grade I indicates Incomplete and is calculated as if it is an F until it is changed to another grade and the course will be included as course credits attempted, but not earned. Only if it is part of an Academic Plan may students retake courses in which they received a passing grade in order to improve their CGPA but can retake a course passed only one additional time. Credits from all repeated courses are included as credits attempted. The highest grade earned will be used in the CGPA calculations. Transfer Students Transfer credits from other post-secondary institutions are calculated in the maximum time frame allowable credits and incremental completed rate requirements. Therefore, the maximum number of attempted credits for a student with transfer credit is still one and onehalf times the number of credits required to complete a program for graduation. Example: if a student transfers in 36 credits to a program consisting of 180 credits, the calculation would be 180 X 1.5 = 270 credits. Therefore, the 36 transfer credits would be considered attempted and earned so only 234 more credits could be attempted. Grades for credits transferred in from any post-secondary institution (including an Art Institute) will be recorded as TR in the Student Information System and will not affect the student s CGPA. Students wishing to transfer from one Art Institute to another may do so only if they are in good standing at the sending school. If the student is transferring to a different institution (as defined by the Department of Education as a campus that does not share the same leading six-digit OPE-ID number), then he or she is treated as a student transferring in from an unaffiliated institution. Any student dismissed for violation satisfactory academic progress cannot transfer or be considered a New student (if they had a break in enrollment) at another affiliated Art Institute until he or she has been granted an appeal at the original school and is deemed to be making satisfactory academic progress. Second Degree When a student has graduated from The Art Institute in one program, then subsequently begins work in a different program, grades used in the CGPA of the previous program will be applied to the student s new program CGPA calculation. Satisfactory Academic Progress for Educational Benefits which are not Title IV Funds Please note that in order to receive and/or retain certain education benefits from a source other than the Department of Education, it may require a higher cumulative grade point average and/or a higher incremental completion rate. Examples of these education benefits are State Grants, Veterans Benefits, Department of Defense (TA) benefits or employee reimbursements. Please check with the Student Financial Service Office for details. RETAKING COURSEWORK POLICY Effective July 1, 2011, ED amends the full-time enrollment status definition for programs at term-based institutions. In a standard term-based program, students who retake previously completed coursework are considered eligible for additional Title IV assistance, even if the students will not receive credit for that coursework in addition to credits already received. To comply with this provision and to assist students with managing appropriate FSA loan balances, EDMC has implemented the following policy on retaking coursework for standard term and non-term based programs. In a notification issued by NASFAA on October 4, 2012, the agency has received reaffirmation from the Department of Education (ED) that its guidance on retaking coursework provisions found at 668.2 of the General Provisions regulations apply only to undergraduate students. ED stated it will issue a Dear Colleague Letter for the purpose of stating the current policy in a more official manner. Standard Term-based Undergraduate Programs Students enrolled in standard term-based undergraduate programs will receive Title IV funds for unlimited retakes of failed courses and withdrawn courses with no credits earned as long as the student is meeting the satisfactory academic progress (SAP) standards. Although there is no limit on how many times students can repeat failed or withdrawn courses for FSA purposes, some EDMC s Educational Systems have limitations on how many

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA times students can retake failed courses before they are dismissed from the institution. Please refer to the school s SAP Policy. For standard term-based undergraduate programs, EDMC s policy will allow financial aid to cover a single repetition of a previously successfully passed course subject to certain conditions. Students who earned credit(s) may receive Title IV funds for one retake of any previously passed course only if they meet one of the following conditions: Specific State or Accreditation regulations require a student to retake a course which was previously successfully passed, as defined under Stale Course. Required as part of an academic plan if a student has successfully appealed a Satisfactory Academic Progress (SAP) termination, as defined under Progress or Professional Requirements. For students who need a specific grade or G.P.A. to practice upon graduation or progress in a program, as defined under Progress or Professional Requirements. The student must have completed the course for it to be considered a repetition under this policy. Because only one repetition of a previously passed course may be included in the a student s enrollment status for purposes of Title IV aid, if the student failed the repeated course, the student is not eligible for an additional retake because the student is considered to have completed the course. Non-term Based Undergraduate Programs Student s coursework is divided into payment periods based the credit hours and weeks of instructional time in the program or the academic year, whichever is less. A student must successfully complete the credit hours and instructional weeks in a payment period, or withdrawal, in order to advance to the next payment period and academic year. Students who fail or withdrawal from a course will not earn credits for the payment period and academic year. Students who successfully completed a course (earned credits) and wish to repeat the course to earn a better grade or G.P.A., the course attempted and earned credits will not be included in the payment period and academic year credits requirement. Students may only use FSA funds to cover such repeated courses to the extent excess funds are available in the academic year. GRADING QUARTER CREDIT HOUR DEFINITION A quarter credit hour is an amount of work represented in intended learning outcomes and verified by evidence of student achievement that is an institutionally established equivalency that reasonably approximates not less than: 1. One hour of classroom or direct faculty instruction and a minimum of two hours of outof-class, student work each week for 10-12 weeks, or the equivalent amount of work over a different amount of time; or 2. At least an equivalent amount of work as required in paragraph (1) of this definition for other academic activities as established by the institution including laboratory work, internships, studio work, and other academic work leading to the award of credit hours. INCOMPLETE GRADE POLICY The Art Institutes International Minnesota does not give grades of incomplete. GRADE CHANGE REQUESTS A formal request for a grade review must be made by the student to the Academic Director and approved by the Dean of Academic Affairs no later than Week 3 of the quarter following the quarter in which the grade was earned. TRANSFER CREDIT Contact the office of The Dean of Academic Affairs for all matters related to Transfer Credit and Program Change. 133

Academic Affairs (CONTINUED) TRANSFER OF CREDIT BETWEEN ART INSTITUTES SCHOOLS Associate s Degree Graduates to Bachelor s Degree Programs: A serious attempt will be made to ensure that all associate s degree credits earned by graduates of an Art Institutes school will transfer to the corresponding bachelor s degree program within the system. Such graduates will attain upper division status. However, differing state and accrediting regulations may require additional courses at the associate s degree level. If the associate s degree transferred by the graduate has been updated with the addition of new competencies, the Dean of Academic Affairs has the discretionary authority to add a course(s) at the associate s degree level. Associate s degree credits earned by graduates of an Art Institutes school for which there is no corresponding bachelor s degree program, will be evaluated on a course-by-course basis for applicability to the new program of study. Only those courses and credits required for graduation in the new program of study will be accepted. All conditions in the following associate s degree credits to associate s degree credits to associate s/bachelor s degree program procedure apply. Allowable Total Transfer of Credit Students must earn a minimum of 25 percent of the total program credits required for graduation in residency. Therefore, students may only be granted a maximum of 75 percent of the total program credits required for graduation through transfer credit earned at an outside institution, including other Art Institutes campuses. Due to regulatory considerations, at some Art Institutes schools, the minimum percentage of total program credits that must be earned in residency may vary from the standard above. Transcripts Official Transcripts must be sent to the Admissions Office of the admitting Art Institutes School prior to the class start. Transcripts submitted after the student s first quarter of attendance at The Art Institutes school may be considered for transfer credit, at the discretion of the Dean of Academic Affairs. Associate s Degree Credits to Associate s/ Bachelor s Degree Program: Associate s degree credits, with a grade of C of better, from an Art Institutes school, earned by students who do not hold an associate s degree, will transfer to the same program at the associate s degree or bachelor s degree level. Differing state and accrediting regulations may require additional courses at the associate s degree level. If the associate degree transferred by the student has been updated with the addition of new competencies, the Dean of Academic Affairs has the discretionary authority to add a course(s) at the associate s degree level and/or bachelor s degree level. Transcripts Official transcripts must be sent to the Admissions Office of the admitting Art Institute School prior to the class start. Transcripts submitted after the student s first quarter of attendance at an Art Institutes school may be considered for transfer credit, at the discretion of the Dean of Academic Affairs. Course Descriptions The official descriptions of the courses submitted for transfer credit must be comparable to the coursework at an Art Institutes school. Official course descriptions from the sending college or a college catalog will be used to determine comparability and must be received prior to the class start. Level of Transfer Credits Only college-level credits (100 level course or equivalent) taken at an accredited institution of higher education will be considered for transfer. No remedial courses will be considered. Grades of Transfer Credits Only courses with earned graded of C (2.0) or better will be considered for transfer Credit.Course Prerequisites and Sequence of Courses Course Prerequisites and course sequences are to be observed to assure appropriate student skill development. The Dean of Academic Affairs has the ability to waive a prerequisite requirement and approve courses take out of sequence. Proficiency Credit Official documents (CLEP or AP scores) related to transfer or proficiency credit must be received by an Art Institutes school prior to the class start. No more than 25 percent of program credits will be considered for any type of proficiency credit. 134

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Class Proficiency Test Requests for testing out of specific classes approved by the Institute must be made through the Department Director prior to the class start. No more than 25 percent of program credits will be considered for any type of proficiency credit. Portfolio Review Requests for portfolio review, and/or relevant work experience documented by appropriate samples of work outcomes, references, and verification of employment must be received prior to the class start. Allowable Total Transfer of Credit Students must earn a minimum of 25 percent of the total program credits required for graduation in residency. Therefore, students may only be granted a maximum of 75 percent of the total program credits required for graduation through transfer credit earned at an outside institution, including other Art Institutes campuses. Due to regulatory considerations, at some Art Institutes schools, the minimum percentage of total program credits that must be earned in residency may vary from the standard above. LIMITATION TO ONLINE EDUCATION QUOTIENT: Based on government and accreditation standards related to consortium agreements, students are limited in the total number of credits that can be earned in an online delivery mode. Students are required to complete more than 50% of their program credits in residence at the Art Institute School into which they have enrolled and from which they hope to graduate. Once the threshold of 50 percent program credits has been exceeded, the student must be transferred to The Art Institute of Pittsburgh Online Division for the completion of the program. Transfer between Art Institute campuses does not guarantee that all credits earned will transfer to the same program at the receiving campus, including The Art Institute of Pittsburgh Online Division. TRANSFER OF DEGREES AND COURSE CREDIT FROM COLLEGES AND UNIVERSITIES BEFORE MATRICULATION AT AN ART INSTUTES SCHOOL Transcripts Official transcripts must be sent to the Admissions Office of the admitting Art Institutes school prior to the class start. Transcripts submitted after the student s first quarter of attendance at an Art Institutes school may be considered for transfer credit, at the discretion of the Dean of Academic Affairs Course Descriptions The official descriptions of the courses submitted for transfer credit must be comparable to the coursework at an Art Institutes school. Official course descriptions from the sending college or a college catalog will be used to determine comparability and must be received prior to the class start. Level of Transfer Credits Only college-level credits (100 level course or equivalent) taken at an accredited institution of higher education will be considered for transfer. No remedial courses will be considered. Grades of Transfer Credits Courses with earned graded of C (2.0) or better will be considered for transfer credit. Course Prerequisites and Sequence of Courses Course prerequisites and course sequences are to be observed to assure appropriate student skill development Proficiency Credit from External Sources Official documents (CLEP or AP scores) related to transfer or proficiency credit must be received by an Art Institutes school prior to the class start. No more than 25 percent of program credits will be considered for any type of proficiency credit. Advanced Placement. Some foundation courses can be obtained through College Board s AP Studio examinations. Students who take the College Board Advanced Placement (AP) or International Baccalaureate (IB) courses and score three or higher on the AP exam or four or higher on the IB exam for those courses while in secondary school may receive proficiency credit. This score applies to all subjects. All materials must be received from the Scholastic College Board organization and evaluated prior to the end of the schedule adjustment period (add/drop) of the student s first quarter of attendance. College Level Examination Program (CLEP). Complete the College Level Examination Program (CLEP) and earn a score of 50 or higher on computer-based CLEP examinations equivalent to University courses prior to the end of the scheduled adjustment period (add/drop) of the student s first quarter of attendance. 135

Academic Affairs (CONTINUED) 136 Articulation Agreement Credit. Successfully complete programs included in articulation agreements that have been established between the University and their high schools. Military Experience Credits. Complete training, employment, or other educational experience in the military as measured through DANTES, DSST examinations, or as shown on an American Council on Education (ACE) transcript. The Art Institutes International Minnesota recognizes and uses the ACE Guide to the Evaluation of Educational Experience in the Armed Services to determine the value of learning acquired in military service. We award credit for appropriate learning acquired in military service at levels consistent with ACE Guide recommendations when applicable to a Service member s program. In addition, we utilize Joint Services Transcript in our processing of prior learning experiences for possible transfer credit. Internal Proficiency Testing for Credit. Requests for testing out of specific courses approved by the Institute must be made through the Department Director prior to the class start. Experiential Learning. Students may request advanced standing for experiential learning. Students will present relevant work or life experiences for review by the Dean of Academic Affairs or designee. The Dean of Academic Affairs or designee will have the necessary forms for the student to complete. Documentation such as portfolios, writing samples, publications, verification of employment, and references represents a sampling of what may be requested by the Department Chair from the student in order for the advanced standing review to be completed. Portfolio Review for Credit. Requests for portfolio review, and/or relevant work experience documented by appropriate samples of work outcomes, references, and verification of employment must be received prior to the class start. Class Proficiency Test Requests for testing out of specific classes approved by the Institute must be made through the department Director prior to the class start. No more than 25 percent credits will be considered for any type of proficiency credit. Allowable Total Transfer of Credit Students must earn a minimum of 25 percent of the total program credits required for graduation in residency. Therefore, students may only be granted a maximum of 75 percent of the total program credits required for graduation through transfer credit earned at an outside institution, including other Art Institutes campuses. Due to regulatory considerations, at some Art Institutes schools, the minimum percentage of total program credits that must be earned in residency may vary from the standard above. TRANSFER CREDIT AFTER MATRICULATION (CONCURRENT ENROLLMENT OR RE-ENTRY TO THE INSTITUTIONAL) AT AN ART INSTITUTES SCHOOL NOTE: Transfer credit after matriculation must be completed prior to the student s final term of study. Concurrent Enrollment: Requests for transfer of credit from accredited institutions of higher education, for a course taken concurrently with an Art Institutes school full-time schedule, after a student s matriculation at an Art Institutes school may be made to the Dean of Academic Affairs. Transfer Credit may be awarded if all other criteria for transfer of credit are met, and if the institution permits concurrent enrollment. Approval Needed Requests for concurrent enrollment in a course at another college or university while the student is on full-time status at an Art Institutes school (according to the US Department of Education s definition of the term) must be approved by the General Education Director, the Department Director, or the Dean of Academic Affairs prior to enrollment in the course. Full-time Status The student must be enrolled full-time at an Art Institutes school at all times during the concurrent enrollment at another college or university. One Course Limit Only one course per quarter in concurrent enrollment will be accepted. Grading The concurrent enrollment course must be passed with a grade of C or better. The student s record at The Art Institute will reflect a TR grade. The grade will not be factored into the GPA or the CGPA.

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Completion Deadline Credit will be awarded for the course when documentation is produced that the course was successfully completed. Allowable Total Transfer of Credit Students must earn a minimum of 25 percent of the total program credits required for graduation in residency. Therefore, students may only be granted a maximum of 75 percent of the total program credits required for graduation through transfer credit earned at an outside institution, including other Art Institutes campuses. Due to regulatory considerations, at some Art Institutes schools, the minimum percentage of total program credits that must be earned in residency may vary from the standard above. Transcripts Official Transcripts must be sent to the Dean of Academic Affairs upon successful completion of the concurrent enrollment course. Transfer Credit Upon Re-Entry to the Institution: Requests for transfer of credit from accredited institutions of higher education, for a course taken while a student was not in attendance at an Art Institutes school, but after a student s initial matriculation at the school may be made to the Dean of Academic Affairs. Transfer Credit may be awarded if all other criteria for transfer of credit are met. Grading The course(s) must be passed with a grade of C or better. The student s record at an Art Institutes school will reflect a TR grade. The grade will not be factored into the GPA or the CGPA. CHANGE OF PROGRAM WITHIN AN ART INSTITUTES SCHOOL A student petitioning to transfer from one program to another within The Art Institute must obtain approval from the Department Director of the department from which the student is transferring. The student s coursework and earned credits will be reviewed for applicability to the new program. Only those credits required for graduation in the new program will be transferred to the new program and counted toward graduation. Only one change of program is allowed per student. TRANSFERABILITY OF CREDIT TO OTHER INSTITUTIONS The Art Institute is licensed by [INSERT LICENSING AGENCY NAME] to confer the (insert degree name Bachelor of Science, Associate of Science, etc.) and accredited by the [INSERT ACCREDITING AGENCY NAME], an accrediting agency recognized by the United States Department of Education. However, the fact that a school is licensed and accredited is not necessarily an indication that credits earned at that school will be accepted by another school. In the U. S. higher education system, transferability of credit is determined by the receiving institution taking into account such factors as course content, grades, accreditation and licensing. The mission of The Art Institute is to help you to prepare for entry-level employment in your chosen field of study. The value of degree programs like those offered by The Art Institute is their deliberate focus on marketable skills. The credits earned are not intended as a stepping stone for transfer to another institution. For this reason, it is unlikely that the academic credits you earn at The Art Institute will transfer to another school. Programs offered by one school within The Art Institutes system may be similar to but not identical to programs offered at another school within the system. This is due to differences imposed by state law, use of different instructional models, and local employer needs. Therefore, if you decide to transfer to another school within The Art Institutes system, not all of the credits you earn at The Art Institute may be transferable into that school s program. If you are considering transferring to either another Art Institute or an unaffiliated school, it is your responsibility to determine whether that school will accept your Art Institute credits. We encourage you to make this determination as early as possible. The Art Institute does not imply, promise, or guarantee transferability of its credits to any other institution. TRANSFERRING TO ANOTHER ART INSTITUTE Students wishing to transfer from one Art Institutes school to another may do so only if they are in good standing at the sending school. Any student dismissed for academic progress cannot transfer to another Art Institute school until he or she has been reinstated at the sending school and is deemed to be making satisfactory academic progress. 137

Academic Affairs (CONTINUED) REGISTRATION REGISTRATION PROCEDURES Registration at The Art Institutes International Minnesota occurs on a quarterly basis and begins Week 4 of each quarter. Registration is on a first come first serve basis based on the number of earned credits. HOLDS Students should ensure that they have no holds. Students are informed of holds through their Student Portal account. Holds are unresolved issues with Financial Aid (SFS), Accounting (ACC), Admissions (ADM), Registrar (REG), Library (LRC), Advisors (ADV) or Academic Directors (ADD). Holds are for urgent matters that require attention. The department that places a student on hold is available to assist the student in resolving the issue. The student should immediately contact the department to clear the hold. Holds prevent students from borrowing material from the library, checking out equipment from the Cage, and obtaining official transcripts. REGISTRATION STEPS Students have two choices for registration: online through Student Portal accounts or in person with Campus Academic Advisor and via phone or e-mail with Academic Advisors at the Advising Center. The following chart provides students the appropriate steps to take to ensure timely registration. Steps for Registration: WEEK 4 1. The available courses for the next term will be posted on the Ai Minnesota Resources page. http://aim.aiiresources.com/ 2. Review degree audits through Student Portal accounts to verify what required courses are needed. Consult the current catalog to verify that prerequisites have been met. 3. Speak to an Academic Advisor to plan the appropriate courses for the next quarter. 4. Check Student Portal account for any holds and resolve those holds with the appropriate department. WEEK 7 1. Registration begins and is offered on a first come first served basis according to the number of earned credits: early registration allows more options for course times and availability. 2. Speak to an Academic Advisor or log into Student Portal accounts and use the self registration tool. 3. If using the self registration tool, after registering, log out of the student portal and then log back in, select the registration button, and click on the schedule button to verify that the registration was accepted. TAKING MORE THAN 16 CREDITS Students may request to take more than 16 credits by contacting their Academic Director. To make this request the student must be in good academic standing. The final decision will be made by the Dean of Academic Affairs. OFFICIAL SCHEDULE Students can view their official schedules on the student portal every quarter. The official schedule also contains the academic quarter calendar of important dates, including the schedule adjustment period, registration, days off, and start and end dates. Any class on a student s official schedule is a class for which s/he is officially registered and for which tuition is charged. Note: If a student is uncertain about the information listed on the Official Schedule, the student should see the Registrar or Academic Advisor within the schedule adjustment period. SCHEDULE ADJUSTMENT PERIOD A student may add or drop a course up until the end of the published schedule adjustment period for the quarter. This date is listed on the student s official schedule. When a student makes an adjustment during this time period, they are not charged for the course and it does not appear on an official transcript. Course changes during this time period must be made with one of the Academic Advisors. Failure to attend a course in the first week of the term does not result in the course being dropped from a student s schedule. Any course remaining on the student s enrollment registration at the end of schedule adjustment period will be subject to a tuition charge, and the course remains on the student s transcript. 138

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA WITHDRAWING FROM A COURSE It is the responsibility of the student to withdraw from courses in writing, using a course withdrawal form, which may be obtained from the Registrar s Office or from the appropriate Academic Advisor. A student who withdraws from a course during the second through ninth week of the quarter will be assigned a W code for each course. The W code is not used in the computation of the student s grade point average. A student who withdrawals after the 9th week will receive a WF code. The WF code is calculated as an F into the student s GPA. A student who drops a course after the schedule adjustment period through the end of the quarter will be charged the full course tuition rate. INSTRUCTIONAL TECHNOLOGY Technology is a tool that students are expected to utilize. Students must have access to computers and the internet to complete many required course assignments. THE STUDENT PORTAL The Student Portal provides access to school email accounts, web site space, and academic records. It is the responsibility of students to check their email accounts for important school information. To access Student Portal accounts, go to myaicampus.com. Student Portal usernames and passwords are used to access the Internet and WiFi on campus. ecompanion ecompanion is an electronic classroom that is accessed through the Student Portal. ecompanion allows access to syllabi, grades, and ebooks, and enables the posting of assignments. To access ecompanion, log in to the Student Portal, and click on the class title; this will provide the link to the ecompanion home screen. Digital Resources ebooks are electronic books that serve as textbooks for many on-campus and online courses. Students are charged a Digital Resource fee for a course that has an ebook. This fee is non-negotiable. ONLINE COURSES REGISTERING FOR ONLINE COURSES Registration for online classes opens during the same time as registration for on-ground classes. Deadlines for registering for online courses differ from those on campus courses; please speak to an Academic Advisor for specific deadlines. There are two online course sessions within an academic quarter, as defined by The Art Institute of Pittsburgh Online Division. Each session will run for 5 1/2 weeks during any 11 week quarter. To register for an online class, fill out an Online Registration Packet and receive approval from the Academic Director and/or Academic Advisor to take an online class, and return the Online Registration Packet by the specified deadline to the Academic Advisor. Students are not allowed to take only one Session I online class without also registering for a Session II online class or an on-campus course. Students are not allowed to take a course in Session I that is a prerequisite to the class they are registered for in Session II. A prerequisite must be completed the quarter before a student is registered for the follow up course. TEXTBOOKS FOR ONLINE CLASSES Once registered for an online course(s), the student will need to determine if there are required ebook(s) or hard copy textbook(s) for the class(es) in which he or she is enrolled. If your class requires an ebook, the book will be located in your online classroom once the class starts. You will be able to download a copy of the book on up to two computers. There is a Digital Resource fee associated with all ebooks that can be included in financial aid. Required hard copy textbooks for online courses are ordered online or can be purchased at a local bookstore if in stock. Information will be sent to the student in the registration confirmation e-mail regarding the requirements for ebook(s) and hard copy textbook(s). Required hard copy textbooks must be ordered and if necessary, delivered to the student s home. It is the student s responsibility to allow adequate time for book(s) to be ordered and delivered. ebooks are accessed through the Student Portal. Students click on the link to my on-campus classes and are directed to their ecompanion site. Once in the electronic classroom, students click on the Digital Resource link. This directs students to Vital Source; students should set up a Vital Source account to access their ebooks. ebooks may be downloaded to up to two non-campus devices. See tutorials in the Student Portal for further information. 139

Academic Affairs (CONTINUED) TECHNOLOGY REQUIREMENTS FOR ONLINE CLASSES Each online class may require the student to have access to and be proficient with various hardware and software applications. It is the student s responsibility to meet these requirements. For a full listing of software and hardware by class, you may contact the Academic Advisor or go to http://www.aionline.edu/catalog. It is also the students responsibility to keep their hardware and software up-to-date. If there are any technological problems, content issues, or trouble accessing the online platform, students are encouraged to contact Student Technical Support Services, the 24-hour/7- day a week help-line at 1-866-642-2711. REQUIREMENTS FOR PARTICIPATION IN ONLINE COURSES Access to the required computer equipment and software needed for the online course No financial holds on student account Successful completion of the PLUS Readiness Survey An Accuplacer, SAT or ACT score places the student in the college level English course. Students that place into Transitional English must first complete that course before taking any further online courses. COURSE SCHEDULING, SEQUENCING AND TITLES The Art Institutes International Minnesota reserves the right to alter or change course titles, course content, or the sequencing of classes, subject to regulatory approval, at any time necessary for the purpose of enhancing the education program. The current Academic Course catalog holds the most current course numbers, course titles, course descriptions and prerequisites. Please note that course schedules are subject to change without notice. Classes are dependent on enrollment and may be cancelled or rescheduled. Please maintain contact with Academic Advisors as they will be in touch with students through email to reschedule a cancelled class. The curriculum at The Art Institutes International Minnesota is organized to develop and build students knowledge and skills in a reasonable progression. To ensure that this occurs, some courses have a prerequisite course, which is a required course that must be completed before a student is allowed to take another course. For example, the prerequisite for English II is English I. That means a student must successfully complete English I before being allowed to enroll in English II. These prerequisite courses are indicated in the course descriptions in the catalog. COURSE NUMBERING The first two digits of the code refer to the program for that course. For example, in GE2411, the GE represents General Education. For a complete list of the program abbreviations refer to the program curriculum listings in this catalog. The following 4 digits represent other information. The first number designates the level of the course; the range is 1-4. A number of 1 or 2 represent lower level courses intended to be taken within the students first academic year and a half. Numbers 3 or 4 represent upper-level courses that are intended for student to take in the second half of their education. While a course may not have a prerequisite the level of the course does indicate a level of academic preparedness a student should have before taking a course. The Academic Director or Academic Advisor may use their best judgment in determining if a student has completed an adequate percentage of lower level course work before allowing registration for upper level courses. The 2nd number of the course code represents the number of credits in the course. The last 2 digits of the course code are used to identify the specific class. The Dean of Academic Affairs has the ability to override course prerequisites. Please note several programs are identified as using a Student Learning Outcomes Course Numbering Rationale. This will not follow the rationale provided above. ACADEMIC CALENDAR The Art Institutes International Minnesota runs on a quarter calendar. Quarters are 11 weeks in length, and are designated Fall, Winter, Spring and Summer. It is expected that students will maintain their enrollment throughout four quarters. Breaks are scheduled between each term. The normal schedule allows three-week breaks in study following Fall and Spring Quarters, and one-week breaks in study following Winter and Summer Quarters. Students choosing to take a term off are put in an out of school status, which has financial aid implications. A current academic calendar is located on the Registrar s website at http://aim.aiiresources. com/departments/registrar/calendar/, on the student portal, as well as in this catalog. 140

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA COURSE LOAD Based on credit hours, course load is defined as follows: Full-load: The student is enrolled in 16 credit hours in an academic quarter. Full-time: The student is enrolled in 12 credit hours or more in an academic quarter. Half-time: The student is enrolled in 8 credit hours in an academic quarter. Less than half time: The student is enrolled in 4 credit hours in an academic quarter. TRANSITIONAL STUDIES Transitional English courses are designed to allow students to master English skills needed to succeed in all coursework at The Art Institutes International Minnesota. Transitional studies courses prepare students for college level requirements in English. All students who do not achieve the standardized placement scores for college-level English must complete the transitional studies courses with a grade of C or higher. Students must successfully complete the transitional studies courses in no more than three attempts. Non-completion of a transitional studies course in three attempts is grounds for academic termination. Transitional studies course credits do not count towards the total number of credits for graduation nor do they count in the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA). However, they do count in determining the maximum time frame toward degree completion and the Incremental Completion Rate (ICR). CHANGE OF STATUS Once enrolled, a student is assumed to be in continuous enrollment and attendance and to be making satisfactory academic progress until graduation. The student who alters this academic progression in any manner is considered to be making a status change which will require approval in advance of the change. The basic status changes include: 1. A change of attendance schedule, such as parttime to full-time class attendance. 2. A change of enrollment, such as a student no longer attending classes. 3. A course change, addition, or deletion. 4. A major change from one program of study to another program of study (internal transfer) such as a change from Web Design & Interactive Media to Graphic Design. 5. Transferring from one Art Institutes location to another Art Institutes location (external transfer). RE-ADMISSIONS PROCEDURES Any student who has left the college for any time period must go through the formal re-entry process. To begin the process, the student must meet with the college s Assistant Director of Re-Admission. The Assistant Director of Re-Admission will ensure that the student s records will be reviewed by the following school personnel: the Academic Director or Academic Advisor will review the student s Academic Progress; Student Accounting will review for outstanding balances; if applicable, reviews will also be done by Financial Aid and Housing. The Dean of Academic Affairs has the authority to grant or deny approval for re-admission. If approval is granted, the Assistant Director of Re- Admissions may proceed in the facilitation of the readmission process. Any student who has not attended The Art Institutes International Minnesota for one or more quarters will be subject to current program requirements and standards. If students time out of all their classes or leave the institution in poor academic standing, they must first submit a written request to the Dean of Academic Affairs requesting re-admission and co-author an Academic Plan with the Academic Advisor. The Dean will review all relevant academic records, the student s letter, and the Academic Plan when considering requests. Re-admission to The Art Institutes International Minnesota is at the discretion of the Dean of Academic Affairs. Once the Dean makes the determination for readmission, the Academic Advisor will contact the student with the decision. If the student is approved for re-admission, that student needs to contact the Assistant Director of Re-Admission. If the student request is denied by the Dean of Academic Affairs, the student must wait one calendar year to apply for re-admission again. Students taking a military leave, or who have withdrawn properly by submitting a Change of Enrollment form, and who were in good academic standing at that time, must contact the Assistant Director of Re-Admissions. The Assistant Director of Re-Admissions will facilitate the completion of enrollment agreements, meetings with a financial planner, course registration, and any other student obligations. 141

Academic Affairs (CONTINUED) Students who are academically terminated for violating the Satisfactory Academic Progress Policy must appeal in writing to the Dean of Academic Affairs for re-admission before the start of the quarter in which he/she wishes to return. The appeal procedure described in the preceding section applies. If the appeal is granted, the reentering student will be placed on probation during the quarter of return. The student must meet the minimum standards of the SAP Policy to continue in the program. The student must successfully retake courses previously failed so that the recalculated GPA and successful completion percentage meets or exceeds the minimum requirements. ADDITIONAL LEARNING EXPERIENCES STUDY TRIPS The Art Institutes International Minnesota arranges study trips to local cultural and commercial sites. These visits are an integral part of each student s training and offer a chance for valuable exposure to places and events relating to the student s field of study. In addition to local study trips to support the curriculum, out-oftown seminars and visits may be planned in individual programs. The costs related to optional study trips are not included in regular tuition or fees. EXHIBITION OF STUDENT WORK Student artwork is important to The Art Institutes International Minnesota. It is of benefit in teaching other students and in demonstrating the nature and value of the programs. Student artwork is a basic part of the catalog, other publications, and exhibitions illustrating the programs at the college. The Art Institutes International Minnesota reserves the right to use the artwork of its students, with their permission, for such purposes. GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS FOR GRADUATION In order to graduate, a student must: receive a passing grade or credit for all required course work earn the minimum required credits for the program achieve a minimum CGPA of 2.0 and a minimum ICR of 66.67% meet portfolio or other requirements participate successfully in the All College Senior Portfolio Show or the Culinary Reception, as prescribed by program of study. satisfy all financial obligations with The Art Institutes International Minnesota complete a graduation clearance form It is the practice of The Art Institutes International Minnesota to round GPA and CGPA points to the nearest tenth percent for the purpose of determining academic progress. No more than 75% of the total required credits for graduation may be transferred from another institution. Transfer credits are not used to determine grade point average. FINAL QUARTER During the final quarter of enrollment at The Art Institutes International Minnesota graduates must complete course work by the end of Week 10. Faculty members are required to submit final graduate grades by Monday of Week 11. This ensures that all graduation requirements have been met and that the student is eligible for graduation. Students should inform their faculty members during the first week of the term that they are graduating. Faculty members will then work with the student to ensure a revised time line is developed to accommodate the shortened term. Because of the shortened term, students in their graduating quarter are not allowed to take session II online courses. 142

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA 143

Career Services CRITERIA FOR HONORS DESIGNATION To promote academic excellence and to recognize exemplary academic achievement, the following honors designations will be issued upon graduation. Students who achieve a CGPA of 3.5 or better are designated as Honor Graduates. Transitional studies classes are not considered when evaluating honors designations. PORTFOLIO REQUIREMENTS Graduating students from all programs must pass a required course in which a portfolio or final project is produced. The portfolio or project must meet the standards established by the school for entry-level employment. The portfolio, in some departments, may be evaluated by a committee. An outline of portfolio standards, projects, and general criteria is provided to students within each program through the required Portfolio or Capstone course. These portfolio requirements are periodically reviewed; The Art Institutes International Minnesota reserves the right to alter or modify the portfolio requirements at any time it is deemed to be in the best interest of graduating students to enhance their career employment potential. Students will show their portfolio or project work at the end of the quarter in which they actually graduate. The Art Institutes International Minnesota s Career Services staff assists in seeking field-related employment upon graduation. GRADUATE EMPLOYMENT ASSISTANCE The Art Institutes International Minnesota does not guarantee employment or any particular level of compensation following graduation. The Art Institutes International Minnesota does, however, offer assistance in searching for employment opportunities for qualified graduates at no additional charge. Job search materials are maintained in Career Services. The college develops and maintains employer contacts through telemarketing, promotional materials, and recruiting events. Portfolio Review Shows are held to enhance employment possibilities for the graduates. Graduates who confine employment considerations to the Twin Cities area may limit the particular employment opportunities available to them. GRADUATE EMPLOYMENT INFORMATION The Art Institutes International Minnesota maintains graduate employment information. For specific placement data, contact the Director of Career Services. PORTFOLIO REVIEW SHOW AND CULINARY RECEPTION The Art Institutes International Minnesota is proud to offer a portfolio show for its graduating students. It is intended to celebrate work and accomplishments of the graduating students and to showcase their work for family, friends, staff, faculty, employers, and continuing students. Students must meet the college s portfolio standards, develop a marketable resume, and participate in the Portfolio Review Show or Culinary Reception in order to meet The Art Institutes International Minnesota s graduation requirements. 144

THE ART INSTITUTE OF MINNESOTA Student Affairs The Art Institutes International Minnesota provides a wide variety of support services to help students complete their academic programs and reach their career goals. Student Affairs functions as a department, which extends student learning and development beyond the classroom. Of priority is the development of the whole person via integration of the student s intellectual development, values, thoughts, emotions and actions. It is our goal not only to provide a quality environment, which meets students basic needs, but to also provide an array of services and programs which enhance student development and success at The Art Institutes International Minnesota. The areas within Student Affairs include student housing, support services, disability services, student health insurance, student activities encompassing clubs and organizations, programs and activities and leadership opportunities; international student advising, new student orientation, student employment, and graduation. Student Affairs is continually striving to provide students with critical learning experiences to help students live as responsible members of a community, and to care for their personal, physical, emotional, spiritual and social lives. The department encourages the involvement of students, faculty and staff in activities that encourage awareness, creative expression and social and professional development. STUDENT CLUBS AND ACTIVITES The Art Institutes International Minnesota provides a diverse campus activities program that is designed to enhance the social, emotional, physical, and mental, well being of students. A wide variety of student clubs and organizations are present on campus and students are encouraged to become involved. Many of the student organizations directly reflect the interests of students in their chosen field of study and provide an opportunity for networking and professional development. Student organization fundraisers require approval from the Office of Student Affairs prior to the event. Students are encouraged to approach the Student Affairs staff with new ideas for student organizations. Activities offered vary by quarter, so check with the Office of Student Affairs for more information. STUDENT SUPPORT SERVICES Our programs and services strive to promote a healthy, equitable and positive community. Services include assessment, outreach, advocacy, referrals, crisis intervention, consultation and guidance related to student development and individual well being. All services are provided in a manner that is positive, empowering and respectful to the individual and the diversity of the community. The purpose of student support services is to provide quality, short-term, solution-focused intervention to help students alleviate academic and nonacademic life stressors and to assist them in recognizing and cultivating their own abilities and resources. Student Support Services provides assistance by utilizing a wellness approach for the student population, including: Assistance with study habits, time management, stress management, communication, problem solving, transition to college and many other college success topics Information on human services in the local area Coordination of disability services for students who qualify in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act Referral to short term counseling provided by the Student Assistance program for students in need of emotional support or guidance. THE STUDENT ASSISTANCE PROGRAM The Student Assistance Program is a service available at no charge to students and provides confidential counseling via telephone 24 hours per day, 7 days a week. The program counselor may refer a student for limited visits with an area network mental health provider or assist the student with locating resources within the community. Through the program, students can receive assistance with issues such as budget and debt assistance, relationships, depression, anxiety, substance abuse, and any other relevant concerns. To schedule an appointment with Student Support Services to discuss your needs, stop in the Student Affairs office. 145

Student Affairs (CONTINUED) DISABILITY SERVICES The Art Institutes International Minnesota provides accommodations to qualified students with disabilities. Disability Services assists qualified students with disabilities in acquiring reasonable and appropriate accommodations and in supporting equal access to services, programs and activities at The Art Institutes International Minnesota. Students who seek reasonable accommodations should notify the Dean of Student Affairs (612) 656-6865 of their specific limitations and, if known, their specific requested accommodations. Students will be asked to supply documentation of the need for accommodation. Classroom accommodations are not retroactive, but are effective only upon the student sharing approved accommodations with the instructor. Therefore, students are encouraged to request accommodations as early as feasible with the Dean of Student Affairs to allow for time to gather necessary documentation. If you have a concern or complaint in this regard, please contact the Dean of Student Affairs in Pence 209, telephone number (612) 656-6865 Complaints will be handled in accordance with the school s Internal Grievance Procedure for Complaints of Discrimination and Harassment. RESIDENCE LIFE AND HOUSING The Art Institutes International Minnesota serves the student by establishing a solid foundation in a community environment that enhances a student s well being through opportunities for social interaction, programming, and services that provide for his/her basic needs. Studies show that time spent living in student housing increases your chances of success, both in the classroom and outside of it. In addition, a student can include the housing costs in his/her financial plan. The Residence Life & Housing Office is dedicated to the task of helping you meet your housing needs throughout your stay at The Art Institutes International Minnesota. The living arrangement you choose is important to your well being and success. THE ART INSTITUTES INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA STUDENT HOUSING The Art Institutes International Minnesota offers student suites at Stadium View near downtown Minneapolis. Stadium View offers congenial, convenient, clean, comfortable student housing. Students living in student housing receive their own private bedroom and private bathroom. Included in the price per quarter are the following: all utilities, Internet, expanded cable with HBO, and furnishings. Furnishings for the private bedroom/private bath option include: A kitchen with full-sized appliances Full-sized beds Two dressers and one desk plus a chair per student Two wardrobe closets per student One dinette table with chairs per suite One sofa and loveseat per suite Students interested in housing must complete the Housing Application, and submit a one-time $150.00 Housing Application Payment. Once the Residence Life and Housing Office has received these items and the financial plan is finalized, the Residence Life and Housing Office begins the process of placing the student into a suite. Approximately two weeks prior to the start of the quarter, the student receives notification of housing assignment placement, move-in times and dates, as well as contact information about her/his suitemate. Students are encouraged to call suitemates in advance to coordinate sharing of the space, small appliances and electronics. Students who have a specific person they would like as a suitemate should contact the Residence Life and Housing Office at (800) 777-3643, extension 6835. STUDENT EMPLOYMENT The Student Employment Advisor is in contact with potential employers in order to secure part-time job opportunities for in-school students. After the student registers, the Student Employment Advisor assists students with the identification of part-time job opportunities. The student is expected to follow up on all leads accepted and report progress to the Advisor. 146

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA HEALTH INSURANCE All students are urged to carry a primary private insurance policy that covers comprehensive health care. The Art Institutes International Minnesota offers a student health insurance program. This program is administered by a third party provider. Information on the plan s benefits and pricing is available in the Student Affairs Office. All international students are required to maintain health insurance at all times in case of sickness. A list of local hospitals is available in the Student Affairs office. INTERNATIONAL STUDENT ADVISING The Dean of Student Affairs is the contact for all international students who hold student visas. This staff member provides procedure and policy assistance regarding nonimmigrant student visas. The Dean will advise international students in order to help them maintain compliance with Department of Homeland Security regulations and to assist in making this educational experience a positive one. STUDENT CODE OF CONDUCT The Art Institutes International Minnesota promotes learning and the development of integrated, whole persons. Students may expect that the institution and all its members will treat them as adults and as full participants in the educational process. The Art Institutes International Minnesota strives to be a community characterized as thinking, caring, inclusive and active. Such a community requires that its members, having made a choice to join the community, strive to improve themselves, affirm others and actively involve themselves in enhancing the community. These ideals require that we have explicit, clear and high expectations for one another. These expectations are that: We take responsibility for our own learning and personal development. We challenge each other to develop intellectually and ethically. We practice personal and academic integrity. We care about others welfare and seek to be responsive to their needs. We strive to keep one another safe from physical and emotional harm. We respect the dignity and worth of all persons. We celebrate human differences in their many forms. We confront bigotry with caring and without compromise. We respect the rights and property of others. We take responsibility for our actions, bear the consequences of those actions and learn from them. We challenge others to take responsibility for their actions, to bear the consequences and to learn from them. SECTION I. GUIDING PRINCIPLES The Art Institutes International Minnesota recognizes its students as responsible and dedicated men and women who are preparing for career employment. An integral part of their career and professional development is the expectation that they conduct themselves during the education process in the same manner as will be expected in all employment situations. As members of the College community, students have responsibilities and duties commensurate with their rights and privileges. In this policy, The Art Institutes International Minnesota provides guidance to students regarding those standards of student conduct and behavior that it considers essential to its educational mission. This policy also provides guidance regarding the types of conduct that infringe upon the fulfillment of the Institute s mission. SECTION II. SCOPE This Student Conduct Policy applies to all students and student organizations at The Art Institutes International Minnesota. We consider and seek to understand different ideas and viewpoints. We conduct ourselves with dignity and civility in our interactions with one another. 147

Student Affairs (CONTINUED) 148 SECTION III. REACH The Student Conduct Policy shall apply to student conduct that occurs on The Art Institutes International Minnesota premises including online platforms, at College-sponsored activities, student organization sponsored events or in student housing. At the discretion of the Chief Conduct Officer (Dean of Student Affairs or a delegate as appointed by the President of The Art Institutes International Minnesota), the policy also shall apply to off-campus student conduct when the conduct, as alleged, adversely affects a substantial college interest and potentially violates a campus policy. SECTION IV. RESPONSIBILITIES OF DUAL MEMBERSHIP Students are both members of the The Art Institutes International Minnesota community and citizens of the state. As citizens, students are responsible to the community of which they are a part, and, as students, they are responsible to the academic community of The Art Institutes International Minnesota and to other individuals who make up the community. By enforcing its Student Conduct Policy, The Art Institutes International Minnesota neither substitutes for nor interferes with other civil or criminal legal processes. When a student is charged in both jurisdictions, The Art Institutes International Minnesota will decide on the basis of its interests, the interests of affected students, and the interests of the community whether to proceed with its disciplinary process or to defer action. SECTION V. DISCIPLINARY OFFENSES The offenses listed below are given as examples only. The Art Institutes International Minnesota may sanction other conduct not specifically included on this list. 1. Academic Dishonesty a) Plagiarism b) Cheating on assignments or examinations; c) Engaging in unauthorized collaboration on academic work; d) Taking, acquiring or using test materials without faculty permission; e) Submitting false or incomplete records of academic achievement; f) Altering, forging or misusing a college academic record; g) Fabricating or falsifying data, research procedures, or data analysis; h) Deceiving the college and/or its officials. 2. Illegal or Unauthorized Possession or Use of Weapons a) Possession or use of firearms, explosives, dangerous chemicals, or other weapons, likenesses of weapons, on college property or at college sponsored functions, except where possession is required by law. 3. Sexual Assault or Nonconsensual Contact a) Any form of unwanted sexual attention or unwanted sexual contact. 4. Threatening, Violent or Aggressive Conduct a) Assault, battery, or any other form of physical abuse of a student or college employee; b) Fighting or physical altercation; c) Conveyance of threats by any means of communication including, but not limited to, threats of physical abuse and threats to damage or destroy college property or the property of other students or college employees. d) Any conduct that threatens the health or safety of another individual one s own self or another individual. Threats to commit self-harm and/ or actual incidents of selfharm by any student. 5. Theft, Property Damage and Vandalism a) Theft, attempted theft, vandalism/ damage, or defacing of college property, college controlled property or the property of another student, faculty, staff member or guests. b) Extortion c) Setting fires, tampering with fire safety and/ or firefighting equipment. 6. Disruptive or Disorderly Conduct a) Disruptive behavior, such as interference with the normal operations of the college (i.e., disruption of teaching and administrative functions, disciplinary procedures, pedestrian or vehicular traffic, or other college activities) b) Disruptive classroom conduct, such as, i. Engaging in behavior that substantially or repeatedly interrupts either the instructor s ability to teach or student learning. The classroom extends to any setting where a student is engaged in work toward academic credit or satisfaction of program- based requirements or related activities; ii. Use of cell phones and pagers during scheduled classroom times. c) Disorderly Conduct, such as, i. Disorderly, lewd, indecent, or obscene conduct. This would include but is

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA ii. not limited to any type of clothing, gang colors, gang symbols or materials worn or brought onto the premises by any student or guest deemed to be lewd, indecent or obscene as determined by college officials. Breach of peace on college property or at any college-sponsored or supervised program. iii. Any in-school or off-campus act considered inappropriate or as an example of misconduct that adversely affects the interests of The Art Institutes International Minnesota and/ or its reputation. 7. Illegal or Unauthorized Possession or Use of Drugs or Alcohol a) Use, sale, possession or distribution of illegal or controlled substances, drug or drug paraphernalia on college property or at any function sponsored or supervised by the college. b) Being under the influence of illegal or controlled substances on college property, or at any college function. c) Use, sale, possession or distribution of alcoholic beverages on college property or at any function sponsored or supervised by the college. d) Being under the influence of alcohol on college property or at any college function is also prohibited. 8. Verbal Assault, Defamation and Harassment a) Verbal abuse of a student or college employee. b) Harassment by any means of any individual, including coercion and personal abuse. Harassment includes but is not limited to, written or verbal acts or uses of technology, which have the effect of harassing or intimidating a person. c) Harassment based on sex, race, color, national origin, religion, sexual orientation, age, disability or any other criteria protected by state, federal or local law. 9. Hazing a) Any form of hazing and any act that endangers the safety of a student, or that destroys or removes public or private property, for the purpose of initiation, admission into, affiliation with, or as a condition for continued membership in a group or organization. Hazing includes any method of initiation or pre-initiation into a student club or any pastime or amusement engaged in with respect to such a club that causes, or is likely to cause, bodily danger, physical harm, or personal degradation or disgrace resulting in physical or mental harm, to any student or other person attending the college. 10. Falsification Willfully providing college officials with false, misleading or incomplete information a) Forgery, falsification, alteration or misuse of college documents, records or identification with the intent to injure, defraud, or misinform. b) Violation of school safety regulations, including but not limited to setting fires, tampering with fire safety and/or firefighting equipment, failure to exit during fire drill, turning in false fire alarms and bomb threats. 11. Abuse of The Art Institutes International Minnesota disciplinary system, including but not limited to: a) Failure to obey the summons of a disciplinary body or college official b) Falsification, distortion, or misrepresentation of information before a disciplinary body or college official. c) Disruption or interference with the orderly conduct of a disciplinary proceeding. d) Attempting to influence the impartiality of a member of a disciplinary body prior to and/or during the course of the disciplinary proceeding. e) Verbal or physical harassment and/ or intimidation of a member of a disciplinary body prior to, during, and/ or after the disciplinary proceeding. f) Failure to comply with the sanction(s) imposed under the student conduct policy. g) Influencing or attempting to influence another person to commit an abuse of the disciplinary system. 12. Unauthorized Use or Misuse of College Facilities a) Unauthorized entry into, unauthorized use of, or misuse of college property, including computers and data and voice communication networks. 149

Student Affairs (CONTINUED) 150 13. Violation of Federal or State Laws a) Violation of federal, state or local laws and college rules and regulations on college property or at college sanctioned or collegesponsored functions. 14. Insubordination a) Persistent or gross acts of willful disobedience or defiance toward college personnel. b) Failure to comply with direction of college officials, faculty, staff or security officers who are acting in the performance of their duties. c) Failure to exit during fire drill, d) Failure to identify oneself when on college property or at a college- sponsored or supervised functions, upon request of college official acting in the performance of his/her duties. 15 Violations of College Rules a) Violations by guest of a student on college property. Students are responsible for the actions of their guests. b) Violation of school safety regulations. c) Smoking in classrooms or other college buildings or areas unless designated as a smoking area. d) Any violation of the student housing license agreement, rules and regulations and/or the college-sponsored housing student handbook. e) Any violation of the institutions policies on the responsible use of technology including but not limited to i. The theft or abuse of computer, email, Internet or Intranet resources ii. Unauthorized entry into a file, to use, read, or change the contents, of for any other purpose. iii. Unauthorized transfer of a file. iv. Unauthorized downloading of copyrighted materials in violation of law. iv. Unauthorized use of another individual s identification and/or password. v. Use of computing facilities to interfere with the work of another student, faculty member, or school official. vi. Use of computing facilities to send obscene or abusive messages. vii. Use of computing facilities to interfere with normal operation of the school s computing system. f) Failure to satisfy school financial obligations. The previous list is illustrative only, and The Art Institutes International Minnesota may sanction other conduct not specifically included on this list. SECTION VI. SANCTIONS The Art Institutes International Minnesota may impose sanctions for violations of the student conduct policy. The type of sanction imposed may vary depending upon the seriousness of the violation(s). The Art Institutes International Minnesota reserves the right to immediately impose the most severe sanction if circumstances merit. Although not exhaustive, the following list represents the types of sanctions that may be imposed upon any student or student organization found to have violated the student conduct policy: 1. Warning: A notice in writing that a student has failed to meet some aspect of the school s standards and expectations. 2. Probation: Probation is used for repeated violations or a specific violation of a serious nature. The Chief Conduct Officer or his/her delegate defines the terms of probation. 3. Discretionary Sanctions: The student will be required to complete an educational service, attend counseling, or have restricted privileges. 4. Removal from Sponsored Housing: The student will be immediately dismissed from school-sponsored housing. The student will be required to vacate the premises according to the terms of the sanction. 5. Suspension: Separation of the student from the school for a pre-determined period of time. The student may be able to return to school once specified conditions for readmission are met. The student may not attend classes, visit college-sponsored housing, use school facilities, participate in or attend college activities, or be employed by the school during his/her suspension. 6. Expulsion: The student will be expelled from The Art Institutes International Minnesota immediately. The student will not be permitted to continue his or her studies at the college and may not return to the college or to collegesponsored housing or activities at any time or for any reason.

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA 7. Restitution: Compensation for loss or damage to property leased, owned or controlled by the school. This may take the form of monetary or material replacement. The above list is only a general guideline. Some sanctions may be omitted, and other sanctions not listed above may be used. SECTION VII. DISCIPLINARY PROCEDURES Complaint Any member of The Art Institutes International Minnesota community may file a complaint against any student for misconduct or for otherwise being in violation of The Art Institutes International Minnesota policies. 1. The complaint shall be prepared in writing and directed to the Chief Conduct Officer or his/her delegate. 2. The written complaint should include the nature of the offense, date, approximate time and location of incident. The name of the victim, offender and any witness/es may be included. 3. Complaints should be submitted within 48 hours after the alleged violation occurred unless there are extenuating circumstances requiring a longer timeframe. The Chief Conduct Officer or a delegate may review and investigate the complaint to determine if the allegations have factual merit, to identify violations of the student conduct policy, and to impose sanctions for such violations. Generally, the accused should be given the opportunity to tell his or her account of the situation and to provide this information, in writing, unless The Art Institutes International Minnesota determines that the circumstances do not warrant disclosure of some or all of the facts. SEARCH OF STUDENT S PROPERTY Students have no expectation of privacy in their personal property while on campus. The Art Institutes International Minnesota reserves the right to search the contents of students personal property or belongings at any time and for any reason, including when there is reasonable suspicion on the part of The Art Institutes International Minnesota staff that a risk to the health, safety or welfare of students, and/or the school community exists and including searches pursuant to an investigation of potential wrong doing. This includes but is not limited to vehicles brought onto property leased, owned or controlled by the school, backpacks, portfolios and clothing. This policy also applies to student property in school-sponsored housing, student e-mail and/or computers. NOTIFICATION AND DETERMINATION OF VIOLATIONS THAT WARRANT DISCIPLINARY MEETING 1. The Chief Conduct Officer or a delegate may choose to conduct a disciplinary meeting. Potential attendees include a student or students, the Chief Conduct Officer or his/her delegate and others who may have relevant information. The Student should receive advance notice of the allegations and the reason for the meeting. 2. The Chief Conduct Officer or his/her delegate may render and communicate the decision to the student in writing, which shall describe the violation and the sanctions imposed, if any, and the student s right to appeal. If the Chief Conduct Officer determines that there was no violation, that decision may be documented in writing to the student as well. 3. If a student fails to appear for the meeting, the Chief Conduct Officer or his/her delegate may make a determination of violations of The Art Institutes International Minnesota policies on the basis of the information available, and impose sanctions for such violations. NOTIFICATION AND DETERMINATION OF VIOLATIONS THAT WARRANT DISCIPLINARY HEARING In some cases, involving serious violations, the Chief Conduct Officer or delegate, hereby referred to as Hearing Officer, in his or her sole discretion, may choose to assemble a disciplinary panel to adjudicate the process. The Hearing Officer may immediately (before a hearing takes place) remove the student from the campus community pursuant to an Interim Suspension until the Disciplinary Panel is convened. (See interim suspension). 1. The Student should receive advance notice of the allegations and the reason for the meeting. A student may forgo attendance at the hearing and a determination of the sanction will be made by the Disciplinary Panel. 151

Student Affairs (CONTINUED) 2. Hearings normally shall be conducted in private. The Disciplinary Hearing is an academic hearing, not a legal hearing. Therefore, legal counsel is not allowed at the hearing. 3. The student may be accompanied by one person (family member, friend, etc) to provide support. The committee may prohibit from attending or remove any person who disrupts the proceedings of the committee. 4. In Hearings involving more than one student, the Hearing Officer, in his or her discretion, may permit the hearing concerning each student to be conducted separately. 5. The Disciplinary Panel may hear from any person who may have relevant information and the Panel may review any documents presented to them. a. Pertinent records, documents and written statements may be considered by the Hearing Officer at his/her discretion b. The Disciplinary Panel may ask questions and may seek information not provided to it. 6. The Disciplinary Panel may determine whether it is more likely than not that a violation occurred. The Panel should communicate to the Hearing Officer its decision and its recommended sanction, if any. 7. After the Hearing, the Hearing Officer will issue a written decision to the accused student which identifies the accusations and the panel s conclusions, any sanctions, and the student s right of appeal. 8. In general, the accused should have access to the documentation reviewed by the panel, however identifying names and information may be removed from the documentation when necessary to protect other student s privacy rights. DISCIPLINARY PANEL A Disciplinary Panel may consist of members of the college Executive Committee, Campus Staff, Faculty or Student Body. When students are permitted on the panel, the accused student should sign a form granting permission to release his/her educational records to a student serving on the panel. Failure to sign the permission constitutes an agreement to have no student on the panel. ADMINISTRATIVE INTERIM SUSPENSION Students may be administratively suspended on an interim basis when: 1. serious allegations are being investigated 2. serious allegations are pending before a disciplinary panel 3. in advance of a disciplinary panel hearing; or 4. when a student potentially poses a threat of harm to himself, to others, or to property of The Art Institutes International Minnesota or a member of the college community During the interim suspension, students are denied access to college-sponsored housing and/ or to the school (including classes, labs, library) and/ or all other school activities or privileges for which the student might otherwise be eligible, as the Chief Conduct Officer or designee may determine to be appropriate. This interim suspension period should last no longer than three business days, and the Chief Conduct Officer or delegate may make reasonable provisions to provide for accommodations of a student in school sponsored housing. The interim suspension is not to be considered disciplinary, but it is a tool to separate potential adversaries until a reasoned decision can be made. 152

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA SECTION VIII. APPEAL PROCEDURES Students have a right to appeal disciplinary actions when they believe they have extenuating circumstances or believe to have been treated in an arbitrary or biased fashion or without adherence to The Art Institutes International Minnesota policies and procedures. During an appeal, the student should continue to obey the terms of the decision, i.e., a student who has been suspended from school may not be on school property, a student dismissed from school-sponsored housing must leave in accordance with the directions indicated in the decision. The student must write a letter of appeal in the student s own words, addressed to the President of The Art Institutes International Minnesota or his/her delegate. This letter must clearly state the extenuating circumstances or the grounds for believing the decision was arbitrary or biased or that it was without adherence to The Art Institutes International Minnesota policies and procedures, and provide any supporting documentation. It must be delivered to the President or his/her delegate within seven calendar days following the student s receipt of the decision. Students should provide documentation to support the allegations of the appeal. The President or his/her delegate may appoint an ad hoc committee to review appeals and make a recommendation regarding disposition of the appeal within 30 days of the date of receipt of the appeal. This committee will be comprised of faculty or staff members not involved in making the initial disciplinary decision. The President and/or the committee may decide to convene an appeal hearing. The student will be notified in writing of the date and time of the appeal. The student is expected to attend the meeting, and failure to do so, for other than documented emergencies, may be considered forfeiture of the right to present further information regarding the appeal. The student making the appeal may be provided an opportunity to address the committee in person. The student may be accompanied by one person (family member, friend, etc) as an observer. The committee may prohibit from attending or remove any person who disrupts the proceedings of the committee. The Appeal Committee is an academic hearing, not a legal hearing. Therefore, legal counsel is not allowed at the meeting. Audio recording of the academic hearing is not permitted. Minutes of the meeting are confidential. Following appropriate review and deliberation, the committee will report back to the President or his/her delegate with its recommendation following its review of the appeal. The President or his/her delegate will render a written decision on the appeal within thirty calendar days from receipt of the appeal. The decision will be final. ACADEMIC INTEGRITY POLICY Consistent with its mission and values, The Art Institutes International Minnesota seeks to guide students to develop ideas and concepts that are their own. Any student who engages in conduct that violates principles of academic integrity and honesty is subject to disciplinary proceedings under the Student Code of Conduct. Academic integrity includes the following expectations: 1. Students shall allow others to receive credit for their work by: a) Refraining from intentionally or inadvertently presenting the ideas of others as their own; b) Refraining from assisting others in presenting the work of someone else as his/her own. 2. Students shall refrain from receiving or giving assistance on course assignments or tests beyond the guidelines established by the course instructor. 3. Students shall refrain from falsifying, fabricating, or distorting data through omission. 4. Students shall refrain from misrepresenting his/ her personal accomplishments. 153

Student Affairs (CONTINUED) Violations of the Academic Integrity policy include: Plagiarism: the act of representing someone else s work as the student s own regardless of the intent. The presentation of written documents, still or moving images, original ideas, research information, audio samples and music clips that are not the student s own work without proper citation is plagiarism. Cheating: the act of receiving or giving assistance on written or electronic assignments, exams, or documents submitted as original pieces of work. This includes bringing unauthorized written notes, programmed material in watches, calculators, PDAs, cell phones, or laptops to in-class assignments, tests or exams, or take- home assignment or exams that exceed the guidelines set by the course instructor. Aiding and abetting another individual in cheating and plagiarism is considered a violation of the Academic Integrity policy. DISCIPLINARY SANCTIONS At The Art Institutes International Minnesota, violations of the Academic Integrity policy are cumulative offenses throughout the student s career at the college: each act of plagiarism or cheating is documented in the student s judicial record, held in the Office of the Dean of Student Affairs, and the student s academic record in the Registrar s office. Violations of this policy will be handled in accordance with the disciplinary procedures outlined in the Student Conduct policy. 1ST OFFENSE: Failure of the assignment or examination (0 points) with no opportunity to re-do or make up work that has been plagiarized or produced as a result of cheating. The faculty member should calculate a course grade as if the assignment had been submitted but received no points. Depending on the weight and timing of the assignment or exam, this may result in the student s failure of the course. Documentation of the plagiarism or cheating is filed in the student s judicial record in the office of the Dean of Student Affairs. 2ND OFFENSE: Failure of the course. A letter of Academic Warning is sent by the Dean of Academic Affairs office. Documentation of the plagiarism or cheating is filed in the student s judicial record in the office of the Dean of Student Affairs, and in the student s academic record in the office of the Registrar. 3RD OFFENSE: Failure of the course. Documentation of the plagiarism or cheating is filed in the student s judicial record in the office of the Dean of Student Affairs, and in the student s academic record in the office of the Registrar. Possible suspension/termination from The Art Institutes International Minnesota with right to appeal as per procedures set forth in the Student Code of Conduct. Note: The President reserves the right to develop any policy or take any action(s) deemed appropriate to maintain the safety and well-being of any or all students. STUDENT GRIEVENCE PROCEDURE FOR INTERNAL COMPLAINTS OF DISCRIMINATION AND HARASSMENT Students who believe they have been subjected to discrimination or harassment in violation of the Non- Discrimination Policy should follow the procedure outlined below. This complaint procedure is intended to provide a fair, prompt and reliable determination about whether The Art Institutes International Minnesota Non- Discrimination Policy has been violated. 1. Complainants are encouraged to file a complaint as soon as possible after an alleged incident of discrimination has occurred. Any student who chooses to file a discrimination complaint should do so either with Dean of Student Affairs (612) 656-6865. Online students should file complaints with studentcomplaints@aii.edu. The complaint should be presented in writing and it should describe the alleged incident(s) and any corrective action sought. The complaint should be signed by the complainant. 154

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA 2. The Art Institutes International Minnesota will investigate the allegations. Both the accuser and the accused are entitled to have others present during a disciplinary proceeding. Both will be informed of the outcome of any campus disciplinary proceeding. For this purpose, the outcome of a disciplinary proceeding means only The Art Institutes International Minnesota s final determination with respect to the alleged sexual offense and any sanction that is imposed against the accused. Both the complainant and the accused will have the opportunity to meet and discuss the allegations with the investigator and may offer any witnesses in support of their position to the investigator during the course of the investigation. A student may be accompanied during investigation meetings and discussions by one person (family member, friend, etc.) who can act as an observer, provide emotional support, and/or assist the student in understanding and cooperating in the investigation. The observer may not be an attorney, unless otherwise required by local law. The investigator may prohibit from attending or remove any person who disrupts the investigation in the investigator s sole discretion. 3. The student who made the complaint and the accused shall be informed promptly in writing when the investigation is completed, no later than 45 calendar days from the date the complaint was filed. The student who made the complaint shall be informed if there were findings made that the policy was or was not violated and of actions taken to resolve the complaint, if any, that are directly related to him/her, such as an order that the accused not contact the student who made the complaint. In accordance with institutional policies protecting individuals privacy, the student who made the complaint may generally be notified that the matter has been referred for disciplinary action, but shall not be informed of the details of the recommended disciplinary action without the consent of the accused. 4. The decision of the Investigator may be appealed by petitioning the President s Office of The Art Institutes International Minnesota. The written appeal must be made within 20 calendar days of receipt of the determination letter. The President, or his or her designee, will render a written decision on the appeal within 30 calendar days from receipt of the appeal. The President s decision shall be final. 5. The Art Institutes International Minnesota will not retaliate against persons bringing forward allegations of harassment or discrimination. 6. Matters involving general student complaints will be addressed according to the Student Complaint Procedures, a copy of which can be found in the Student Handbook or Academic Catalog. 7. For more information about your rights under the federal laws prohibiting discrimination, please contact the Office for Civil Rights at the U.S. Department of Education. If you follow this complaint procedure and still feel dissatisfied with the results, you may send a written copy of the complaint to: Department of Education Building 400 Maryland Ave, SW Washington, DC 20202 FAMILY EDUCATIONAL RIGHTS AND PRIVACY ACT The Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA) of 1974, as amended sets out requirements designed to afford students certain rights with respect to their education records. In addition, it puts limits on what information The Art Institutes International Minnesota may disclose to third parties without receiving prior written consent from the student. 155

Student Affairs (CONTINUED) 156 I. PROCEDURE TO INSPECT EDUCATION RECORDS: Students have the right under FERPA to inspect and review their education records. A student who wishes to inspect and review his or her records should submit a written request to the Registrar. The request should identify as precisely as possible the records the student wishes to inspect. If the requested records are subject to inspection and review by the student, arrangements for access will be made within a reasonable period of time but in no case more than 45 days after the request was made. The student will be notified of the time and place where the records may be inspected. The college may require the presence of a school official during the inspection and review of a student s records. Certain limitations exist on a student s right to inspect and review their own education records. Those limitations include, for example, the following: i. financial information submitted by parents; ii. confidential letters and recommendations placed in their files prior to January 1, 1975; iii. confidential letters and recommendations placed in their files after January 1, 1975 to which the student has waived his or her right to inspect and review and that are related to the student s admission, application for employment or job placement, or receipt of honors. In addition, the term education record does not include certain types of records such as, by way of example, records of instructional, supervisory, administrative, and certain educational personnel that are in the sole possession of the maker thereof, and are not accessible or revealed to any other individual except a substitute. When a record contains personally identifiable information about more than one student, the student may inspect and review only the information that relates to him/her personally. II. DISCLOSURE OF EDUCATIONAL RECORDS: The Art Institutes International Minnesota generally will not permit disclosure of personally identifiable information from the records of a student without prior written consent of the student. Personally identifiable information is disclosed (some items are mandatory, some discretionary) from the records of a student without that student s prior written consent to the following individuals or institutions or in the following circumstances: 1. To The Art Institutes International Minnesota officials who have been determined by the college to have legitimate educational interests in the records. A school official is a. a person employed by the school or its corporate parent in an administrative, supervisory, academic or research, or support staff position. This includes, but is not limited to human resources and accounting staff for purposes of the tuition reimbursement plan; or b. a person employed by or under contract to the college to perform specific tasks, such as an auditor, consultant, or attorney, a person on the Board of Trustees, or a student serving on an official committee or assisting another school official. Any school official who needs information about a student in the course of performing instructional, supervisory, advisory, or administrative duties for The Art Institutes International Minnesota has a legitimate educational interest. 2. To certain officials of the United States Department of Education, the Comptroller General of the United States, the Attorney General of the United States, and state and local educational authorities in connection with state or federally supported educational programs. 3. In connection with the student s request for, or receipt of, financial aid necessary to determine the eligibility, amounts or conditions of financial aid, or to enforce the terms and conditions of the aid. 4. To organizations conducting certain studies for or on behalf of the school. 5. To accrediting commissions or state licensing or regulatory bodies to carry out their functions. 6. To parents of a dependent student, as defined in Section 152 of the Internal Revenue Code. 7. To comply with a judicial order or lawfully issued subpoena. 8. To appropriate parties in health or safety emergencies.

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA 9. To officials of another corporate or Art Institutes school, upon request, in which a student seeks or intends to enroll. 10. To an alleged victim of a crime of violence or a nonforcible sexual offense, the final results of the disciplinary proceedings conducted by the school against the alleged perpetrator of that crime or offense with respect to that crime or offense. 11. To persons in addition to the victim of a crime of violence or nonforcible sexual offense, the final results of the disciplinary proceedings described in paragraph 10 above but only if the school has determined that a student is the perpetrator of a crime of violence or nonforcible sexual offense, and with respect to the allegation made against him or her, the student has committed a violation of the institution s rules or policies. The school, in such instances, may only disclose the name of the perpetrator - not the name of any other student, including a victim or witness - without the prior written consent of the other student(s). 12. To a parent regarding the student s violation of any federal, state, or local law or of any rules or policy of the school governing the use or possession of alcohol or a controlled substance if the school determines that the student has committed a disciplinary violation with respect to that use or possession, and the student is under 21 at the time of the disclosure to the parent. 13. Directory information (see Section IV below). 14. Student Recruiting Information as requested by the U.S. Military. Student recruiting information includes ONLY: name, address, telephone listing, age or date of birth, class level, academic major, place of birth, degrees received and most recent educational institution attended. It does not include and The Art Institutes International Minnesota will not provide: social security numbers, race, ethnicity, nationality, GPA, grades, low performing student lists, religious affiliation, students with loans in default, veteran s status, students no longer enrolled. Students who opt out of the directory also opt out of student recruiting information. III. RECORD OF REQUESTS FOR DISCLOSURE Except with respect to those requests made by the student themselves, those disclosures made with the written consent of the student, or to requests by or disclosures to Art Institutes International Minnesota officials with legitimate educational interests and disclosures of directory information (or other exceptions described in the applicable regulations), The Art Institutes International Minnesota will maintain a record indicating the parties who have requested or obtained personally identifiable information from a student s education records and the legitimate interests those parties had in requesting or obtaining the information. This record may be inspected by the student. IV. DIRECTORY INFORMATION The Art Institutes International Minnesota designates the following information as directory information. (Directory information is personally identifiable information, which may be disclosed without the student s consent): 1. Student s name 2. Address: Local, email and website 3. Telephone number (local) 4. Date and place of birth 5. Program of study 6. Participation in officially recognized activities 7. Dates of attendance 8. Degrees and certificates awarded 9. Most recent previously attended school 10. Photograph of the student, if available 11. Enrollment status (i.e., enrolled, continuing, future enrolled student, reentry, leave of absence, etc.) 12. Student honors and awards received. 13. The height and weight of athletic team members 157

Student Affairs (CONTINUED) 158 Notice of these categories and of the right of an individual in attendance at The Art Institutes International Minnesota to request that his/her directory information be kept confidential will be given to the student annually. Students may request nondisclosure of student directory information by specifying nondisclosure, in writing, to the Office of the Registrar, The Art Institutes International Minnesota, 15 South 9th Street, Minneapolis, MN 55402. Failure to request nondisclosure of directory information will result in routine disclosure of one or more of the above-designated categories of personally identifiable directory information. V. CORRECTION OF EDUCATIONAL RECORDS Students have the right under FERPA to ask to have records corrected which they believe are inaccurate, misleading, or in violation of their privacy rights. The following are the procedures for the correction of records: 1. A student must ask the Registrar to amend a record. As part of the request, the student should identify the part of the record they want to have changed and specify why they believe it to be inaccurate, misleading, or in violation of his/her privacy rights. 2. The Art Institutes International Minnesota may either amend the record or decide not to amend the record. If it decides not to amend the record, it will notify the student of its decision and advise the student of the right to a hearing to challenge the information believed to be inaccurate, misleading, or in violation of the student s privacy rights. 3. Upon request, The Art Institutes International Minnesota will arrange for a hearing and notify the student reasonably in advance of the date, place, and time of the hearing. The hearing will be conducted by an individual who does not have a direct interest in the outcome of the hearing. That individual may be an official of The Art Institutes International Minnesota. The student shall be afforded a forum for the opportunity to present evidence relevant to the issues raised in the original request to amend the student s education records. The student may be assisted by other people, including an attorney. 4. The Art Institutes International Minnesota will prepare a written decision based solely on the evidence presented at the hearing. The decision will include a summary of the evidence, and the reasons for the decision. 5. If, as a result of the hearing, The Art Institutes International Minnesota decides that the information is inaccurate, misleading, or otherwise in violation of the privacy rights of the student, it will (a) amend the record a ccordingly; and (b) inform the student of the amendment in writing. 6. If, as a result of the hearing, The Art Institutes International Minnesota decides that the information in the education record is not inaccurate, misleading, or otherwise in violation of the privacy rights of the student, it shall inform the student of the right to place a statement in the record commenting on the contested information in the record or stating why he or she disagrees with the decision of the school. 7. If a statement is placed in the education records of a student under paragraph 6 above, The Art Institutes International Minnesota will: maintain the statement with the contested part of the record for as long as the record is maintained; and disclose the statement whenever it discloses the portion of the record to which the statement relates. VI. STUDENT RIGHT TO FILE COMPLAINT A student has the right to file a complaint with the United States Department of Education concerning alleged failures by The Art Institutes International Minnesota to comply with the requirements of FERPA. The name and address of the governmental office that administers FERPA is: Family Policy Compliance Office United States Department of Education 400 Maryland Avenue, S.W. Washington, DC 20202-4605 STUDENT RIGHT TO KNOW ACT According to regulations published by the Department of Education based on the Student Right-to-Know Act, the graduation/completion rates for first-time, full-time students who entered school and graduated/ completed within 150% of the normal time to complete the program, as published in the catalog, must be made available to current and prospective students. You may obtain this information in the Admissions Office.

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA GENERAL STUDENT COMPLAINT PROCEDURE If you have a complaint or problem you are encouraged to follow the Student Complaint Procedure. You should discuss complaints with the individual(s) within the appropriate department. Initial discussion should be with the person most knowledgeable of the issues involved or with immediate decision-making responsibility. If you feel that the complaint has not been fully addressed, a written account should be submitted to the Dean of Student Affairs if related to non-academic issues or to the Dean of Academic Affairs for academic issues. The written account should indicate your name, phone number, and ID# and discuss the steps you have taken to remedy the situation. The appropriate staff member or department will be notified of the complaint. A follow-up meeting with you and the Dean of Student Affairs and/or the Dean of Academic Affairs will be held within ten school days of the date of the written complaint in an effort to resolve the issue. If you are not satisfied with the results, you may file an appeal with the President s office. The appeal should be in writing and contain your name and phone number. You should summarize the steps you have taken to remedy the situation and indicate why the results are not satisfactory. You will hear the results of the appeal within ten business days from the date the appeal is received. If you follow this complaint procedure and still feel dissatisfied with the results you may send a written copy of the complaint to: and/or Minnesota Office of Higher Education 1450 Energy Park Drive, Suite 350, St. Paul, MN 55108 Accrediting Council for Independent Colleges and Schools (ACICS), 750 First Street NE, Suite 980, Washington, DC 20002-4241 Telephone: 202-336-6780 ARBITRATION Every student and The Art Institutes International Minnesota agrees that any dispute or claim between the student and The Art Institutes International Minnesota (or any company affiliated with The Art Institutes International Minnesota, or any of its officers, directors, trustees, employees or agents) arising out of or relating to a student s enrollment or attendance at The Art Institutes International Minnesota whether such dispute arises before, during, or after the student s attendance and whether the dispute is based on contract, tort, statute, or otherwise, shall be, at the student s or The Art Institutes International Minnesota s election, submitted to and resolved by individual binding arbitration pursuant to the terms described herein. This policy, however, is not intended to modify a student s right, if any, to file a grievance with any state educational licensing agency. Either party may elect to pursue arbitration upon written notice to the other party. Such notice must describe the nature of the controversy and the remedy sought. If a party elects to pursue arbitration, it should initiate such proceedings with JAMS, which will serve as the arbitration administrator pursuant to its rules of procedure. JAMS can be contacted as follows: JAMS, 45 Broadway, 28th Floor, New York, NY, 10006, www. jamsadr.com, 800-352-5267. This provision does not preclude the parties from mutually agreeing to an alternate arbitration forum or administrator in a particular circumstance. If either party wishes to propose such an alternate forum or administrator, it should do within twenty (20) days of its receipt of the other party s intent to arbitrate. The Art Institutes International Minnesota agrees that it will not elect to arbitrate any undividable claim of less than the relevant jurisdictional threshold that a student may bring in small claims court (or in a similar court of limited jurisdiction subject to expedited procedures). If that claim is transferred or appealed to a different court, however, or if a student s claim exceeds than the relevant jurisdictional threshold The Art Institutes International Minnesota reserves the right to elect arbitration and, if it does so, each student agrees that the matter will be resolved by binding arbitration pursuant to the terms of this Section. IF EITHER A STUDENT OR THE ART INSTITUTES INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA CHOOSES ARBITRATION, NEITHER PARTY WILL HAVE THE RIGHT TO A JURY TRIAL, TO ENGAGE IN DISCOVERY, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THE APPLICABLE ARBITRATION RULES, OR OTHERWISE TO LITIGATE THE DISPUTE OR CLAIM IN ANY COURT (OTHER THAN IN SMALL CLAIMS OR SIMILAR COURT, AS SET FORTH IN THE 159

Student Affairs (CONTINUED) 160 PRECEDING PARAGRAPH, OR IN AN ACTION TO ENFORCE THE ARBITRATOR S AWARD). FURTHER, A STUDENT WILL NOT HAVE THE RIGHT TO PARTICIPATE AS A REPRESENTATIVE OR MEMBER OF ANY CLASS OF CLAIMANTS PERTAINING TO ANY CLAIM SUBJECT TO ARBITRATION. THE ARBITRATOR S DECISION WILL BE FINAL AND BINDING. OTHER RIGHTS THAT A STUDENT OR THE ART INSTITUTES INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA WOULD HAVE IN COURT ALSO MAY NOT BE AVAILABLE IN ARBITRATION. The arbitrator shall have no authority to arbitrate claims on a class action basis, and claims brought by or against a student may not be joined or consolidated with claims brought by or against any other person. Any arbitration hearing shall take place in the federal judicial district in which the student resides. Upon a student s written request, The Art Institutes International Minnesota will pay the filing fees charged by the arbitration administrator, up to a maximum of $3,500 per claim. Each party will bear the expense of its own attorneys, experts and witnesses, regardless of which party prevails, unless applicable law gives a right to recover any of those fees from the other party. If the arbitrator determines that any claim or defense is frivolous or wrongfully intended to oppress the other party, the arbitrator may award sanctions in the form of fees and expenses reasonably incurred by the other party (including arbitration administration fees, arbitrators fees, and attorney, expert and witness fees), to the extent such fees and expenses could be imposed under Rule 11 of the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure. The Federal Arbitration Act (FAA), 9 U.S.C. 1, et seq., shall govern this arbitration provision. This arbitration provision shall survive the termination of a student s relationship with The Art Institutes International Minnesota. Notice of The Art Institutes International Minnesota Policies to Comply with the Higher Education Opportunity Act of 2008 The unauthorized distribution of copyrighted material, including unauthorized peer-to-peer file sharing, may subject students and individuals to civil and criminal liabilities. Almost all of the music, movies, television shows, software, games and images found on the Internet are protected by federal copyright law. The owner of the copyright in these works has the right to control their distribution, modification, reproduction, public display and public performance. It is generally illegal therefore to use file sharing networks to download and share copyrighted works without the copyright owner s permission unless fair use or another exemption under copyright law applies. Fair use under the federal Copyright Act allows the use without permission of copyrighted material for the purpose of criticism, comment, news reporting or teaching under certain limited circumstances. There is no blanket exception from liability for students or employees of educational institutions, however, and whether the use of copyrighted material without permission falls within fair use or one of the other exceptions in the Act depends on a very detailed, caseby-case analysis of various factors. Students should be aware that sharing music, videos, software and other copyrighted materials is very likely not to be considered a fair use and therefore may be a violation of the law. A violation of the institution s policy for use of its information technology system can result in termination of network access for the student and/or other disciplinary action including removal of the student from the institution. Moreover, there are severe civil and criminal penalties for copyright infringement under federal law. A copyright owner is entitled to recover actual damages and profits resulting from an infringement, but also may recover statutory damages ranging from $750 to $30,000 per work for a non-willful infringement and up to $150,000 for a willful infringement, even if there is no proof of actual damages, in addition to court costs and reasonable attorneys fees. The government also can file criminal charges that can result in fines and imprisonment. The Art Institutes International Minnesota s policies in regard to copyright infringement via the Internet prohibit the illegal downloading or unauthorized distribution of copyrighted materials using the institution s information technology system. The Art Institutes International Minnesota s policies prohibit use of The Art Institutes International Minnesota computer network to engage in illegal copying or distribution of copyrighted works such as by unauthorized peer-to-peer file sharing (i.e., the sharing of copyrighted works, typically in digital or electronic files), without permission. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY POLICY I. Purpose or Scope The unauthorized distribution of copyrighted material, including unauthorized peer-to-peer file sharing, may subject students and individuals to civil and criminal liabilities. Almost all of the music, movies, television shows, software, games and images found on the Internet are protected by federal copyright law. The

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA owner of the copyright in these works has the right to control their distribution, modification, reproduction, public display and public performance. It is therefore generally illegal to use file sharing networks to download and share copyrighted works without the copyright owner s permission unless fair use or another exemption under copyright law applies. Fair use under the federal Copyright Act allows the use without permission of copyrighted material for the purpose of criticism, comment, news reporting or teaching under certain limited circumstances. There is no blanket exception from liability for students or employees of educational university, however, and whether the use of copyrighted material without permission falls with fair use or one of the other exceptions in the Act depends on a very detailed, caseby-case analysis of various factors. Students should be aware that sharing music, videos, software and other copyrighted materials is very likely not to be considered a fair use and therefore may be a violation of the law. A violation of The Art Institutes International Minnesota s policy for use of its information technology system can result in termination of network access for the student and/or other disciplinary action including removal of the student from The Art Institutes International Minnesota. Summary of Civil and Criminal Penalties for Violation of Federal Copyright Laws Copyright infringement is the act of exercising, without permission or legal authority, one or more of the exclusive rights granted to the copyright owner under section 106 of the Copyright Act (Title 17 of the United States Code). These rights include the right to reproduce or distribute a copyrighted work. In the file-sharing context, downloading or uploading substantial parts of a copyrighted work without authority constitutes an infringement. Penalties for copyright infringement include civil and criminal penalties. In general, anyone found liable for civil copyright infringement may be ordered to pay either actual damages or statutory damages affixed at not less than $750 and not more than $30,000 per work infringed. For willful infringement, a court may award up to $150,000 per work infringed. A court can, in its discretion, also assess costs and attorneys fees. For details, see Title 17, United States Code, Sections 504, 505. Willful copyright infringement can also result in criminal penalties, including imprisonment of up to five years and fines of up to $250,000 per offense. For more information, please see the website of the U.S. Copyright Office at www.copyright.gov. The Art Institutes International Minnesota s policies in regard to copyright infringement via the Internet prohibit the illegal downloading or unauthorized distribution of copyrighted materials using The Art Institutes International Minnesota s information technology system. The Art Institutes International Minnesota s policies prohibit use of the The Art Institutes International Minnesota s computer network to engage in illegal copying or distribution of copyrighted works such as by unauthorized peer-to-peer file sharing (i.e., the sharing of copyrighted works, typically in digital or electronic files) without permission. As a creative community of teachers, artists and scholars, The Art Institutes International Minnesota is committed to encouraging the creation of new works, new ideas, and new forms of creative and scholarly expression. This Policy on Intellectual Property is provided to protect the interests of those who create as well as the interests of The Art Institutes International Minnesota itself, which supports this creative and scholarly work. This document expresses The Art Institutes International Minnesota s policy regarding ownership and usage rights with respect to Intellectual Property (as hereinafter defined). It covers all those who are a part of The Art Institutes International Minnesota faculty, staff, students, visiting artists, visiting scholars, or other participants enrolled, employed or affiliated with The Art Institutes International Minnesota, and this Policy governs in all circumstances, unless The Art Institutes International Minnesota has modified it through a written agreement connected to a sponsored or commissioned work or as part of work under a grant or contract. Should there be any conflict between the provisions of this Policy and the terms of a separate written agreement between The Art Institutes International Minnesota and any party, the terms of that separate written agreement will govern. This Policy is not intended to limit fair use as defined by U.S. laws. 161

Student Affairs (CONTINUED) 162 II. Definitions (if applicable) The following terms are used throughout the Policy and are defined as follows: A. Copyright - Copyright is the intangible property right granted for a limited period of time by federal statute (Title 17 of the U.S. Code) for an original work of authorship fixed in any tangible form of expression. Copyright provides the owner with five exclusive rights, including the exclusive right to reproduce the work, to prepare derivative works based on the work, to distribute copies of the work to the public by sale or other transfer of ownership (or by rental, lease, license or lending), to display the work publicly and to perform the work publicly (if relevant). B. Commissioned Work - A Commissioned Work is defined as a Work (as defined in paragraph K) that is produced or created pursuant to a written agreement with the Institution and for Institution purposes by (a) individuals not under the employ of the Institution or (b) Institutional Employees (as defined in paragraph D) acting outside the scope of their regular Institution employment, as determined by their existing Institution employment arrangement or contract. C. Independent Academic Effort or Creative Activity - Independent Academic Effort or Creative Activity is defined as the inquiry, investigation, research, or creative activity that is carried out by faculty, staff and Students of the Institution working on their own, that advances knowledge or the development of the arts, sciences, humanities, or technology where the specific direction, methodology, and content of the pursuit is determined by the faculty, staff member(s), or Student(s) without the direct assignment, supervision, or involvement of the Institution. D. Institutional Employee - An Institutional Employee is a full-time or part-time faculty member, visiting faculty, adjunct faculty, artist, scholar, or fellow (as defined in the Faculty Handbook), or a full-time or part-time staff member (as defined in the Staff Handbook), or Student, who is employed by the Institution or who is working under an Institution contract, either expressed or implied. E. Intellectual Property - Means: (i) trademarks, service marks, brand names, trade dress, assumed names, trade names, slogans, URLs, domain names, logos and other indications of source, sponsorship or affiliation, together with all associated goodwill (whether the foregoing are registered, unregistered or the subject of a pending application for registration); (ii) inventions, developments, improvements, discoveries, know how, concepts and ideas, whether patentable or not, in any jurisdiction; (iii) patents, patent applications and patent disclosures; (iv) trade secrets and proprietary or confidential information; (v) writings and other works of authorship, whether subject to copyright protection or not, in any jurisdiction, including but not limited to literary works (such as books, scholarly articles, journal articles and other articles, theses, research, course syllabi, curricula, exams, instructional and evaluation materials for classes, courses, labs or seminars, study guides, student rosters and attendance forms, grade reports, assessment of student work and projects, course or program proposals, software, data and databases, lecture and presentation materials); musical works (including any accompanying words); dramatic works (including any accompanying music); pantomimes and choreographic works; pictorial, graphic, and sculpture works (including graphic designs; illustrations, photographs, paintings, sculptures and other works of art); motion pictures and other audiovisual works (including films, audio and video recordings and multimedia projects); sound recordings; architectural works; and compilations; and (vi) copyrights, copyright registrations and applications for registration of copyrights in any jurisdiction. F. Patent - A United States patent is a grant which gives the owner of the patent the right to exclude all others from making, using, or selling the claimed invention in the United States for a set period of time. Similar rights are granted in other countries, but the discussion of Patents in this Policy will focus specifically on United States patent rights. G. Sponsored Work - Sponsored Work is a Work (as defined in paragraph K) that is produced or created under an agreement between the Institution and a sponsor which provides the Institution with ownership and/or usage rights to the Work and Intellectual Property produced

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA under the agreement. Sponsored works do not include works created through independent academic effort or creative activity, even when based on the findings of the sponsored project, so long as an agreement does not state otherwise. H. Student - A Student is a regularly registered, full- or part-time, undergraduate or graduate at the Institution, including students attending the Institution as special status students : e.g., as participants in Professional Institute for Educators (PIE), Continuing Education (CE), the Pre-College or Saturday programs, or in exchange programs or through special grants or fellowships. I. Substantial Institutional Resources - Any substantial use of Institution equipment, facilities, time, personnel, or funds, and use of Institution resources that are not commonly provided, is considered a use of Substantial Institutional Resources. This use does not include resources commonly provided to Institution faculty and staff, such as offices, library facilities, basic artistic facilities, and everyday telephone, computer, and computer network support. However, substantial time spent in the use of these latter resources may constitute the use of Substantial Institutional Resources. Resources not considered commonly provided include specially procured equipment or space, additional staffing or personnel, utilization beyond normal work hours of Institution personnel, and monetary expenditures that require a budget. Faculty may use the basic artistic facilities unless use infringes on student use of those facilities for coursework. J. Trademark and Service Mark - A trademark or service mark is any word, phrase, name, symbol, logo, slogan, device, or any combination thereof that is used in trade to identify and distinguish one party s goods or services from those of others. K. Work - The term Work as used in this Policy shall be defined to include all of the items identified in Sections (i), (ii), (iv) and (v) of the definition of Intellectual Property in paragraph E. L. Work Made for Hire - A Work Made for Hire is defined as a Work (as defined in paragraph K) prepared by an employee within the scope of his or her employment. Consistent with the Copyright Act of 1976, as amended, a Work Made for Hire under this Policy also includes a work specially ordered or commissioned for use as a contribution to a collective work, as a part of a motion picture or other audiovisual work, as a translation, as a supplementary work, as a compilation, as an instructional text, as a test, as answer material for a test, or as an atlas, if the parties expressly agree in a written instrument signed by them that the work shall be considered a work made for hire. Examples of works made for hire include software programs created within the scope of an employee s duties by a staff programmer, a newspaper article written by a staff journalist for the newspaper that employs him/ her, and a musical arrangement or ditty written for a music company by a salaried arranger on its staff. III. Policy Provisions A. Faculty, Staff and Student Works 1. General Rule. Subject to the exceptions noted in this Policy, as a general rule, The Art Institutes International Minnesota does not claim ownership of Intellectual Property developed through Independent Academic Effort or Creative Activity and that is intended to disseminate the results of academic research and scholarship, and/or to exhibit forms of artistic expression on the part of faculty, staff, and Students. 2. Exceptions to the General Rule. Exceptions to the general rule set forth in III.A.1 above include Intellectual Property developed by faculty, staff, Students and Institutional Employees under any of the following circumstances: (a) The Intellectual Property is developed as a Sponsored Work. (b) The Intellectual Property is developed as a Commissioned Work. (c) The Intellectual Property is developed using Substantial Institutional Resources. (d) The Intellectual Property is developed by the creator within the scope of his or her employment with The Art Institutes International Minnesota and constitutes a 163

Student Affairs (CONTINUED) 164 Work Made for Hire. (e) The Intellectual Property is developed by a creator who is assigned, directed or funded by The Art Institutes International Minnesota to create the Intellectual Property. (f) The Intellectual Property is developed under a grant, program or agreement which provides The Art Institutes International Minnesota with ownership rights, in whole or in part, to the Intellectual Property. Under the circumstances described in Section III.A.2(a) through (f) above, the Intellectual Property shall be owned by The Art Institutes International Minnesota (or by The Art Institutes International Minnesota and any other party as specified in any written grant, program or agreement). The creator of any Intellectual Property that is or might be owned by The Art Institutes International Minnesota under this Policy is required to make reasonable prompt written disclosure of the Work to an officer designated by The Art Institutes International Minnesota s President, and to execute any document deemed necessary by The Art Institutes International Minnesota to perfect legal rights in The Art Institutes International Minnesota and enable The Art Institutes International Minnesota to file applications for registration when desired. 3. Ownership Rights in Specific Types of Works. For purposes of clarification and without limiting the general rule and exceptions set forth in Sections III.A.1 and 2 above, ownership rights in the following types of Works are allocated as set forth below: (a) Curricular materials including course outlines, curricula, lesson plans, course handouts, PowerPoint and other presentation materials (in all forms and media), course content and syllabi are deemed to be Works Made for Hire and therefore all Intellectual Property associated therewith is owned by The Art Institutes International Minnesota. Likewise, student rosters, attendance forms, interim grade reports, and assessments of student projects, including all Intellectual Property associated therewith, belong solely to The Art Institutes International Minnesota. (b) Unless developed under the circumstances set forth in Section III.A.2 (a) through (f), or a written agreement provides otherwise, scholarly articles and papers written for publication in journals, presentations and scholarly papers prepared for seminars and conferences, and personal lecture or teaching notes are typically not considered to be owned by The Art Institutes International Minnesota as Works Made for Hire or otherwise. (c) If any Intellectual Property to be owned by The Art Institutes International Minnesota under Section III.A.2 (a) through (f) above is developed jointly with a non-institution party, the parties respective ownership and usage rights in the resulting Intellectual Property shall be set forth in a written agreement. (d) Where Intellectual Property is to be developed using Substantial Institutional Resources, authorized representatives of The Art Institutes International Minnesota will develop a written agreement with the user of those resources, which must be executed by the parties prior to use of the resources, to identify the nature and terms of the use, including possible reimbursements or other systems of compensation back to The Art Institutes International Minnesota. (e) Unless a Work is developed under the circumstances set forth in Section III.A.2 (a) through (f), or a written agreement provides otherwise, all Intellectual Property created by faculty during sabbatical are owned by the faculty. (f) Unless the Work is developed under the circumstances set forth in Section III.A.2 (a) through (f), or a written agreement provides otherwise, Intellectual Property created by a Student working on his or her own, or developed in the context of a course, is owned by the Student and The Art Institutes International Minnesota will not use the Student s Work without the Student s permission to do so. (g) Students working on a project governed by an existing written agreement to which The Art Institutes International Minnesota is a party are bound by all terms of that agreement. (h) Students hired to carry out specific tasks that contribute to Intellectual Property of The Art Institutes International Minnesota retain no rights of ownership in whole or in part to that Intellectual Property or to the Student s contribution to that work.

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA (i) (j) Students who wish to work collaboratively with Institutional Employees on projects which involve the creation of Works and Intellectual Property are required to sign and deliver an acceptable written agreement to The Art Institutes International Minnesota outlining their rights before commencing work on such projects. Either party has the right to initiate such agreement. The rights of The Art Institutes International Minnesota to a perpetual, worldwide license (exclusive or non-exclusive, as The Art Institutes International Minnesota deems necessary), to use and reproduce copyrighted materials for educational, research, and promotional purposes must be included in any agreement with a non- Institution sponsor. B. Independent Contractor Works. As a general rule, The Art Institutes International Minnesota will own Intellectual Property created by an independent contractor if a written agreement signed by the parties so provides, or The Art Institutes International Minnesota has specially ordered or commissioned the work and such work is designated as a Work Made for Hire in a signed written agreement between the parties. If The Art Institutes International Minnesota does not own the Intellectual Property created by an independent contractor, it shall have a right or license to use any Work produced by the independent contractor in the course of performance of the contract, in accordance with the parties agreement. IV. Institution s Usage Rights To the extent that faculty, staff or Institutional Employees retain ownership of Work and Intellectual Property according to this Policy, The Art Institutes International Minnesota shall have a permanent, non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty free right and license to make educational use of such Work and Intellectual Property, including the right to use, reproduce, distribute, display, perform and modify (i.e. create derivative works) such Work and Intellectual Property in all forms and media now known or hereafter existing in connection with its curriculum, courses of instruction and educational programs, and any related accreditation or promotion of The Art Institutes International Minnesota. Where practicable, The Art Institutes International Minnesota will use best efforts to cite the creator of the Work if The Art Institutes International Minnesota exercises such usage rights. V. Institution s Marks Intellectual Property comprised of or associated with The Art Institutes International Minnesota s Trademarks and Service Marks, including but not limited to its name, logos, slogans, insignia, and other symbols of identity (collectively the Marks ) belongs exclusively to The Art Institutes International Minnesota and/or its affiliates. This Policy is designed to protect the reputation of The Art Institutes International Minnesota and its affiliates, and to prevent the illegal or unapproved use of The Art Institutes International Minnesota s Marks. No Institution Mark may be used without the prior, written authorization of the appropriate authorities of The Art Institutes International Minnesota. However, faculty, staff, and Students may identify their status or professional affiliation with The Art Institutes International Minnesota as appropriate, but any use of The Art Institutes International Minnesota s Marks in this regard must avoid any confusing, misleading or false impression of affiliation with, or sponsorship or endorsement by, The Art Institutes International Minnesota. No products or services may be marked, offered, sold, promoted or distributed with or under The Art Institutes International Minnesota s Marks without The Art Institutes International Minnesota s prior written permission and compliance with the licensing policies of The Art Institutes International Minnesota. All requests for use of Institution Marks must be submitted in writing to an officer designated by the President. The designated Institution officer retains information concerning what marks, names, logos, symbols, insignias, and related words, phrases, and images currently comprise The Art Institutes International Minnesota s Marks. VI. Substantial Use of Institution Resources Although Substantial Institutional Resources is defined (see Section II. Terminology), it is acknowledged that such resources and their use may change over time, with changes in technology, physical infrastructure of The Art Institutes International Minnesota, modes of employment, etc. Therefore, this Policy allows the Academic Policy Advisory Committee to review the definition of substantial use from time to time and implement any changes or clarification to the definitions which The Art Institutes International Minnesota deems necessary in order to establish an appropriate standard. VII. Review Scheme Questions concerning this Intellectual Property Policy should be addressed to the Dean of Academic Affairs. 165

Student Affairs (CONTINUED) 166 VIII. Reservation of Rights The Art Institutes International Minnesota reserves the right at any time in its sole discretion to modify and/or make changes to the Policy as advisable or appropriate. [The Art Institutes International Minnesota agrees, however, that it will endeavor to notify the entire Institution community through both print and electronic means of its intention to make modifications and/or changes to the Policy at least 30 working days prior to their enactment. IX. Effective Date This Policy supersedes any preexisting Intellectual Property policy of The Art Institutes International Minnesota and will remain in effect until modified or revoked by The Art Institutes International Minnesota. This Policy will be binding on all parties who create Intellectual Property after the effective date, and this Policy and other agreements that represent modifications to this Policy shall remain binding on such creators even after their relationship with The Art Institutes International Minnesota changes or terminates. X. Governing Law This Policy shall be governed by and interpreted under applicable federal laws pertaining to intellectual property and applicable state law, without regard to choice of law provisions. NO HARASSMENT POLICY The Art Institutes International Minnesota is committed to providing workplaces and learning environments that are free from harassment on the basis of any protected classification including, but not limited to race, sex, gender, color, religion, sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, age, national origin, disability, medical condition, marital status, veteran status, genetic marker or on any other basis protected by law. Such conduct is unprofessional, unproductive, illegal, and generally considered bad for business. Consequently, all conduct of this nature is expressly prohibited, regardless of whether it violates any law. Definition of Sexual Harassment Sexual harassment consists of unwelcome sexual advances, requests for sexual favors, sexual violence or other verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature where: a. Submission to such conduct is an explicit or implicit term or condition of a person s status in a course, program or activity or in admission, or in an academic decision; b. Submission to or rejection of such conduct is used as a basis for an academic decision; or c. Such conduct has the purpose or effect of unreasonably interfering with an individual s work or academic performance or creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive work or educational environment. Sexual violence is considered to be a form of sexual harassment and is defined as physical sexual acts perpetrated against a person s will or where a person is incapable of giving consent due to the victim s use of drugs or alcohol. Other examples of sexual harassment include, but are not limited to: unwanted sexual advances; demands for sexual favors in exchange for favorable treatment; verbal abuse of a sexual nature; graphic commentary about an individual s body, sexual prowess, or sexual deficiencies; leering; whistling; touching; pinching; assault; coerced sexual acts; suggestive, insulting or obscene comments or gestures; stalking; and displaying sexually suggestible objects or pictures. The Art Institutes International Minnesota prohibits all conduct of this nature whether or not such conduct violates any applicable laws. Other Forms of Harassment Verbal abuse, insulting comments and gestures, and other harassing conduct are also forbidden under this policy when directed at an individual because of his or her race, color, sex, sexual orientation, familial status, age, religion, ethnic origin, genetic marker or disability. It is the responsibility of each employee and each student to conduct himself or herself in a professional manner at all times and to refrain from such harassment. Complaint Procedure Students who feel they have been harassed should follow the Student Grievance Procedure for Internal Complaints of Harassment and Discrimination (the Student Grievance Procedure ). Students who have been subjected to sexual violence should also review the Policy Concerning Sexual Violence and Programs and Procedures Regarding Sexual Assault (available in the Student Affairs Office). Regardless if a complaint is filed under the Student Grievance Procedure, promptly after learning of such alleged conduct, The Art Institutes International Minnesota will conduct an investigation for the purpose of determining whether prohibited harassment has occurred. Efforts will be made to ensure confidentiality to the extent consistent with the goal of conducting an appropriate investigation. Students who initiate or participate in such investigations in good faith will be protected against subsequent harassment and school-related retaliation. If an investigation confirms the

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA allegations, The Art Institutes International Minnesota will take prompt corrective action, which may include discipline, up to and including immediate dismissal. Policy Concerning Sexual Violence Sexual violence refers to physical sexual acts perpetrated against a person s will or where a person is incapable of giving consent due to the victim s use of drugs or alcohol. Sexual violence includes rape, sexual assault, sexual battery and sexual coercion. Sexual violence is considered a form of sexual harassment, and is therefore a form of sex discrimination. Acts involving sexual violence, sexual harassment or sex discrimination are not tolerated by The Art Institutes International Minnesota. Complaints of sexual violence should be made to Dean of Student Affairs at (612) 656-6865. Upon learning of possible sexual violence involving a student, The Art Institutes International Minnesota will take immediate action to investigate or otherwise determine what happened. Such action may include, but is not limited to, speaking with the alleged victim, the alleged perpetrator and other potential witness as appropriate and reviewing other evidence such as calendars, videos, phone records, etc. If The Art Institutes International Minnesota determines that sexual violence may have occurred, The Art Institutes International Minnesota will take steps proactively designed to promptly and effectively end the sexual violence or the threat of sexual violence, prevent its recurrence, and address its effects regardless of whether the alleged actions are subject to criminal investigation. 5. Providing academic support services, such as tutoring 6. Arranging for the victim to re-take a course or withdraw from a class without penalty. Disciplinary Actions and Sanctions On-campus disciplinary procedures against students will be in accordance with The Art Institutes International Minnesota s published Student Code of Conduct and the Student Grievance Procedure for Internal Complaints of Discrimination and Harassment. Both the accuser and the accused are entitled to have others present during a disciplinary proceeding. Both will be informed of the outcome of any campus disciplinary proceeding. For this purpose, the outcome of a disciplinary proceeding means only The Art Institutes International Minnesota s final determination with respect to the alleged sexual offense and any sanction that is imposed against the accused. Sanctions, which may be imposed following a final determination of a disciplinary proceeding regarding rape, acquaintance rape, or other forcible or non-forcible sex offenses, may include warning, probation, suspension or dismissal. Students who have been subjected to sexual violence are encouraged to review the No Harassment Policy, the Non-Discrimination Policy, the Student Grievance Procedure for Internal Complaints of Discrimination and Harassment and the Programs and Procedures Regarding Sexual Assault Available in the Student Affairs Office in Pence 209. The Art Institutes International Minnesota will use good faith efforts to protect the alleged victim from any hostile environment at the school and any subsequent harassment or retaliation. Such efforts may occur prior to the outcome of the investigation and may include: 1. Reporting any subsequent harassment or retaliation to Dean of Student Affairs at (612) 656-6865 2. Providing an escort to ensure the alleged victim can move safely between classes and activities 3. Ensuring that the alleged victim and the alleged perpetrator do not attend the same classes 4. Providing referral to counseling services or providers 167

Tuition And Fees CURRENT SCHEDULE OF CHARGES The current tuition and fees applicable to The Art Institutes International Minnesota programs are as follows: (This is based on $481 per credit hour.) Bachelors DegreeS Tuition per Quarter (Avg. 16 credits/quarter) Tuition per Quarter (Diploma based on 12 credits/quarter) Advertising Audio Production Culinary Management Design Management Digital Filmmaking & Video Production Fashion & Retail Management Fashion Design Bachelor s Bachelor s Bachelor s Bachelor s Bachelor s Bachelor s Bachelor s $7,696 $7,696 $7,696 $7,696 $7,696 $7,696 $7,696 Application Fee* $50 $50 $50 $50 $50 $50 $50 Enrollment Fee** $100 $100 $100 $100 $100 $100 $100 Supply Kit (Estimated)*** $394.06 $1,062.09 $771.78 $394.06 $1,477.05 $664.56 Culinary Lab Fee Costs/Credit**** $50 Culinary Lab Credits/Program 58 Digital Resource Fee**** $2,300 $2,300 $2,300 $2,300 $2,300 $2,300 $2,300 Total Tuition per Academic Year NOT including supply kits or fees***** $23,088 $23,088 $23,088 $23,088 $23,088 $23,088 $23,088 Transitional Studies Fee $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 Tuition per Quarter (Avg. 16 credits/quarter) Tuition per Quarter (Diploma based on 12 credits/quarter) Graphic Design Hospitality Management Interior Design Media Arts & Animation Photography Visual Effects & Motion Graphics Web Design & Interactive Media Bachelor s Bachelor s Bachelor s Bachelor s Bachelor s Bachelor s Bachelor s $7,696 $7,696 $7,696 $7,696 $7,696 $7,696 $7,696 Application Fee* $50 $50 $50 $50 $50 $50 $50 Enrollment Fee** $100 $100 $100 $100 $100 $100 $100 Supply Kit (Estimated)*** $394.06 $394.06 $1,062.09 $771.78 $394.06 $1,477.05 Culinary Lab Fee Costs/Credit**** $50 Culinary Lab Credits/Program 58 Digital Resource Fee**** $2,300 $2,300 $2,300 $2,300 $2,300 $2,300 $2,300 Total Tuition per Academic Year NOT including supply kits or fees***** $23,088 $23,088 $23,088 $23,088 $23,088 $23,088 $23,088 Transitional Studies Fee $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 * The application fee is paid by new and transfer students only. ** The enrollment fee is paid by new and transfer students only. *** Monthly consumable supplies included with the $50 per Culinary Lab Credit Fee. The lab fees will be treated as part of the tuition for refund purposes. **** Monthly consumable supplies included with the $50 per Culinary Lab Credit Fee. The lab fees will be treated as part of the tuition for refund purposes. ***** The digital resource fee includes the cost of the digital textbook as well as other digital resources which are integrated into the course and vary by program. The fee includes all applicable taxes. This estimated fee assumes all courses require a digital resource; however currently not all courses use digital resources. Courses that include digital resources will be noted in the registration material and the fee will be charged automatically in addition to tuition. If a course does not use digital resources, the student remains responsible for purchasing the required text and materials. The digital resource fee is $50 per course. ****** Not including starting kit. The Program Total cost is based on the current credit hour rate. Students are only charged for the credit hours you take each quarter. 168

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA associates DegreeS Tuition per Quarter (Avg. 16 credits/quarter) Tuition per Quarter (Diploma based on 12 credits/quarter) Graphic Design Interior Planning with AutoCAD Interior Design Web Design & Interactive Media Baking & Pastry Culinary Arts Associate s Associate s Associate s Associate s Associate s Associate s $7,696 $7,696 $7,696 $7,696 $7,696 $7,696 Application Fee* $50 $50 $50 $50 $50 $50 Enrollment Fee** $100 $100 $100 $100 $100 $100 Supply Kit (Estimated)*** $394.06 $678.39 $678.39 $394.06 $771.78 $771.78 Culinary Lab Fee Costs/Credit**** $50 $50 Culinary Lab Credits/Program 44 44 Digital Resource Fee**** $1,200 $1,250 $1,250 $1,200 $1,200 $1,200 Total Tuition per Academic Year NOT including supply kits or fees***** $23,088 $23,088 $23,088 $23,088 $23,08 $23,08 Transitional Studies Fee $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 diploma DegreeS Digital Image Management Fashion Retailing Web Design & Development Web Design & Interactive Communications The Art of Cooking Baking & Pastry Diploma Diploma Diploma Diploma Diploma Diploma Tuition per Quarter (Avg. 16 credits/quarter) Tuition per Quarter (Diploma based on 12 credits/quarter) $5,772 $5,772 $5,772 $5,772 $5,772 $5,772 Application Fee* $50 $50 $50 $50 $50 $50 Enrollment Fee** $100 $100 $100 $100 $100 $100 Supply Kit (Estimated)*** $771.78 $771.78 Culinary Lab Fee Costs/Credit**** $50 $50 $50 Culinary Lab Credits/Program 58 44 44 Digital Resource Fee**** $600 $600 $600 $600 $550 $550 Total Tuition per Academic Year NOT including supply kits or fees***** $23,088 $23,088 $23,088 $23,088 $17,316 $17,316 Transitional Studies Fee $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 $1,924 - $3,848 The Art Institute provides average time to completion and average credit loads for each type of program offered at this campus. Please visit our Student Consumer Information page to find the average time to completion for continuously enrolled students for each program type Bachelor s degree, Associate s degree, or diploma/certificate based upon a student taking 12 credit hours (minimum for full-time enrollment status) or 15 or 16 credit hours (a full load) per quarter. Changing programs, beginning programs at the mid-quarter start date, taking remedial courses, taking time off from coursework, registering for fewer hours or unsuccessful attempts at course completion will likely increase the total length of the program and overall cost of education from what is disclosed. Transfer credits awarded toward your program will likely decrease the overall length and cost of education. The Art Institutes International Minnesota is licensed as a private career school with the Minnesota Office of Higher Education pursuant to Minnesota Statutes, sections 141.21 to 141.32. Licensure is not an endorsement of the institution. Credits earned at the institution may not transfer to all other institutions. 169

Administration THE ART INSTITUTES INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA BOARD OF TRUSTEES Pam Carter-Mendenhall Chair Owner, Mendenhall Interiors Linda Hunter Vice President, Human Resources The Art Institutes Catherine Kelleher Sr. Vice President, Strategy and Development Education Management LLC John Knepper Board Member Private Consultant Principal Officers of Education Management Corporation Edward H. West Chief Executive Officer and President, Education Management Corporation Mick J. Beekhuizen Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer Carol A. DiBattiste Executive Vice President, Chief Legal, Privacy, Security, and Administrative Officer James C. Hobby Executive Vice President, Education System Operations Yorgo Koutsogiorgas President and CEO G Catering + Events Jennifer Sorenson, ex-officio President The Art Institutes International Minnesota THE ART INSTITUTES INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA BOARD OF DIRECTORS 170 The Art Institutes International Minnesota International LLC has a three-member Board of Directors, located at 210 Sixth Avenue, Pittsburgh, PA 15222. The members are Edward H. West, Danny F. Finuf and Charles L. Restivo Board of Directors of Education Management Corporation William R. Johnson Chairman Former Chief Executive Officer of H. J. Heinz Company Samuel C. Cowley Former Executive Vice President, Business Development, General Counsel and Secretary of Matrixx Initiatives, Inc. Adrian M. Jones Managing Director in the Principal Investment/ Merchant Banking Division of Goldman Sachs & Co. Jeffery T. Leeds President and co-founder of Leeds Equity Partners, LLC John R. McKernan, Jr. Former Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of Education Management Corporation Leo F. Mullin Former Chief Executive Officer of Delta Airlines Brian A. Napack Senior advisor of Providence Equity Partners LLC Paul J. Salem Senior Managing Director and a founder of Providence Equity Partners Edward H. West President and Chief Executive Officer of Education Management Corporation Peter O. Wilde Managing Director, Providence Equity Partners

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA School Map 171

THE ART INSTITUTEs INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA Notes The Art Institutes International Minnesota reserves the right to change the information contained in this catalog, including, but not limited to, program offerings, curriculum, admission requirements, tuition and fees, graduation requirements, and other policies, at any time. Notice is not required for a new policy to take effect; however, The Art Institutes International Minnesota will make reasonable attempts to notify students of any changes through Web site or email postings, mail distribution, or other methods deemed appropriate by the administration. Photographs Photographs and imagery within this catalog accurately depict the equipment, facilities and general population found at The Art Institutes International Minnesota but may not have been taken at the exact campus location. Publication Date: Nov 2014 2014 The Art Institutes International Minnesota See aiprograms.info for program duration, tuition, fees, and other costs, median debt, federal salary data, alumni success, and other important info. 172

15 South 9th Street Minneapolis, MN 55402 Phone: 612.332.3361 Toll-Free: 1.800.777.3643 create.aii.edu/minneapolis

2014 2015 The Art Institutes INTERNATIONAL MINNESOTA ACADEMIC CATALOG